MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data with MicroStrategy Analytics Express Version: 4.0 Document Number: 09770040

CONTENTS 1. Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express Introduction... 1 Signing up for a MicroStrategy Analytics Express account... 2 Logging in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express... 2 Starting MicroStrategy Analytics Express on an ipad... 4 Viewing dashboards... 4 Saving dashboards... 6 Creating a snapshot of your dashboard... 7 Exporting dashboards... 7 Exporting a dashboard... 7 Exporting a visualization... 8 Printing dashboards... 10 Suggesting a new data source... 10 2. Analyzing Data in Dashboards Introduction... 11 Analyzing data in a dashboard... 12 Analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-use dashboard... 14 Analyzing a customizable, detailed dashboard that gives you freedom pixel by pixel... 45 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad... 56 Viewing dashboards on an ipad... 57 Analyzing data on an ipad... 58 Sharing dashboards via email and annotating dashboards... 64 Printing dashboards from an ipad... 66 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. iii

Contents MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 3. Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data Introduction... 67 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express... 68 Best practices for creating dashboards... 71 Creating a dashboard... 73 Linking attributes across datasets... 94 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard... 95 Adding text and data to a dashboard... 95 Layering and organizing data in dashboards... 143 Letting users filter data in dashboards... 147 Formatting and working with dashboards... 155 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard... 176 Adding and removing datasets from detailed, customizable dashboards... 177 Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards... 178 Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard... 179 Adding selectors to dashboards... 182 Adding widgets to dashboards... 185 Adding Information Windows to dashboards... 202 Formatting dashboards... 206 4. Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users Introduction... 219 Creating, renaming, displaying, and deleting teams... 220 Adding, inviting, and managing users... 221 Adding a user to a team... 222 Adding multiple users to a team simultaneously... 223 Inviting users to join a team... 225 Adding personalization attributes to users... 225 Removing a user from a team... 227 Duplicating users across multiple teams... 227 Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups... 228 Creating Team Launchpads... 232 5. Sharing and Managing Dashboards Introduction... 237 Sharing dashboards with other users... 238 Personalizing the data to each team member... 240 Delivering your dashboards to users... 241 iv 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Contents Displaying your dashboard on a web page... 244 Refreshing the data in dashboards... 244 Creating and contributing to discussions... 247 Renaming dashboards... 249 Copying dashboards... 249 Deleting dashboards... 250 6. Interfaces for Working with Dashboards Introduction... 251 Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard... 252 Advanced Sort Editor... 252 Show Data dialog box... 253 Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard... 256 Dashboard Editor: My Data... 256 Dashboard Editor: Filters... 258 Dashboard Editor: Page-by... 259 Select a Visualization dialog box... 260 Show All dialog box... 263 Interfaces for creating visualizations... 264 Dashboard Editor: Graph... 264 Dashboard Editor: Grid... 268 Dashboard Editor: Heat Map... 269 Dashboard Editor: Map... 270 Dashboard Editor: Network... 271 Interfaces for formatting visualizations... 272 Dashboard Editor: Graph: Properties... 272 Dashboard Editor: Grid: Properties... 277 Dashboard Editor: Heat Map: Properties... 278 Dashboard Editor: Map: Properties... 280 Dashboard Editor: Network: Properties... 280 Axis Scale dialog box... 281 Threshold Editor... 282 Interfaces for adding interactivity to a dashboard... 284 Filtering Options dialog box... 285 Interfaces for creating metrics... 286 New Metric dialog box... 286 Select a Function dialog box... 287 Function Arguments dialog box... 288 Interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. v

Contents MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide dashboards... 289 Document Editor... 289 Document Editor: Layout area... 290 Document Editor: Dataset Objects... 290 Document Editor: Document Structure... 291 Document Editor: Grouping... 291 Document Editor: Notes... 292 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard... 293 About the Properties dialog box... 294 Properties dialog box, Page Setup, Page... 295 Properties dialog box, Page Setup, Margins... 296 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Layout... 297 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Color and Borders... 297 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Sections... 298 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Mobile... 298 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Advanced... 299 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Document... 300 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Export... 301 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Table of Contents... 302 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Watermark... 304 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Mobile... 306 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Advanced... 306 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard... 308 Properties and Formatting dialog box: General... 309 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Layout... 313 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Image... 319 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Grid... 319 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Line... 321 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Selector... 322 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Widget... 325 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Button... 326 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Advanced... 327 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Format options... 328 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Color and Lines... 329 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Font... 330 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Number... 331 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Alignment... 333 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Effects... 333 Interfaces for thresholds... 334 Visual Threshold Editor... 334 vi 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Contents Advanced Thresholds Editor... 337 Format Threshold dialog box... 339 Gradients dialog box... 342 Interfaces for conditional formatting... 342 Visual Conditional Formatting Editor... 343 Conditional Formatting Editor... 345 Format dialog box... 346 Interfaces for derived elements... 347 Derived Elements Editor... 348 Format: Derived Elements dialog box... 353 Interfaces for adding links... 356 Links Editor... 357 Select Target dialog box... 358 Interfaces for totals... 358 Subtotals Editor... 358 Subtotals Editor: Definitions tab... 359 Subtotals Editor: Advanced tab... 359 Subtotals Editor: Display tab... 360 Interfaces for formatting graphs... 361 Format: Graph dialog box... 361 Format: Graph dialog box: General tab... 362 Format: Graph dialog box: Format tab... 363 Format: Graph dialog box: Number tab... 367 Format: Graph dialog box: Axes tab... 369 Format: Graph dialog box: Advanced tab... 370 Format: Graph dialog box: Options tab... 370 Interfaces for creating metrics for customizable, detailed dashboards... 371 Insert Function dialog box... 371 Insert New Metrics dialog box: Derived metrics... 372 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards... 374 Attribute Forms dialog box... 375 Configure Selector dialog box... 376 Export dialog box... 377 Grouping Properties dialog box... 377 Manage Views Editor... 379 Sort Document dialog box... 382 Insert Layout dialog box... 383 View Filter dialog box... 384 Rename/Edit Objects dialog box... 385 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. vii

Contents MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 7. Additional Resources Resources... 387 Documentation... 387 Index... 399 viii 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

1 1.GETTING STARTED WITH MICROSTRATEGY ANALYTICS EXPRESS Introduction MicroStrategy Analytics Express allows you to quickly create visually-striking, interactive dashboards to display and explore your business data. Once created, you can share your dashboards with a team. This section shows you how to log in and get started using Analytics Express. Signing up for a MicroStrategy Analytics Express account, page 2 Logging in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express, page 2 Starting MicroStrategy Analytics Express on an ipad, page 4 Viewing dashboards, page 4 Saving dashboards, page 6 Creating a snapshot of your dashboard, page 7 Exporting dashboards, page 7 Printing dashboards, page 10 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 1

1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Signing up for a MicroStrategy Analytics Express account If you do not yet have a MicroStrategy Analytics Express account, you can sign up for an account. To sign up for an Analytics Express account 1 In a browser, go to www.microstrategy.com/express/. Click Sign In on the right. 2 Click Register Now. 3 In the Full Name and Address fields, type your full name and email address. 4 In the Password field, type the password to use for your Analytics Express account. In the next field, type your password again as confirmation. 5 In the next field, type the answer to the verification question, then press ENTER. A confirmation email is set to the email address that you provided, with instructions to activate your account. Logging in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express You can access MicroStrategy Analytics Express from any computer that can run an Internet browser. To log in to Analytics Express 1 In a browser, go to www.microstrategy.com/express/. Click Sign In on the right. 2 Log in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express using your user name and password. Click Sign In. 2 Signing up for a MicroStrategy Analytics Express account 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 1 3 If this is your first time logging in to Analytics Express, a welcome message is displayed asking if you would like to view a quick tour of Analytics Express. Do one of the following: To view the tour, click Yes. Click Next to continue viewing each section of the tour, then click Get Started when finished to begin using Analytics Express. To immediately begin using Analytics Express, click No Thanks. Click Get Started. 4 By default, the Dashboards page opens, displaying a list of all available dashboards. 5 A list of teams with which you can share dashboards is displayed in the Teams list to the left. If this is your first time logging in to Analytics Express, the Personal area is displayed. You can access free Personal functionality in the Personal area, including creating and sharing dashboards. 6 To begin using Analytics Express s reporting capability, click the name of an existing team from the Teams list or create a team with which to share your dashboards. For background information and steps to create a team, see Creating, renaming, displaying, and deleting teams, page 220. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Logging in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express 3

1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Starting MicroStrategy Analytics Express on an ipad Prerequisite The following procedure assumes that you have already installed the MicroStrategy Mobile application on your ipad. For installation requirements, such as supported ios versions, see the MicroStrategy Readme. To log in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express on an ipad 1 Launch the MicroStrategy Mobile application. 2 On the Home screen, tap the gear button, then tap MicroStrategy Analytics Express. 3 Enter your email address and password in the Email and Password fields, then tap Sign In. 4 A list is displayed to the left, containing each team that you belong to. 5 Tap any team to view the dashboards available for viewing in the team. If a Team Launchpad has been created for the team, the Team Launchpad is displayed. You can tap the links in the Team Launchpad to open links, view dashboards, and so on. To analyze data in a dashboard on an ipad, see Analyzing dashboards on an ipad, page 56. Viewing dashboards A dashboard is commonly used to assess company performance, to take a quick status check of the company, or to monitor personal work or work group contributions to overall goals of the business. Dashboards summarize 4 Starting MicroStrategy Analytics Express on an ipad 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 1 key business indicators by presenting them in visually intuitive, easy-to-read, interactive documents. To open a dashboard 1 Log in to Analytics Express using your user name and password. 2 To view the dashboards available for a specific team, from the left under Teams, select the name of the team whose dashboards you want to view. A team is a collection of users that can share their dashboards securely with any other members of their team. 3 From the top of the Analytics Express home page, click Dashboards. A list of available dashboards is displayed. If the Dashboards page is not displayed, from the toolbar, click Full Navigation. If the Full Navigation option is not available, from the right, click the image or text link of the dashboard that you want to open. 4 You can filter the list of dashboards displayed on the Dashboards page. From the left, under Views, select one of the following: All Dashboards: View all available dashboards. Owned By Me: View only the dashboards that you own. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Viewing dashboards 5

1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Shared With Me: View dashboards that other users have shared with you. 5 Click the name of the dashboard to open it and view its data. 6 To view the dashboard in Full Screen Mode, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Full Screen or Presentation View icon. To exit Full Screen Mode, click the Exit Full Screen icon. 7 To analyze the data displayed in a dashboard, see Analyzing data in a dashboard, page 12. Saving dashboards You can make changes to the dashboard and save them for easy access at a later date. Prerequisite You must have permission to modify and save the dashboard. To save a dashboard 1 Open the dashboard that you want to save, and make any changes. For steps to create or modify dashboards, see About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express, page 68. 2 Save your changes by doing one of the following: To save your changes and continue viewing the dashboard, click Save. To save your changes and close the dashboard, click Save and Close. 3 If you are saving a new dashboard, the Save As dialog box opens. Type a name and description for the dashboard, then click OK to save your changes. 6 Saving dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 1 Creating a snapshot of your dashboard You can view a quick snapshot of your dashboard results outside of Analytics Express. You do this by exporting the dashboard as an image file. To create a snapshot of a dashboard 1 In the dashboard, from the Tools menu, point to Export, then select Image. If this option is not available, your dashboard was designed to support exporting to an Excel or PDF file. For steps, see To export a dashboard, page 7. 2 Navigate to the location in which you want to save the dashboard image, then type a name for the image in the File Name field. 3 Click Save to save your image. Exporting dashboards You can export a dashboard, or you can export a single visualization in a dashboard. For steps, see the appropriate link below: Exporting a dashboard, page 7 Exporting a visualization, page 8 Exporting a dashboard If your dashboard supports exporting, you can export the dashboard to a PDF or Excel file for viewing outside of Analytics Express. To export a dashboard 1 In the dashboard, do one of the following: 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating a snapshot of your dashboard 7

1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide If your dashboard contains the Home menu, from the Home menu, point to Export. If your dashboard contains the Tools menu, from the Tools menu, point to Export. 2 Select one of the following: Excel: To export the dashboard as an Excel file, select Excel. If this option is not available, your dashboard was designed to support exporting to a a PDF file. To open the Excel file, click Open. The dashboard is exported and displayed in a browser window. To save a copy of the Excel file, click Save. The Excel file is saved. To save a copy of the Excel file using a specific name and location, click Save As. Navigate to the location in which you want to save the Excel file and specify a name for the file in the File Name field. Click OK. The Excel file is saved. PDF: To export the dashboard as a PDF file, select PDF. The dashboard is exported and displayed in a browser window. Exporting a visualization Once you have added one or more data visualizations to your dashboard, you can export the visualization to a file for viewing outside of Analytics Express. For more information on visualizations, as well as steps to add them to a dashboard, see Creating, adding, and deleting visualizations, page 98. You can export a visualization to the following file formats: PDF file: Export the visualization to a PDF file in a reader, such as Adobe Reader. You can view the PDF on any device with a PDF reader, such as another computer, a Linux machine, a Nook, or a Kindle. This option is available for Grid and Graph visualizations. Excel file: Export the visualization to a stand-alone Excel file, to view and interact with the data outside of Analytics Express. This option is available for Grid and Graph visualizations. Image: Export the visualization as an image, similar to taking a screenshot. 8 Exporting dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 1 Data: Save the underlying data in a visualization as a tabular comma-separated values (CSV) file. For example, a Graph visualization contains a line graph that displays revenue data across several different product categories. You can save the data in the visualization as a CSV file, with revenue data for each product category displayed in a tabular format. To export a visualization 1 In the dashboard, hover the cursor over the title bar of the visualization you want to export, then click the arrow icon in the top right. If this option is not available, the visualization was not designed to be exported. 2 Point to Export, then select one of the following: Data: To export the visualization as a CSV file, select Data. Navigate to the location in which you want to save the CSV file and specify a name for the file in the File Name field. Click OK. The CSV file is saved. Image: To export the visualization as an image, select Image. Navigate to the location in which you want to save the image and specify a name for the image in the File Name field. Click OK. The image is saved. Excel: To export the visualization as an Excel file, select Excel. Do one of the following: To open the Excel file, click Open. The visualization is exported and displayed in a browser window. To save a copy of the Excel file, click Save. The Excel file is saved. To save a copy of the Excel file using a specific name and location, click Save As. Navigate to the location in which you want to save the Excel file and specify a name for the file in the File Name field. Click OK. The Excel file is saved. PDF: To export the visualization as a PDF file, select PDF. The visualization is exported and displayed in a browser window. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exporting dashboards 9

1 Getting Started with MicroStrategy Analytics Express MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Printing dashboards To print a dashboard 1 In the dashboard, from the Home menu, select Print. If this option is not available, the dashboard was not designed to print. 2 Print the dashboard from the browser window. Suggesting a new data source Analytics Express offers a wide variety of data sources to use when creating a dashboard. For example, you can create a dashboard using data from an Excel or CSV file, a Dropbox account, a Google Drive account, or a database. You can suggest new data sources for Analytics Express. To suggest a new data source 1 In Analytics Express, log in with your user name and password. If the Dashboards page is not displayed, from the toolbar, click Full Navigation. 2 Click New Dashboard. 3 From the left, click Suggest a Data Source. A new email addressed to MicroStrategy is created and opened in your default email client. Type your suggestion, then send the email. 10 Printing dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

2 2.ANALYZING DATA IN DASHBOARDS Introduction MicroStrategy Analytics Express provides a variety of richly interactive, out-of-the-box data visualizations that allow you to display and examine data. You can easily interact with your data to identify trends, patterns, and details at a glance. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 11

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide For example, you can: Display a smaller, more manageable subset of information by filtering data. Emphasize the data that you are most interested in by sorting information. Examine your data at different levels of detail by drilling on the data. For example, if you are examining sales data at a regional level, you can choose to drill down to view the same data at the level of individual franchise locations. This section describes ways to take advantage of Analytics Express s analytical capabilities. Analyzing data in a dashboard, page 12 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad, page 56 Analyzing data in a dashboard Depending on the way that a dashboard has been designed, you can analyze data in the dashboard in the following ways: If the dashboard was designed as a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, you can filter, drill, and group data in a dashboard, or view your data using a variety of interactive data visualizations. 12 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 The following widgets are available: Graph visualization: You can display and examine your data using a variety of different graph types, such as area graphs, line graphs, or pie charts. Grid visualization: You can display data in an interactive grid, allowing users to pivot, sort, move, drill, filter, and perform additional manipulations on data displayed in the grid. Heat Map visualization: You can display the data as a combination of colored rectangles. Each rectangle represents an attribute element, and is colored and sized according to the value of metrics in the visualization, allowing users to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at one time. Map visualization: You can display locations as image markers or bubble markers on a map. You can enable map items to be clustered together and displayed as a circle when a large number of map markers must be displayed in the same map area. Network visualization: You can display the data as a network of nodes, with lines between the nodes representing relationships between attribute elements. For steps to analyze data in a dashboard as described above, see Analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-use dashboard, page 14. If the dashboard was designed as a detailed, customizable dashboard, you can view more information about your data using interactive data visualizations (called widgets). 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 13

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide The following data visualizations are available: Data Cloud widget: The names of business attribute elements are displayed in various sizes to depict the differences in metric values between the elements. The varying sizes allow a user to quickly identify the most significant, positive, or negative contributions. Heat Map widget: You can quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of business variables at once using the Heat Map visualization. The data is displayed as a combination of colored rectangles, with each rectangle representing a business attribute element, and the rectangles are colored and sized according to the value of business metrics in the visualization. Microcharts widget: The data is displayed using one or more compact charts that allow you to quickly visualize trends. Bar, sparkline, and bullet microcharts are available to convey information about multiple business attribute elements at a glance. For steps to analyze data in a dashboard as described above, see Analyzing a customizable, detailed dashboard that gives you freedom pixel by pixel, page 45. Analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-use dashboard You can analyze data in a quick, easy-to-use dashboard based on: Business attribute elements: The elements of a business attribute are the unique values for that attribute. For example, 2006 and 2007 are elements of the Year attribute, while New York and London are elements of the City attribute. The value of a metric: For example, a store manager can see sales numbers for the top 5 high-performing locations in a franchise, or products that have generated over $1 million in revenue. You can examine your data at multiple levels of detail: Layout tabs: If you filter or group data in a layout tab, your selections are automatically applied to every visualization on the layout tab. For example, a dashboard contains a Grid visualization and a Heat Map visualization, which both display cost and revenue data for a series of cities and retail suppliers. Both are located on the same layout tab. If you filter to display data for the Annapolis, Chantilly, and New York only, both the Grid visualization and the Heat Map visualization are updated to only include data for these locations. 14 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 See the appropriate links below for steps to analyze data: Filtering data in a dashboard, page 16 Grouping data in a dashboard, page 21 Visualizations: If you filter, drill, sort, or perform other data manipulations on the data in a visualization, your changes are applied only to the visualization, and do not affect the display of any other visualizations in the dashboard. In the image below, the data in the Grid visualization to the left has been filtered to include data only for Annapolis, but the Heat Map contains data for New York, Annapolis, and Chantilly. For steps to analyze the data in a visualization, see the links below: Analyzing data in a Graph visualization, page 23 Analyzing data in a Grid visualization, page 31 Analyzing data in a Heat Map visualization, page 34 Analyzing data in a Map visualization, page 36 Analyzing data in a Network visualization, page 39 Removing filtering or drilling in a visualization, page 41 Examining the underlying data in a visualization, page 41 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 15

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Removing filtering or drilling in a visualization, page 41 You can ensure that a dashboard displays the most up-to-date information by refreshing the data. For steps, see Refreshing the data in dashboards, page 244. Filtering data in a dashboard You can display smaller, more manageable subsets of information by filtering data. For example, a dashboard contains the number of on time, 16 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 delayed, and canceled flights across several airports, and includes data from multiple airlines. You can choose which airlines to include in your display. When you filter data in a dashboard, your selections are applied to every visualization on the layout tab currently selected in the dashboard. For example, a dashboard contains a Grid visualization and a Heat Map visualization, which both display sales data for a series of regions. Both are displayed on separate panels and are located on the Sales layout tab. If you select to only display data in the Grid visualization for the Northeast and Southeast regions, both the Grid visualization and the Heat Map visualization will be updated to only include data for Northeast and Southeast. Depending on the display style that the designer of a dashboard has chosen to use when adding filters to the dashboard, the steps to filter data may vary, as described in the links below: To filter data by selecting attribute elements, page 18 To filter data by searching for attribute elements, page 19 To filter data by selecting metric values from a slider, page 19 To filter data by defining a comparison based on a metric, page 20 To clear all selections in a filter, page 20 To clear selections in all filters, page 20 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 17

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide You can also filter data in a single visualization, without affecting the data displayed in any other visualization. For steps, see the appropriate link below: Analyzing data in a Graph visualization, page 23 Analyzing data in a Grid visualization, page 31 Analyzing data in a Heat Map visualization, page 34 Analyzing data in a Map visualization, page 36 Analyzing data in a Network visualization, page 39 Prerequisite The following procedures assume that you are already viewing the dashboard in which you want to filter data. To filter data by selecting attribute elements 1 If the Filters panel is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 Locate the name of the attribute in the Filters panel that you want to filter data based on. 3 If no filtering options are displayed, click the arrow icon to the left of the attribute s name to expand the filter. 4 Choose from the following: To display data for an attribute element, select the attribute element. To exclude data for an attribute element, clear the attribute element. To display data for all attribute elements at once, select the All option. If the filter contains many items, a search field is displayed. You can narrow the list of attribute elements displayed in the filter. Type the name of an attribute in the field to update the list of results. 5 If the data is not automatically filtered, click Apply to filter data using your selections. 18 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 To filter data by searching for attribute elements 1 If the Filters panel is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 In the Filters panel, locate the name of the attribute that you want to filter data based on. 3 If no filtering options are displayed, click the arrow icon to the left of the attribute s name to expand the filter. 4 In the search field, type the name of the attribute element that you want to display data for. 5 From the drop-down list, select the name of the element. The element is added to the list of elements in the filter. 6 Repeat the appropriate steps above to add additional elements to the filter. You can remove an element from the filter by clicking the x icon next to the element that you want to remove. 7 If the data is not automatically filtered, click Apply to filter data using your selections. To filter data by selecting metric values from a slider 1 If the Filters panel is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 In the Filters panel, locate the name of the metric that you want to filter data based on. If no filtering options are displayed, click the arrow icon to the left of the metric s name to expand the filter. 3 Do one of the following: To display data for a general range of metric values, click and drag the endpoints of the slider to cover the range of values for which you want to display data. The selected value range is automatically highlighted in blue. To display data for a specific range of values, press CTRL and click on the endpoint of the slider. Type the value you want to use as the new endpoint of the value range, then press ENTER. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 19

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 4 If the data is not automatically filtered, click Apply to filter data using your selections. To filter data by defining a comparison based on a metric 1 If the Filters panel is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 In the Filters panel, locate the name of the metric that you want to filter data based on. If no filtering options are displayed, click the arrow icon to the left of the metric s name to expand the filter. 3 Click Greater than. From the drop-down list, select the operator you want to use to compare data, such as Less Than or Equals. For example, to display data for metric values that are less than $5 million, select Less Than. 4 In the field, type the value that you want to compare the metric to, then press ENTER. For example, to display data for metric values that are less than $5 million, type 5000000. 5 If the data is not automatically filtered, click Apply to filter data using your selections. To clear all selections in a filter 1 If the Filters panel is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 Next to the name of the filter, click the Clear Filter icon. All the selections in the filter are cleared and all data for the attribute or metric that the filter is based on is displayed. To clear selections in all filters 1 If the Filters panel is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 Hover the cursor over the Filters panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right of the panel. 20 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 3 Select Clear All Filters. All the selections in the Filters panel are cleared and all data is displayed. Grouping data in a dashboard When you have a very large set of data in a dashboard, it can be easier to work with that data by grouping it into subsets based on a business attribute, and viewing only one of the subsets at a time. For example, a Heat Map in a dashboard displays cost and revenue data by City and Supplier. You can group the data by City and view the salary expenditures data by Supplier, one city at a time. All the data from the Heat Map is grouped into smaller, more manageable sections. Once you have chosen to group data by an attribute, you can: Click an attribute element to display the grouped data Display an animation of the data grouped by each attribute element in turn. Steps are below to group and ungroup data, as well as to display an animation of the grouped data. To group data in a dashboard 1 If the My Data panel is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. If the Page-by area is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Page-by. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 21

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 2 In the dashboard, do one of the following: To group data by an attribute, perform the following steps: a b From the My Data panel, drag and drop the attribute you want to use to group data onto the Page-by area. The elements of the attribute are automatically displayed as options in the Page-by area. By default, attribute elements in the Page-by area are displayed as selectable buttons on a button bar. You can change the style in which elements in the Page-by area are displayed. For example, you can choose to display the attribute elements as options in a drop-down list. Hover the cursor over the name of the attribute in the Page-by area, then click the arrow icon to the right and select from the list of display options. To group data using a different attribute than the attribute currently used to group data, from the My Data panel, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute in the Page-by area. Point to Replace with and select the attribute you want to group data by. To ungroup your data, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute displayed in the Page-by area, then click the arrow icon to the right and select Remove. Playing an animation of the grouped data You can display an animation of your data grouped by each attribute element in the Page-by area in a dashboard. For example, in the image below, the Page-by area contains several different cities. You can view an animation that 22 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 displays data in the dashboard grouped by Annapolis, then Baltimore, then Chantilly, and so on. To play an animation of the grouped data 1 If the Page-by area is not displayed in the dashboard, from the Show menu, select Page-by. 2 Do one of the following: To show the animation and display the data grouped by each element in the Page-by area, click the Play icon. To pause the animation, click the Stop icon. Analyzing data in a Graph visualization A Graph visualization allows you to view your data in a graphical layout, such as a bar graph or scatter graph. A designer can select from a variety of graph 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 23

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide styles to display the data. In the example below, the designer chose the vertical bar graph style. While viewing a Graph visualization, you can swap the data displayed on the horizontal axis with the data displayed on the vertical axis. From the toolbar, click the Swap icon. The data displayed on the horizontal axis is swapped with the data displayed on the vertical axis. See the appropriate link below for example images and steps to analyze data displayed in different types of graphs: For example images of the graph styles available for Graph visualizations, see Examples of Graph visualization styles, page 25. For steps to analyze the data in a dual-axis or combination graph, see Analyzing the data in dual-axis or combination graphs, page 26. For steps to analyze the data in any other type of Graph visualization, such as bar graphs, line graphs, and pie graphs, see Analyzing the data in all other graph types, page 28. 24 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 Examples of Graph visualization styles The table below contains example images of each graph style available for a Graph visualization. Graph Style Line Description You can view your data as a vertical or horizontal line graph, with lines representing metric values for each element of an attribute. Example Image Bar You can view your data as a vertical or horizontal bar graph, with bars representing metric values for each element of an attribute. Area You can display the data in a vertical or horizontal area graph, to allow users to view an area representing metric values for each element of an attribute. Scatter You can view a scatter plot to visualize the trends of two different metrics for a set of attribute elements. In the scatter plot: One bubble is displayed for each attribute element. Each bubble s position on the X-axis represents the value of the first metric. Each bubble's position on the Y-axis represents the value of the second metric. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 25

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Graph Style Bubble Grid Description You can view a bubble plot to visualize the trends of three or more metrics for a set of attribute elements. In the bubble plot: One bubble is displayed for each attribute element. Each bubble s position on the X-axis represents the value of the first metric. Each bubble's position on the Y-axis represents the value of the second metric. The size of each bubble represents the value of the third metric. You can view a Grid to identify trends across combinations of data. Each marker in the grid can be automatically sized or colored based on the value of a metric. For example, in the image to the right, a separate bubble is displayed for each combination of publisher and quarter. Bubbles representing large revenue values are displayed in dark blue, and bubbles for smaller revenue values are displayed in light blue. Example Image Pie or Ring You can view the contribution of attribute elements or metrics to a total by displaying data in a pie or ring graph. Analyzing the data in dual-axis or combination graphs When analyzing the data in a dual-axis or combination graph, you can sort the attribute and metric data to determine the order in which information is displayed. For example, in a bar graph containing flight information across 26 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 several airports, you can display the bar risers in ascending or descending order based on the number of on-time flights for each airport. The table below contains a list of tasks to analyze data in a dual-axis or combination graph, and steps to perform them. Prerequisite The procedures below assume that the visualization in which you want to analyze data has already been created. To sort attributes or metrics in a Graph visualization in ascending or descending order 1 In a dashboard, click the Graph visualization. If the Graph panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. 2 In the Graph panel, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute or metric to use to sort your data, then click the arrow icon on the right. 3 Select one of the following: To sort the attribute or metric values in ascending order (from A to Z), select Sort Ascending. To sort the attribute or metric values in descending order (from Z to A), select Sort Descending. To sort data in a Graph visualization using multiple conditions 1 In a dashboard, click the Graph visualization. If the Graph panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. 1 In the Graph panel, hover the cursor over the name of an attribute or metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. 2 Select Advanced Sort, then do one of the following: To sort by data in the series of the graph, click the Rows tab. To sort by data in the categories of the graph, click the Columns tab. 3 From the Sort by drop-down list, select the attribute value or metric to use to sort data, then do one of the following: 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 27

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To sort the data in ascending order (from A to Z) based on the attribute or metric that you selected above, select Ascending. To sort the data in descending order (from Z to A) based on the attribute or metric that you selected above, select Descending. 4 If desired, define additional sorting criteria using the appropriate steps above. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. Analyzing the data in all other graph types You can drill on and examine your data at the level of a specific attribute element, or filter the data to display only the graph items you are interested in. Steps are included below to filter or drill on data in a Graph visualization. Depending on how the visualization was designed, you can determine whether to graph or slice data based on attributes in a Graph visualization. For example, in a bar graph that contains sales data across several years, you can slice the data to display columns of bar graphs, with each column containing a bar graph for a single year's sales data. For steps, see Determining whether to graph or slice data using attributes in a Graph visualization, page 29. You can drill on data in the following ways: When you drill on a scatter or bubble graph, Analytics Express filters the data to include only the graph items that you choose, then drills down into the data to display a separate graph item for each element of the attribute that you want to drill to. For example, a scatter graph contains profit data across several regions. If you select the bubbles for the Northeast and Central regions, then drill to Call Center, profit data for each call center in the Northeast and Central regions is displayed. When you drill on a vertical line graph, a vertical bar graph, vertical area graph, or grid, Analytics Express filters the data to include only the graph items that you choose, then displays your data in a separate graph column for each attribute element on the horizontal axis. For example, a vertical bar graph contains profit margin data across several years. If you select the bars for 2010 and 2011, then drill to Category, Analytics Express displays separate columns for 2010 and 2011 data. The 2010 column contains a graph displaying profit margin data 28 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 across multiple regions in 2010, and the 2011 column contains a graph displaying profit margin data across multiple regions in 2011. When you drill on a horizontal line graph, horizontal bar graph, or horizontal area graph, Analytics Express filters the data to include only the graph items that you choose, then displays your data in a separate graph row for each attribute element on the vertical axis. For example, a horizontal bar graph contains profit margin data across several years. If you select the bars for 2010 and 2011, then drill to Category, Analytics Express displays separate rows for 2010 and 2011 data. The 2010 row contains a graph displaying profit margin data across multiple regions in 2010, and the 2011 row contains a graph displaying profit margin data across multiple regions in 2011. To filter or drill on data in a Graph visualization 1 In the visualization, click the item that you want to filter or drill on. If desired, you can select multiple graph items at once by pressing CTRL and clicking each graph item that you want to select. 2 Hover the cursor over one of the selected graph items, then click the arrow icon. Select one of the following: To display only the graph items that you selected above and remove all other graph items from the visualization, select Keep Only. To display all graph items in the visualization except the graph items that you selected above, select Exclude. To drill on the data, point to Keep Only and Show, then select the level of data to display. For example, to display the data at the Product Category level, select Product Category. You can undo filtering or drilling on data. For steps, see Removing filtering or drilling in a visualization, page 41. Determining whether to graph or slice data using attributes in a Graph visualization When analyzing the data in a Graph visualization, you can slice the data into multiple graphs based on an attribute, or graph the attribute along the X-axis or Y-axis. For example, in the image below, the visualization is sliced into multiple columns of bar graphs based on Year. However, Category is graphed 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 29

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide on the X-axis, so Books, Electronics, and Movies are included on the X-axis of each graph. Prerequisites The procedure below assumes that the visualization in which you want to analyze data has already been created. The designer of the visualization must have enabled slicing the data in the visualization into multiple graphs. To determine whether to graph or slice data using attributes in a Graph visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the Graph visualization. If the Graph panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization.I 2 In the Vertical Axis area, if an arrow icon is displayed, click and drag the arrow icon so that it is displayed above the attributes to display on the Y-axis, and below the attributes to use to slice data into rows. The graph is updated and displayed. 3 In the Horizontal Axis area, if an arrow icon is displayed, click and drag the arrow icon so that it is displayed above the attributes to display on the X-axis, and below the attributes to use to slice data into columns. The graph is updated and displayed. 30 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 Analyzing data in a Grid visualization You can use a Grid visualization to analyze data displayed in a clean, tabular layout. For example, you can sort, rearrange, filter, and drill on data in the visualization. To resize the columns in a Grid visualization, page 31 To copy the contents of a Grid visualization to the clipboard, page 31 To sort attributes or metrics in a Grid visualization in ascending or descending order, page 32 To sort data in a Grid visualization using multiple conditions, page 32 To rearrange the attributes and metrics in a Grid visualization, page 33 To swap the attributes and metrics in the rows with those in the columns in a Grid visualization, page 33 To display subtotals in a Grid visualization, page 33 To filter or drill on data in a Grid visualization, page 34 To resize the columns in a Grid visualization 1 Hover the cursor over the right edge of the column to resize so that the cursor becomes directional arrows, then do one of the following: To resize the column manually, click and drag the column edge to the desired width. To have the column automatically sized to fit all of the column contents, double-click on the column edge. To copy the contents of a Grid visualization to the clipboard 1 In the grid, click the row that contains the data that you want to copy. You can select multiple rows by pressing SHIFT or CTRL and clicking additional rows. 2 Press CTRL + C. The contents of the selected rows are copied to the clipboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 31

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To sort attributes or metrics in a Grid visualization in ascending or descending order 1 In a dashboard, in the Grid panel, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute or metric that you want to use to sort data, then click the arrow icon on the right. 2 Do one of the following: To sort the attribute or metric values in ascending order (from A to Z), select Sort Ascending. To sort the attribute or metric values in descending order (from Z to A), select Sort Descending. To sort data in a Grid visualization using multiple conditions 1 In a dashboard, in the Grid panel, hover the cursor over the name of an attribute or metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. 2 Select Advanced Sort., then select one of the following: To sort the data using an attribute or metric displayed in the rows of the grid, click the Rows tab. To sort the data using an attribute or metric displayed in the columns of the grid, click the Columns tab. 3 From the Sort by drop-down list, select the attribute value or metric to use to sort data. 4 Do one of the following: To sort the data in ascending order (from A to Z) based on the attribute or metric that you selected above, select Ascending. To sort the data in descending order (from Z to A) based on the attribute or metric that you selected above, select Descending. 5 If desired, specify additional sorting criteria using the appropriate steps above. 6 Click OK to apply your changes. 32 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 To rearrange the attributes and metrics in a Grid visualization 1 In the dashboard, hover the cursor over the header of the attribute or metric that you want to rearrange in the grid, then click the arrow icon to the right. From the list of options, select one of the following: To move the attribute or metric to the left, select Move Left. To move the attribute or metric to the right, select Move Right. To move the attribute or metric to the columns of the grid, select Move to Columns. To move the attribute or metric to the rows of the grid, select Move to Rows. To swap the attributes and metrics in the rows with those in the columns in a Grid visualization 1 In the dashboard, hover the cursor over the Grid panel, then click the arrow icon in the top right. 2 Select Swap Rows and Columns. The attributes and metrics displayed in the rows of the grid are automatically swapped with the attributes and metrics displayed in the columns of the grid. To display subtotals in a Grid visualization 1 In the grid, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute that you want to display subtotals for, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right. 2 From the list of options, point to Show Totals, then do one of the following: To display a subtotal, select the check box next to the type of subtotal you want to display in the visualization. To hide a subtotal, clear the check box next to the type of subtotal you want to remove from the visualization. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 33

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 3 Repeat the step above for each subtotal that you want to display or hide, then click OK to apply your changes. The subtotals that you selected in the steps above are added to the visualization and displayed. To filter or drill on data in a Grid visualization 1 In the grid, select the attribute element that you want to filter or drill on by clicking the name of the attribute element. If desired, you can select multiple attribute elements at once by pressing CTRL and clicking each attribute element that you want to select. 2 Hover the cursor over one of the selected attribute elements, then click the arrow icon. Select one of the following: To drill on the data, select the level of data to display. For example, to display the data at the Product Category level, select Drill to Product Category. Only the attribute elements that you selected above are displayed, and the level of data that you selected is used to group attribute elements. To display only the attribute elements that you selected above and remove all other attribute elements from the visualization, select Keep Only. To display all attribute elements except the attribute elements that you selected above, select Exclude. You can undo filtering or drilling on data. For steps, see Removing filtering or drilling in a visualization, page 41. Analyzing data in a Heat Map visualization A Heat Map visualization is a combination of colored rectangles, each representing an element of a business attribute. A Heat Map visualization allows you to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at one time. Heat Maps are often used in the financial services industry to review the status of a portfolio. The rectangles contain a wide variety and many shadings of colors, which emphasize the weight of the various components. In a Heat Map visualization: The size of each rectangle represents its relative weight. 34 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 The color of each rectangle represents its relative value. For example, in the image below, larger values are green and smaller values are red. The large areas, such as the Mid-Atlantic area of rectangles in the image below, represent different groups of data. The small rectangles, such as New York in the image below, represent individual attribute elements. To filter or drill on data in a Heat Map visualization 1 In a dashboard, select one or more rectangles in the visualization by doing one of the following: To select rectangles one at a time, press CTRL, then click each rectangle that you want to select. To select all the rectangles in an area, click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape over the rectangles that you want to select. 2 Hover the cursor over one of the selected rectangles, then click the arrow icon. Select one of the following: To drill on the data, select the level of data to display. For example, to display the data at the Product Category level, select Drill to Product Category. Only the rectangles that you selected above are displayed, and the level of data that you selected is used to group the rectangles. To display only the rectangles that you selected above and remove all other rectangles, select Keep Only. To display all rectangles except the rectangles that you selected above, select Exclude. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 35

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide You can undo filtering or drilling on data. For steps, see Removing filtering or drilling in a visualization, page 41. Analyzing data in a Map visualization The Map visualization (also called the ESRI Map visualization) allows you to display locations as map markers on a map. You can: Filter data to display only the map markers that you select Filter data to display all map markers except those that you select Zoom in, zoom out, and pan across the map Display a pop-up Information Window with additional information when you click a map marker in the visualization The table below contains a list of actions you can perform to analyze data in a Map visualization, and steps to perform each task. 36 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 Prerequisite The procedures below assume that you are already viewing a Map visualization. Actions Zoom in or out of the map display Pan the map display to display a different region of the map Select locations in the map by clicking individual map markers Select locations in the map by drawing a rectangular lasso shape Display additional information for a map marker in the visualization Clear all map marker selections Steps 1 Click the thumb on the slider located on the left side of the map, then do one of the following: To zoom in on the map, drag the thumb towards the + side of the slider. To zoom out of the map, drag the thumb towards the - side of the slider. 1 Click on the map, then drag it in the direction you want to pan the map display. 1 From the visualization's toolbar, click the Mouse Click Selection icon. 2 Click a map marker to select it. You can select multiple map markers by pressing CTRL and clicking additional map markers. 1 From the visualization's toolbar, click the Rectangular Area Selection icon. 2 Click and drag on the map to enclose a set of map markers within a rectangle shape. All the map markers within the rectangle are selected. 1 From the visualization's toolbar, click the View Information Window icon. When you click a map marker in the visualization, an Information Window is displayed, containing additional information about the location. 1 From the visualization's toolbar, click the Clear Selections icon. All map marker selections are cleared. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 37

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Actions Display only the selected map markers on the map, or display all map markers except those currently selected Examine the underlying attribute and metric data for selected map markers Steps 1 Select map markers in the visualization by doing one of the following: To select locations in the map by clicking individual map markers, from the visualization's toolbar, click the Mouse Click Selection icon. Click a map marker to select it. You can select multiple map markers by pressing CTRL and clicking additional map markers. To select locations in the map by enclosing them in a lasso shape, from the visualization's toolbar, click the Rectangular Area Selection icon. Click and drag on the map to enclose a set of map markers within a rectangle shape. All the map markers within the rectangle are selected. 2 To filter the map markers displayed in the map, do one of the following: To display only the selected map markers on the map, from the visualization's toolbar, click the Keep Only icon. Only the map markers you selected are displayed. To display all map markers except those currently selected on the map, from the visualization's toolbar, click the Exclude icon. All the map markers except those you selected are displayed. 1 Select map markers in the visualization by doing one of the following: To select locations in the map by clicking individual map markers, from the visualization's toolbar, click the Mouse Click Selection icon. Click a map marker to select it. You can select multiple map markers by pressing CTRL and clicking additional map markers. To select locations in the map by enclosing them in a lasso shape, from the visualization's toolbar, click the Rectangular Area Selection icon. Click and drag on the map to enclose a set of map markers within a rectangle shape. All the map markers within the rectangle are selected. 2 From the toolbar, click the Show Data icon. The Show Data dialog box opens, with attribute and metric data for the map markers you selected. For detailed steps to analyze the data, including steps to create a new visualization using the displayed data or copy the data to the clipboard, see Examining the underlying data in a visualization, page 41. 38 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 Analyzing data in a Network visualization The Network visualization shows relationships between business attributes. Business attributes are represented by circular nodes, while the lines between the nodes (called edges) represent relationships between the nodes. You can view additional information about an item in the visualization by hovering the cursor over a node or edge. A tooltip is automatically displayed, showing the attribute and metric values associated with the node or edge. To zoom in or out, click and drag the thumb on the slider in the top left of the visualization. You can size the visualization to fit all nodes and edges into the visualization area by clicking the Fit to Screen icon on the top of the slider. You can reposition a node, select multiple nodes, or click and drag on an empty area to pan your display. Do one of the following: To reposition a node, click and drag the node to its new location. To select multiple nodes, click the Select icon to the left, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape over the nodes that you want to select. To pan your display to a different area of the visualization, click the Pan icon to the left, then click in an empty area of the visualization and drag the cursor to shift your view of the visualization. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 39

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide You can change the layout style used to arrange and display nodes in the visualization. Do one of the following: Connect edges of similar length to minimize edge crossings: To arrange the nodes so that they are connected by edges of similar length, minimizing the number of times the edges cross each other, click the Force-directed Layout icon. See clusters and relationships easily: To arrange the nodes in a circular layout, click the Circular Layout icon. A circular layout makes it easy to identify clusters and relationships in the visualization. See edge beginnings and endings, and closely related nodes: To arrange the nodes in a straight line, click the Linear Layout icon. The linear layout makes it easy to see where edges begin and end (if the edges are displayed as arrows), as well as groups of closely related nodes. By default, a legend is displayed on the right side of the visualization, which contains information on node size, edge size, edge color, and so on. You can expand or collapse the legend by clicking the arrow icon at the top of the legend. To filter or drill on data in a Network visualization 1 In a dashboard, select one or more nodes in the visualization to filter by doing one of the following: To select nodes one at a time, press CTRL, then click each node you want to select. To select all the nodes in an area, click the Select icon to the left, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape over the nodes that you want to select. 2 Hover the cursor over one of the selected nodes, then click the arrow icon. Select one of the following: To display only the nodes that you selected above and their neighboring nodes, and remove all other nodes from the visualization, select Keep Only (Nodes + Neighbors). To display all nodes in the visualization except the nodes that you selected above, select Exclude. You can undo filtering or drilling on data. For steps, see Removing filtering or drilling in a visualization, page 41. 40 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 Removing filtering or drilling in a visualization If you choose to filter or drill on data in a visualization, you can undo your filtering or drilling. For steps to filter or drill on data in a visualization, see the appropriate link below: Analyzing data in a Graph visualization, page 23 Analyzing data in a Grid visualization, page 31 Analyzing data in a Heat Map visualization, page 34 Analyzing data in a Map visualization, page 36 Analyzing data in a Network visualization, page 39 To undo filtering or drilling on data 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the visualization in which you want to undo filtering or drilling, then click the arrow icon in the top right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to Edit Filter, then do one of the following: To remove all filtering or drilling from the visualization at once, select Clear All. To remove filtering or drilling one change at a time, hover the cursor over each instance of filtering or drilling to remove, then click X next to each item. Examining the underlying data in a visualization You can examine the underlying attribute and metric data within a visualization in a simple grid format. Data from each attribute in the visualization is displayed in columns in the grid, followed by data from each metric in the visualization. You can: Sort, pivot, and copy data in the grid Save the data in the grid as a Comma-Separated Values (CSV) file Create a new Grid visualization using the data in the grid 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 41

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To view the underlying data in a visualization 1 In a dashboard, select the data to examine by doing one of the following: To display all the underlying attribute and metric data in a visualization, hover the cursor over the visualization. Click the arrow icon displayed in the top right, then select Show Data. To display underlying attribute and metric data only for selected elements in a visualization, select the elements that you want to examine. Click the arrow icon displayed in the top right, then select Show Data. Your data is automatically displayed on the My Data tab in the Show Data dialog box. 2 You can create and display additional views of your data. For example, you can create a view that includes data from all attributes and metrics displayed in the My Data panel, regardless of whether the attributes and metrics are displayed in the visualization. Each view is displayed on a different tab at the top of the Show Data dialog box. You can click on a tab to switch to a specific data view. Choose from the following: To add a view of your data, click the Add icon displayed to the right of the tabs, then select one of the following: To create a view that includes data from all attributes and metrics displayed in the My Data panel, select All Objects. To create a view that contains data from a selected attribute in addition to the attributes and metrics that have already been added to the visualization, select the name of the attribute that you want to include in the view. To delete an existing view, hover the cursor over the view's tab, then click X. You cannot delete the My Data tab. 3 You can include data from all metrics in the My Data panel on the currently displayed tab. Do one of the following: To include all metrics in the My Data panel, select the Show All Metrics check box. To include only metrics that have already been added to the visualization, clear the Show All Metrics check box. 42 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 4 You can sort and pivot data, resize columns, copy data rows in the grid, and so on. Choose from the following: To sort data in the grid, click the header of the column you want to sort by. The data is automatically sorted in ascending (A to Z) order. Click the header again to sort in descending (Z to A) order. To move data in the grid, hover the cursor over the header of the data that you want to move, then click the arrow icon. Select Move Left to move the column one space to the left, or Move Right to move the column one space to the right. To copy data rows in the grid, click on a row to select it. You can press CTRL and click specific rows to select them, or press SHIFT to select consecutive rows. Click the Copy to Clipboard icon to copy the data to the clipboard. You can then paste the copied rows into the text editing or spreadsheet software of your choice. To resize columns, hover the cursor over the right edge of the column that you want to resize. Click and drag the edge of the column to resize it, or double-click the edge of the column to have the column automatically sized to fit its contents. 5 You can use the data on the currently displayed tab in the Show Data dialog box to create a new Grid visualization. Click the Add as a Grid To icon, then do one of the following: To add the visualization to the currently displayed panel in the dashboard, select Current Panel. To add the visualization to an already existing panel, select the name of the panel. To add the visualization to a new panel, select New Panel. The new visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed. 6 You can save the data on the currently displayed tab in the Show Data dialog box as a Comma-Separated Values (CSV) file. Click the Save Data icon. Browse to the location in which you want to save the file, then type a name for the file and click Save to save it. 7 When finished, click Close to return to the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 43

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Selecting data in one visualization to update the data displayed in another visualization Depending on how the dashboard has been designed, you can select items in one visualization (the source) to update the data in another visualization (the target). The data in the target visualization is then filtered or highlighted based on the items you selected in the source. You can select multiple items for which to display data by pressing CTRL and clicking each item in the source. If you select items across multiple attributes, the conditions used to filter or highlight data for each attribute are combined using the OR operator. For example, you select Central and Southwest from the Region attribute and Movies from the Category attribute. The target visualization displays data for which (Region = Central or Southwest) OR Category = Movies. If you select a metric value, the conditions used to filter or highlight data for each attribute are combined using the AND operator. For example, you select a metric cell for which the Region is Central and the Category is Movies. The target visualization displays data for which Region = Central AND Category = Movies. 44 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 If you select an additional metric value, for which the Region is Northwest and the Category is Music, the target visualization is updated to include data for which Region = Northwest AND Category = Music. Analyzing a customizable, detailed dashboard that gives you freedom pixel by pixel Depending on how the dashboard was designed, you may be able to analyze the data using the following interactive data visualizations (called widgets): Data Cloud: The names of business attribute elements are displayed in various sizes to depict the differences in metric values between the elements. The varying sizes allow a user to quickly identify the most significant, positive, or negative contributions. For steps, see Analyzing data in a Data Cloud widget, page 46. Heat Map: You can quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of business variables at once using the Heat Map widget. The data is displayed as a combination of colored rectangles, with each rectangle representing a business attribute element, and the rectangles are colored and sized according to the value of business metrics in the widget. For steps, see Analyzing data in a Heat Map widget, page 46. Microcharts: The data is displayed using one or more compact charts that allow you to quickly visualize trends. Bar, sparkline, and bullet microcharts are available to convey information at a glance. For steps, see Analyzing data in a Microcharts widget, page 55. In Express Mode, you can reset all the selectors and groups on the dashboard to their initial values, without re-executing the dashboard. This is helpful if you want to start over and make different selections. To reset, click the Reset Selections icon. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 45

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing data in a Data Cloud widget A Data Cloud widget displays the names of business attribute elements in various sizes to depict the differences in metric values among the elements. A bigger font for an element indicates a larger metric value, allowing you to quickly identify the most significant positive or negative contributions. For example, in the image below, the Russian Federation, Germany, and the United States are among the countries with the largest number of mobile subscribers. You can hover the cursor over the name of each element to view its metric values in a pop-up tooltip, as shown in the image above. Analyzing data in a Heat Map widget A Heat Map widget is a combination of colored rectangles, each representing an individual element of a business attribute. A Heat Map widget allows you to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at one time. Heat Maps are often used in the financial services industry to review the status of a portfolio. In a Heat Map widget: The size of each rectangle represents its relative weight. The color of each rectangle represents its relative value. For example, in the image below, larger values are green and smaller values are red. The large groups of rectangles, such as the Perigee group of rectangles in the image below, represent different groups of data. 46 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 The small individual rectangles, such as the Literature rectangle in the image below, represent individual business attribute elements. When you hover over a rectangle, data is displayed in a pop-up tooltip. In the example above, the tooltip displays revenue and cost data for Soul/R&B. You can analyze data in a Heat Map widget by deleting unwanted rectangles from the widget, filtering the rectangles based on metric values, searching for and filtering rectangles by name, and so on. To do so, use the options in the 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 47

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Heat Map panel, as shown in the image above. For steps, see the appropriate links below: Adding, removing, and grouping data in a Heat Map widget, page 48 Sizing and coloring the rectangles in a Heat Map widget, page 49 Deleting rectangles from a Heat Map widget, page 49 Filtering or highlighting the rectangles in a Heat Map widget based on metric values, page 50 Coloring the rectangles in a Heat Map widget, page 50 Searching for and displaying rectangles in a Heat Map widget, page 54 Reverting changes and displaying a Heat Map widget using its default appearance, page 54 Adding, removing, and grouping data in a Heat Map widget You can add, remove, and group data displayed in the widget. For example, if your widget displays multiple business attributes, you can simplify the Heat Map by removing one or more attributes from display. You can change the attribute used to display individual rectangles in the widget, or the attribute used to group rectangles into larger areas. To add, remove, and group data in the Heat Map widget 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Attributes section, choose from the following: To remove an attribute from display in the widget, click and drag the attribute from the Grouping list to the Unused Attributes list. You must leave at least one attribute in the Grouping list so that the widget can be displayed. To add an attribute to the widget display, click and drag the attribute from the Unused Attributes list to the Grouping list. To change the grouping of rectangles into larger areas in the widget, click and drag an attribute to the desired location in the Grouping list, so that a blue indicator line is displayed in the location to move the attribute to. The attribute at the bottom of the Grouping list creates 48 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 the individual rectangles inside each area. Attributes toward the top of the list are used to group the elements of attributes below them in the list. 3 Repeat the appropriate steps above to add, remove, and group the data in the widget as desired. Sizing and coloring the rectangles in a Heat Map widget You can quickly change the metrics used to size and color rectangles in the widget. To size and color rectangles in the widget 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Controls section, choose from the following: To define the metric used to size the rectangles in the widget, select the metric from the Size drop-down list. To change the attribute or metric that determines the color of the rectangles in the Heat Map widget, do one of the following: To have the rectangles colored based on an attribute, from the Color drop-down list, point to Attribute, then select the attribute. To have the rectangles colored based on a metric, from the Color drop-down list, point to Metric, then select the metric. Deleting rectangles from a Heat Map widget You can delete rectangles that you do not want to display in the widget, such as rectangles that represent outliers. To delete individual rectangles from the widget 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Controls section, click the Enable Delete icon. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 49

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 3 To delete a rectangle, hover the cursor over the rectangle, then click the X that appears in the top right of the rectangle. The rectangle is removed from the widget. You can display a list of deleted rectangles by clicking the List of Deleted Items icon. Click X in the top right to return to the widget. Filtering or highlighting the rectangles in a Heat Map widget based on metric values You can highlight or filter the rectangles in the widget to emphasize rectangles with metric values that fall into a specific range. To filter or highlight rectangles based on metric values 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Metric Filters section, do one of the following: To filter and display only the rectangles with metric values that fall in the range you are interested in, select the Filters check box. To highlight the rectangles with metric values that fall in the range you are interested in, clear the Filters check box. 3 To filter or highlight rectangles based on the value of the metric used to size rectangles in the widget, click and drag the thumbs in the Size slider to highlight the metric value range to display rectangles in the widget for. 4 To filter or highlight rectangles based on the value of the metric used to color rectangles in the widget, click and drag the thumbs in the Color slider to highlight the metric value range to display rectangles in the widget for. Coloring the rectangles in a Heat Map widget You can color the rectangles in a Heat Map widget as follows: You can display rectangles using blended colors. For example, you can have large metric values displayed in red and small metric values 50 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 displayed in yellow. Metric values in the middle of the range are displayed in orange. By default, one color is used to display the highest metric value in the widget, and a second color is used to display the lowest metric value. All rectangles with metric values that fall in between are displayed using a blending of these two colors. You can change which colors are blended together, add additional colors, and so on. For steps, see To display rectangles in a Heat Map widget using blended colors, page 52. You can have rectangles assigned a color based on whether their metric values fall into specific ranges, then have the rectangles shaded based on where they fall in the range. For example, you can have metric values greater than 4 million displayed in blue, with darker shades of blue 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 51

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide representing larger values in the range. For steps, see To color rectangles in a Heat Map widget based on metric value ranges, page 53. To display rectangles in a Heat Map widget using blended colors 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Heat Map colors section, select the Blend Colors check box. Choose from the following: To add a new blending color to the widget, click the slider. A thumb representing the color is added to the slider and displayed at the point you clicked. To change the metric value at which a blending color is used to display rectangles, click and drag the thumb until it is displayed at the point on the slider that represents the values you want to color. For example, if you want to display rectangles with metric values near $3,000,000 as blue, click and drag the thumb to 3,000,000 on the slider. To change one of the blending colors used to display rectangles, double-click the thumb for the color that you want to change, then select a new color. To remove a blending color from the widget, click the thumb for the color and drag the thumb off the slider. The thumb is removed and the color is no longer used to display rectangles in the widget. 52 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 To color rectangles in a Heat Map widget based on metric value ranges 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Heat Map Colors section, select the Band Colors check box. To define a new range of metric values to use to color rectangles in the widget, press CTRL and click the point on the slider where you want the range to begin. A new color band representing the range is added to the slider. To increase or decrease the range of metric values displayed in a specific color, click the thumb of the color band representing the range, then drag the thumb to the location on the slider that represents the new endpoint of the range. To remove a color from the widget, hover the cursor over the color s band in the slider and click the X that appears. The band is deleted. The slider must contain at least two color bands to display the Heat Map. To select and format the color used to display metric values within a range, choose from the following: To change the color used to display a range of metric values, double-click the color band that represents the range, then select a new color. To have rectangles displayed as darker when they fall on the higher end of a metric range, click the icon under the color band that represents the range until it becomes an arrow pointing to the right. To have rectangles displayed as darker when they fall on the lower end of a metric range, click the icon under the color band that represents the range until it becomes an arrow pointing to the left. To have rectangles displayed as darker when they fall on the lower or higher ends of a metric range, click the icon under the color band that represents the range until it becomes an arrow pointing to both the left and right. To display all rectangles in a range using a single color, without applying shading, click the icon under the color band that represents the range until it becomes a circle. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 53

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Searching for and displaying rectangles in a Heat Map widget You can search for rectangles in the widget by name, then highlight or filter the rectangles in the widget based on the results of the search. To search for and display rectangles in the widget 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Search section, type the name of the rectangle to search for, then do one of the following: To highlight the rectangles whose name matches the text, clear the Filter check box. To display only the rectangles whose name matches the text, select the Filter check box. 3 Click Search. If a match cannot be found, a message is displayed at the top of the widget. To clear the search results, click the X at the top of the widget. Reverting changes and displaying a Heat Map widget using its default appearance You can revert the filtering, grouping, and other changes you made to the widget. You can choose to restore the widget to its appearance as specified by the business attributes and metrics added to the widget s underlying grid when the dashboard was last saved (saved configuration), or at the time when you choose to revert changes (default configuration). To revert changes and display a Heat Map widget using its default appearance 1 To display the Heat Map options, from the dashboard toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Interactive. 2 In the Controls section, do one of the following: To revert any filtering, coloring, or other display changes made to the widget and restore the widget to its default appearance, click and hold the Refresh icon and select Default Configuration. 54 Analyzing data in a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 To revert any filtering, coloring, or other display changes made to the widget above and restore the widget to its default appearance when the dashboard was last saved, click the Refresh icon and select Saved Configuration. 3 Click the Refresh icon. Analyzing data in a Microcharts widget In a Microcharts widget, individual microcharts display business data in a compact graph, allowing you to determine at a glance the trend of a metric over time or how a metric is performing compared to forecasted figures. Up to three types of microcharts can be displayed in the Microcharts widget, depending on how the widget was designed. For example, bar and sparkline microcharts are included on the left side of the widget shown below. These microcharts convey the trend of a business metric over time, from left to right. On the right side of the widget, bullet microcharts reveal the percentage of cases that were closed using horizontal performance bars, while vertical reference lines mark the goal percentages for each region. Depending on how the widget was designed, you may be able to view and interact with a Microcharts widget in several different display modes: Grid: All the rows of microcharts are displayed at the same time, from top to bottom, as shown above. If the rows in the widget are grouped, you can 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing data in a dashboard 55

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide click the arrows to the left of a group to expand or collapse it, as shown below. Vertical Scroll: You can view each row of microcharts as they automatically scroll from the top to the bottom. You can also manually navigate from one row to the next using the Previous and Next icons on the right side of the widget, as shown below: Ticker: Microcharts and supplemental text are displayed in a scrolling ticker that moves from right to left, as shown below. The designer of the widget can add text next to each microchart to provide background information or highlight a trend displayed in the microchart. This text is displayed alongside the microcharts as they scroll horizontally, as shown below: Analyzing dashboards on an ipad You can view dashboards created in MicroStrategy Analytics Express on an ipad device with MicroStrategy Mobile installed. You can filter dashboards to 56 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 examine subsets of data, zoom in and out of data visualizations to inspect areas of interest, annotate dashboards with comments containing your observations on business trends, and more. See the appropriate link below for steps to perform each of these tasks: Viewing dashboards on an ipad, page 57 Analyzing data on an ipad, page 58 Sharing dashboards via email and annotating dashboards, page 64 Printing dashboards from an ipad, page 66 Viewing dashboards on an ipad A dashboard is commonly used to assess company performance, to take a quick status check of the company, or to monitor personal work or work group contributions to overall goals of the business. Dashboards summarize key business indicators by presenting them in visually intuitive, easy-to-read, interactive documents. Once opened, dashboards are automatically displayed, with any text, images, tabular grids, graphs, and other items that the designer of the dashboard added. To open a dashboard 1 From the MicroStrategy Analytics Express Home page, tap the name of a team to view all the available dashboards for the team. 2 If the Dashboards page is displayed, you can filter the list of dashboards displayed to the left. From the top left, tap one of the following: All Dashboards: View all available dashboards. Owned By Me: View only the dashboards that you own. Shared With Me: View dashboards that other users have chosen to share with you. 3 Open the dashboard by doing one of the following: 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 57

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To open the dashboard from the Dashboards page, tap the name of the dashboard. A preview of the dashboard is displayed to the right. Tap View. The dashboard is automatically opened and displayed. To open the dashboard from the Team Launchpad, tap the link to the dashboard. The dashboard is automatically opened and displayed. Analyzing data on an ipad When you run a dashboard, it is displayed on the ipad as a collection of one or more data visualizations. Depending on how the dashboard is designed, you may be able to do the following: If more than one panel of content is available, swipe to the left or right on a panel to view the next or previous panels. If more than one page of data (called a layout tab) is available, tap the bar displayed at the bottom of the page to see a list of layouts in the dashboard. You can tap the name of a layout to display different pages of data. If the layout bar is not displayed, you can swipe to the left or right to navigate between pages. Use the filters in the Filters panel to the left to determine which data to display in the dashboard. Tap elements in the Page-by bar at the top to view different groupings of data. 58 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 An example of a dashboard displayed on an ipad is shown below. For information on designing dashboards, see About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express, page 68. Data visualizations offer additional ways to interact with your data. Depending on which data visualizations are added to the dashboard, you may be able to do the following: Analyzing data in a Graph visualization, page 59 Analyzing relationships between items in a Network visualization, page 60 Analyzing data in a Heat Map widget, page 62 Analyzing trends at a glance: Microcharts widgets, page 64 Analyzing data in a Graph visualization A Graph visualization allows you to view your data in a chart containing multiple graphs. A dashboard designer can create the visualization to display 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 59

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide the data in different graph styles, such as line, bar, or scatter graphs. An example of a Graph visualization that uses line graphs is shown below. You can perform the following actions in a Graph visualization: To zoom into the graphs, use a pinch gesture. To return to the original zoom level, double-tap the visualization. To view additional information about a point of data, tap a graph item, such as a bar on a bar graph. To expand or collapse the legend displayed to the right, tap the arrow icon at the top of the legend. Analyzing relationships between items in a Network visualization A Network visualization lets you quickly view data about relationships between individual items. Business attributes are displayed as nodes, and the lines between them represent the relationships between them. An example of 60 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 a Network visualization that displays the relationships between product categories and subcategories is shown below. You can perform the following actions in a Network visualization: To view information about a node and its relationships to other nodes, tap the node. To zoom into the visualization, use the pinch gesture. To expand or collapse the legend displayed to the right, tap the arrow icon at the top of the legend. To change the layout of nodes in the visualization, tap one of the following: Connect edges of similar length to minimize edge crossings: To arrange the nodes so that they are connected by edges of similar length, minimizing the number of times the edges cross each other, tap the Force-directed Layout button. See clusters and relationships easily: To arrange the nodes in a circular layout, tap the Circular Layout button. A circular layout makes it easy to identify clusters and relationships in the visualization. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 61

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide See edge beginnings and endings, and closely related nodes: To arrange the nodes in a straight line, tap the Linear Layout button. The linear layout makes it easy to see where edges begin and end (if the edges are displayed as arrows), as well as groups of closely related nodes. Analyzing data in a Heat Map widget The Heat Map widget displays elements as rectangles, and lets you quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at one time. The characteristics of Heat Maps are described below: The size of each rectangle represents its relative weight. The color of each rectangle represents its relative value. Large areas (displayed with thicker borders) represent different groups of data. Small rectangles represent individual elements. An example of a Heat Map widget is shown below. 62 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 You can perform the following actions in a Heat Map widget: To zoom in or out, perform a pinch gesture. To view more information about a rectangle, tap the rectangle. You can temporarily delete individual rectangles from the widget. Separate steps are below to delete rectangles from a Heat Map widget, or to restore deleted rectangles. To delete rectangles from a Heat Map widget 1 In the bottom right of the widget, tap the Edit button. The Heat Map options appear. 2 Tap Controls, and turn on the Enable Delete switch. 3 Tap Heat Map to return to the Heat Map options, then tap Close to return to the widget. 4 To delete a rectangle, tap the rectangle to select it. Tap X. The rectangle is deleted and removed from the widget. To restore deleted rectangles in a Heat Map widget 1 Tap the Edit button. The Heat Map options appear. 2 Tap Deleted Elements. A list of rectangles that you have deleted is displayed. Do one of the following: To select rectangles to restore one at a time, select the name of each rectangle that you want to restore. To restore all the deleted rectangles in the widget at once, tap All. 3 Tap Apply to apply your changes. Tap Heat Map to return to the Heat Map options, then tap Close to return to the widget. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 63

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing trends at a glance: Microcharts widgets The Microcharts widget lets you visualize trends in a metric s value at quick glance. An example of the Microcharts widget on the ipad is shown below: To view information about a graph item in the widget, such as a data point or bar, tap and hold your finger over the element. A tooltip with more information appears, as shown below. If some metric columns are not displayed on the widget, swipe horizontally to view the metric columns that cannot fit on a single screen. Sharing dashboards via email and annotating dashboards You can share a screenshot of a dashboard with your contacts using email. You can add annotations, such as comments and freehand drawings, to a screenshot of your dashboard, and share the annotated screenshot with your contacts. Your recipients do not need to have MicroStrategy Mobile installed to view the screenshot. 64 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Analyzing Data in Dashboards 2 To share dashboards via email 1 In MicroStrategy Mobile, open the dashboard that you want to share. 2 If the dashboard title is not visible, from the top-right corner, tap the Exit Full Screen icon. 3 From the top-right corner, tap the Action icon. 4 Tap Email Screen. A new email message is composed, with a screenshot of the dashboard attached. 5 Type the email addresses of your contacts in the To and Cc/Bcc fields, as applicable. 6 Type the subject of the email in the Subject field. 7 Once you have composed your email, tap Send. The email is sent. To annotate and share dashboards on an ipad 1 In MicroStrategy Mobile, open the dashboard that you want to annotate. 2 If the dashboard title is not visible, in the top-right corner, tap the Exit Full Screen icon. 3 In the top-right corner, tap the Action icon. 4 Tap Annotate and Share. A screenshot of the dashboard opens. 5 To annotate the screenshot, choose from the following: To draw shapes freehand, use your finger to draw the shapes directly onto the ipad screen. To add a comment to your drawing, tap the drawing and choose Add Comment. A comment box is displayed. Type the text that you want to add, then tap on an empty area of the screen to apply your changes. To add a comment anywhere in the screenshot, in the top right of the screen, tap Add Comment. A comment box is displayed. Type the text that you want to add, then tap on an empty area of the screen to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 65

2 Analyzing Data in Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To move a comment box, perform a tap and hold gesture on the comment box, then drag the box to its new location on the screen. To resize a comment box, perform a tap and hold gesture on the corner of the comment box. As you drag the corner across the screen, the comment box is resized automatically. 6 To email the annotated screenshot, tap the Action icon and select Email Screen. Select the appropriate options to email the screenshot. For detailed steps, see Sharing dashboards via email and annotating dashboards, page 64. Printing dashboards from an ipad If you have a printer available on your network, you can print a copy of your dashboards, as described in the steps below. To print dashboards 1 In MicroStrategy Mobile, open the dashboard that you want to print. 2 If the dashboard title is not visible, in the top-right corner, tap the Exit Full Screen icon. 3 In the top-right corner, tap the Action icon. The context menu opens. 4 To choose a printer, tap Printer. A list of available printers is displayed. 5 Tap the name of the printer you want to print from. The printer is selected, and you are returned to the Printer Options dialog box. 6 To change the number of copies to print, use the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons. 7 If your printer supports double-sided printing, turn the Double-sided switch on. 8 When you are satisfied with the settings, tap Print. Your dashboard is printed. 66 Analyzing dashboards on an ipad 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3 3.CREATING DASHBOARDS TO DISPLAY YOUR DATA Introduction A dashboard is commonly used to assess company or personal performance, to take a quick status check of the company, or to monitor personal work or work group contributions to overall goals of the business. Dashboards summarize key business indicators by presenting them in visually intuitive, easy-to-read, interactive documents. With MicroStrategy Analytics Express, you can create dynamic, visually compelling dashboards that contain text, images, interactive data visualizations, and more. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 67

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express In MicroStrategy Analytics Express, you can create two different kinds of dashboards depending on your business needs: Easy-to-create dashboards that show your data quickly: You can create quick, visually striking dashboards that are excellent for use as proofs-of-concept or examining data trends at a glance. These dashboards require minimal steps to create and provide rich interactivity in the form of data visualizations. Customizable, detailed dashboards that give you freedom pixel by pixel: These dashboards give you the freedom to define what data goes in your data visualizations (called widgets) and where. A wide variety of 68 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 formatting tools, including graph styles, images, and shapes, allows you to customize and fine-tune the appearance of your dashboards. Details about both types of visualization are summarized in the table below. Easy-to-create dashboards that show your data quickly When you add a new data visualization to a dashboard, the visualization is automatically populated with data and displayed. Any new items that you add to the dashboard, such as visualizations and text, are automatically placed in the dashboard for you. You can quickly drag and drop items to add or remove data from a data visualization, add filtering to your dashboard, format and rearrange visualizations and text in your dashboard, and so on. Display your data using interactive Graph, Grid, Heat Map, Map, and Network visualizations. Users can create a snapshot image of a dashboard to view it outside of Analytics Express. You can create and participate in comment discussions of the data in your dashboard with other members of your team. Customizable, detailed dashboards that give you freedom pixel by pixel When you add a new widget to a dashboard, you choose exactly which data to display in the widget and where. When you add new items to the dashboard, such as widgets, images, and text fields, you can place them exactly where you want them. You can fine-tune your dashboards with a wide variety of design and formatting options. For example, you can add a wide variety of visual elements to your dashboard, including images, hyperlinks, divider lines, and so on. Display your data in customizable grids and graphs, as well as interactive Heat Map, Data Cloud, and Microcharts widgets. Users can export a dashboard to an Excel or PDF file to view it outside of Analytics Express. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 69

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide During the dashboard creation process, Analytics Express automatically identifies your data as business attributes or metrics: Attributes are the business concepts reflected in your stored business data in your data source. Attributes provide a context in which to report on and analyze business facts or calculations. The attributes organize and group the metrics. For example, while knowing your company s total sales (a metric) is useful, knowing where and when the sales took place provides the kind of analytical depth that users require on a daily basis. Metrics represent business measures and key performance indicators. From a practical perspective, metrics are the calculations performed on data stored in your data source. Metrics are similar to formulas in spreadsheet software. You can choose whether to define each column in your data as an attribute or metric, determine which data to include in your dashboard, and specify the name that will be used to identify each attribute or metric in the dashboard. The steps below provide a high-level outline to create a dashboard: 1 Select the data that you want to include in the dashboard and the type of dashboard to create, as described above. For steps, see the appropriate link below: Creating a dashboard using data from a saved file, page 73 Creating a dashboard using data from a Salesforce.com report, page 79 Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83 2 You can add additional content and formatting to the dashboard, such as data visualizations, text, and so on, based on the type of dashboard you chose to create. For steps, see the appropriate link below: Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, page 95 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 176 70 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Best practices for creating dashboards Consider the following best practices before creating a dashboard from your business data. For example images of data formatted for importing, and a data preparation tool to help you format your data, from Help & Resources in the top right, select Excel Data Preparation. Creating dashboards from data in a CSV file Use commas to separate each value in the CSV file. Other characters, such as tabs or semicolons, should not be used to separate values. Text values containing quotes ( ) will be included in your data with the quotes intact (for example, Electronics ). Creating dashboards from data in a Microsoft Excel file During the dashboard creation process, Analytics Express reads the number formatting in the Excel worksheet that contains your data and automatically attempts to apply the same formatting to the data in your dashboard. For best results, apply number formatting to the data in Analytics Express, rather than in Excel. For steps, see To format numeric values in a visualization, page 159. Data in the Excel worksheet should be organized in a simple tabular format, as described below: Your worksheet should contain at most one row of headers. The first line of the Excel file should contain only column headers, and the header cells should not be merged together. Any business metric data should be in numeric format. Metric values containing text or non-formatting symbols (such as dashes or the word "NULL") should be replaced with the number 0 or be left as blank. It is recommended you remove the following from your Excel file before beginning the dashboard creation process: Macros Aggregated data, such as grand totals, sub totals, or averages Merged data cells 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 71

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Blank rows Pivot tables Information that is related to the data but should not be included as part of a data visualization, such as summaries, footnotes, or instructions You can create a dashboard using the data from one worksheet at a time. If your Excel file contains more than one table of data per worksheet, merge the tables into a single table, or place each table on a separate worksheet, to be used to create additional dashboards. Data in hidden cells will be included in the dashboard. Be sure to preview your worksheet with hidden cells displayed to ensure that the data you upload appears as expected. Cells containing data ranges may not sort as expected. For example, if a column contains numeric ranges such as <100, 100-200, 200-300, and >1000, and you choose to sort the data in ascending order, values such as <100 and >1000 will be clustered together and displayed at the bottom of the column, as both begin with symbols rather than numbers. Analytics Express automatically defines columns of your data as either business attributes or metrics by scanning the first 1,000 rows of each column in the worksheet (not including the column header). For example, if the first 1,000 rows of a column contain both numeric and text values, the column is designated a business attribute, and columns with only numeric values are designated as metrics. Be sure that your worksheet does not contain columns with 1,000 rows of numeric data followed by rows of text data, as Analytics Express will expect the entire column to contain only numeric data. This includes columns containing numeric data and followed by a text footnote. For best results, do not combine different types of data within the same column. User and data volume limits Each user can upload a maximum of one gigabyte of data for their dashboards. 72 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Creating a dashboard You can create dashboards using data from the following sources: A saved file from one of the following: Your computer or network A specified URL Your Dropbox account Your Google Drive account Sample data provided by Analytics Express A Salesforce.com report A database connection Once you have created your dashboard, you can add content to the dashboard, including interactive visualizations, text, pages of additional data, and so on. See the appropriate link below for steps to create a dashboard: Creating a dashboard using data from a saved file, page 73 Creating a dashboard using data from a Salesforce.com report, page 79 Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83 Creating a dashboard using data from a saved file You can create a dashboard using data from a file saved as any of the following: Excel workbook (.xls,.xlsx) Comma-separated values file (.csv) Google spreadsheet To create a dashboard from a file, you must provide the location of the file to MicroStrategy Analytics Express in one of the following ways: Select a file on your computer or network. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 73

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Provide the location of your file using an http, https, or ftp URL. For example, the following are examples of URLs you can use to import data. In the example URLs below, Host would be replaced with the name of the web host, Path with the file path in which the file is located, FileName with the name of the file, Port with the port number, and User and Password with the username and password required to access the file s location. http://host/path/filename https://user:password@host/path/filename ftp://user:password@host/path/filename ftp://user:password@host:port/path/filename Data saved in password-protected or compressed files (such as.zip files) cannot be used to create dashboards. Identifying geographical information in your data During the dashboard creation process, Analytics Express automatically attempts to determine if your data contains geographical information, such as country names or latitude or longitude values. If a column of data contains geographical information, the type of geographical information it contains (such as City, State, or Country) is identified. You can have Analytics Express generate additional levels of geographical information based on this data, then add it to your dashboard. For example, if your data contains a list of city names, you can have Analytics Express automatically create an attribute called State, which contains the state that each city is located in. Prerequisites You must have Adobe Flash Player. Read the Best practices for creating dashboards, page 71. To create a dashboard using data from a saved file 1 From the Dashboards page, click New Dashboard. 74 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 2 From the left, select one of the following under Excel/CSV: Use File From Disk: To use a file saved on your computer to create the dashboard, select the Use File From Disk option. Click Browse. Navigate to and select the file you want to upload, then click Open. Dropbox: To use a file uploaded to your Dropbox account to create the dashboard, select the Dropbox option. Do one of the following: If you are already logged in to your Dropbox account, your Dropbox files are automatically displayed to the right. Browse to and select the file that you want to use to create your dashboard. If you are not logged in to your Dropbox account, click Continue, then log in to Dropbox using your Dropbox user name and password. Your Dropbox files are automatically displayed to the right. Browse to and select the file that you want to use to create your dashboard. Google Drive: To use a file uploaded to your Google Drive account to create the dashboard, select the Google Drive option. Do one of the following: If you are already logged in to your Google Drive account, your Google Drive files are automatically displayed to the right. Browse to and select the file that you want to use to create your dashboard. If you are not logged in to your Google Drive account, click Continue, then log in using your Google Drive user name and password. Your Google Drive files are automatically displayed to the right. Browse to and select the file that you want to use to create your dashboard. Use File From URL: To use a file located online to create the dashboard, select the Use File From URL option. In the Enter a URL for Excel/CSV File field, type the URL of the file. Use One of Our Samples: To use sample data provided by Analytics Express to create the dashboard, select the Use One of Our Samples option. A list of sample files is displayed. Select the name of the sample file to use. 3 Click Continue. A preview of your data is displayed on the Review Data page. Analytics Express automatically identifies business attributes and metrics from your data and displays them as business attributes or metrics on the Review Data page. 4 If you are uploading data from an Excel workbook that contains more than one sheet of data, from the Select a single sheet to import 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 75

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide drop-down list, select the name of the sheet that contains the data to use to create the dashboard. 5 By default, Analytics Express assumes that your data is stored in a simple table, with each column in the table containing a separate business attribute or metric, as shown in the image below. You can also create dashboards using data stored in a crosstabbed table, with business attribute and metrics stored in both table rows and columns. An example of a crosstabbed table is shown in the image below. Select one of the following options: Tabular: To import data from a simple table, select Tabular, then perform the following steps: a By default, MicroStrategy Analytics Express assumes that the first row of data in your file consists of column headers containing the names of each of the business attributes and metrics that you want to create. If the data in your file does not provide any names, you can create names for your business attributes and metrics by doing the following: Clear the First row of sheet contains column headers check box. A default name is automatically provided for each business attribute or metric on the Review Data page. To provide your own names for a business attribute or metric, hover the cursor over the name that you want to change and click the arrow icon in the top right. A pop-up menu is displayed. Select Rename, type a new name in the field, and press ENTER. 76 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Crosstabbed: To import data from a crosstabbed table, select Crosstabbed. A preview of your data is displayed, with cells of data that contain metric data, business attribute element data, and metric names each displayed in separate colors. The legend in the top right lists the colors in which each type of data is displayed. Ensure that each type of data is displayed in the appropriate colored area by performing the following steps: a b Click and drag the handles of the Metrics area to highlight each cell that contains metric values. Specify which cells contain the names to use to identify each metric in the dashboard by doing one of the following: If no metric names are included in your file, select the No Metric Headers check box. If metric names are included in your file, clear the No Metric Headers check box. Click and drag the handles of the Metric Headers area to highlight the cells that contain the metric names. 6 For each column of data in your file that Analytics Express has identified as a business attribute or metric, you can choose whether to include the column as data in your dashboard, change whether the column is treated as a business attribute or a metric, and so on. Hover the cursor over the name of the column, then click the arrow icon to display a pop-up menu. Select from the following: To define the column as a business attribute, point to Attribute. a b If the column's data type is Date, Time, or DateTime, you can define your data in more specific detail by having Analytics Express automatically generate additional time-related information based on the type of data provided. For example, if the column is assigned the Date data type, you can have Analytics Express automatically generate an attribute containing the year for each date. Select the check box next to each attribute that you want to have automatically generated, then click OK. You can identify a data column as containing geographical information, as described in Identifying geographical information in your data, page 74. To identify the data column as containing geographical information, select the type of geographical information it contains, such as City, State, or Country. Select the check box next to each attribute that you want to have automatically generated based on the data column, then click OK. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 77

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To include the data column as data in your dashboard without identifying it as containing geographical information, select None, then click OK. To define the column as a metric, select Metric. To avoid including the column in your dashboard, select Do Not Import. To specify the name that will be used to identify the column in your dashboard, select Rename. Type a name in the field and press ENTER. 7 Repeat the step above for each column as appropriate. 8 Click Continue, then do one of the following: To create a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, click the icon of the visualization to use to display your data. If the visualization you selected above allows you to choose between different visualization subtypes to use to display your data, a row of additional icons is displayed, representing each of the available subtypes. For example, if you want to represent your data as a bar graph, you can choose to display it as a vertical bar graph or a horizontal bar graph. Click the icon for the subtype to use to display your data. For a list of visualizations and the subtypes available for each visualization, see Select a Visualization dialog box, page 260. Your visualization is created and added to the dashboard. To create a customizable, detailed dashboard that gives you freedom pixel by pixel, click Advanced Templates, then select a template to use to create your new dashboard. The options are: Blank Template: Select this option for a dashboard with one large content section. Tile and Two Contents: Select this option for dashboards that contain two columns of content. Four Contents: Select this option to create a dashboard divided into four content sections. Banded Template: Select this option to create a bill or listing, with address space at the top of the dashboard. The rows of data below the address are displayed using alternating background colors to help users view the data more easily. 78 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 ipad Template: Select this option to create a dashboard with one content section, sized for display on an ipad. 9 Your dashboard is created and displayed. To save the dashboard, click Save at the bottom of the page. 10 Type a name and description for the dashboard in the Name and Description fields. 11 Click OK. The dashboard is saved. Once you have created your dashboard, you can add text and data visualizations to the dashboard, format items on the dashboard, organize your data into multiple pages, and so on. For steps to add content to an easy-to-create dashboard, see the appropriate links below: Adding text and data to a dashboard, page 95 Layering and organizing data in dashboards, page 143 Letting users filter data in dashboards, page 147 For steps to add content to a customizable, detailed dashboard, see the appropriate links below: Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards, page 178 Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard, page 179 Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182 Adding widgets to dashboards, page 185 Adding Information Windows to dashboards, page 202 Creating a dashboard using data from a Salesforce.com report You can create a dashboard using data from a report stored on Salesforce.com. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 79

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Identifying geographical information in your data During the dashboard creation process, Analytics Express automatically attempts to determine if your data contains geographical information, such as country names or latitude or longitude values. If a column of data contains geographical information, the type of geographical information it contains (such as City, State, or Country) is identified. You can have Analytics Express generate additional levels of geographical information based on this data, then add it to your dashboard. For example, if your data contains a list of city names, you can have Analytics Express automatically create an attribute called State, which contains the state that each city is located in. Prerequisites You must have Adobe Flash Player. Read the Best practices for creating dashboards, page 71. To create a dashboard using data from a Salesforce.com report 1 From the Dashboards page, click New Dashboard. 2 From the left, click Salesforce. Click Continue. 3 Type your Salesforce.com user name and password in the User Name and Password fields. Click Login. 4 Navigate to and select the report that contains your data, then click Next. A preview of your data is displayed on the Review Data page. Analytics Express automatically identifies business attributes and metrics from your data and displays them as business attributes or metrics on the Review Data page. 5 For each column of data in your file that Analytics Express has identified as a business attribute or metric, you can choose whether to include the column as data in your dashboard, change whether the column is treated as a business attribute or a metric, and so on. Hover the cursor over the name of the column, then click the arrow icon to display a pop-up menu. Select from the following: To define the column as a business attribute, point to Attribute. a If the column's data type is Date, Time, or DateTime, you can define your data in more specific detail by having Analytics Express automatically generate additional time-related 80 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 information based on the type of data provided. For example, if the column is assigned the Date data type, you can have Analytics Express automatically generate an attribute containing the year for each date. Select the check box next to each attribute that you want to have automatically generated, then click OK. b You can identify a data column as containing geographical information, as described in Identifying geographical information in your data, page 80. To identify the data column as containing geographical information, select the type of geographical information it contains, such as City, State, or Country. Select the check box next to each attribute that you want to have automatically generated based on the data column, then click OK. To include the data column as data in your dashboard without identifying it as containing geographical information, select None, then click OK. To define the column as a metric, select Metric. To avoid including the data column in your dashboard, select Do Not Import. To specify the name that will be used to identify the column in your dashboard, select Rename. Type a name in the field and press ENTER. 6 Repeat the appropriate steps above for each column. 7 Click Continue, then do one of the following: To create a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, click the icon of the visualization to use to display your data. If the visualization you selected above allows you to choose between different visualization subtypes to use to display your data, a row of additional icons is displayed, representing each of the available subtypes. For example, if you want to represent your data as a bar graph, you can choose to display it as a vertical bar graph or a horizontal bar graph. Click the icon for the subtype to use to display your data. For a list of visualizations and the subtypes available for each visualization, see Select a Visualization dialog box, page 260. Your visualization is created and added to the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 81

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To create a customizable, detailed dashboard that gives you freedom pixel by pixel, click Advanced Templates, then select a template to use to create your new dashboard. The options are: Blank Template: Select this option for a dashboard with one large content section. Tile and Two Contents: Select this option for dashboards that contain two columns of content. Four Contents: Select this option to create a dashboard divided into four content sections. Banded Template: Select this option to create a bill or listing, with address space at the top of the dashboard. The rows of data below the address are displayed using alternating background colors to help users view the data more easily. ipad Template: Select this option to create a dashboard with one content section, sized for display on an ipad. 8 Your dashboard is created and displayed. To save the dashboard, click Save at the bottom of the page. 9 Type a name and description for the dashboard in the Name and Description fields. 10 Click OK. The dashboard is saved. Once you have created your dashboard, you can add text and data visualizations to the dashboard, format items on the dashboard, organize your data into multiple pages, and so on. For steps to add content to an easy-to-create dashboard, see the appropriate links below: Adding text and data to a dashboard, page 95 Layering and organizing data in dashboards, page 143 Letting users filter data in dashboards, page 147 Formatting and working with dashboards, page 155 For steps to add content to a customizable, detailed dashboard, see the appropriate links below: Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards, page 178 82 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard, page 179 Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182 Adding widgets to dashboards, page 185 Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection You can create dashboards using data from a database connection. Analytics Express provides an intuitive visual interface that allows you to quickly and easily choose which data to include in your dashboard. The SQL query required to retrieve your data from the database is automatically generated for you behind-the-scenes. You can use data from a database to create the following: A dashboard that runs against a stored copy of the data, and can easily be shared with other members of your team. A dashboard that retrieves updated data from the database each time it is opened, and can be delivered to a list of contacts from a database table (called an Express Delivery Dashboard). Steps to create both types of dashboards are included below. You can create, edit, or delete a database connection. For steps, see Creating, editing, renaming, duplicating, and deleting database connections, page 92. Identifying geographical information in your data During the dashboard creation process, Analytics Express automatically attempts to determine if your data contains geographical information, such as country names or latitude or longitude values. If a column of data contains geographical information, the type of geographical information it contains (such as City, State, or Country) is identified. You can have Analytics Express generate additional levels of geographical information based on this data, then add it to your dashboard. For example, if your data contains a list of city names, you can have Analytics Express automatically create an attribute called State, which contains the state that each city is located in. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 83

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Prerequisites This procedure assumes that you have at least one database connection to your data. For steps to create a database connection, see To create a database connection, page 92. You must have Adobe Flash Player. Read the Best practices for creating dashboards, page 71. To create a dashboard using data from a database connection 1 From the Dashboards page, do one of the following: To create a dashboard that can easily be shared with other members of your team, click New Dashboard. To create a dashboard that retrieves updated data from the database each time it is opened, and can be delivered to a list of contacts from a database table, click the arrow icon next to New Dashboard, then select Express Delivery Dashboard. 2 From the left, click Database. Click Continue. 3 From the Database Connections panel on the left, select the database connection that contains your data. 4 A list of the database tables in the database is displayed in the Available Tables panel. You can view a table s contents by clicking the Expand icon next to the table s name. Each column in the table is displayed, along with its data type. You can narrow the list of database tables displayed in the Available Tables panel by typing the name of a table in the search field. Define the data to include in the dashboard 5 To add data in a table to your dashboard, click and drag the name of the table from the Available Tables list onto the editor pane in the middle of the page. The table name is displayed in the editor pane, with a list of the data columns contained in the table. Define the data you want to include in your dashboard by selecting from the following: To include a data column in your dashboard, hover the cursor over the name of the column and click the Add icon. A green check mark is displayed next to the column, indicating that it will be included in your dashboard. 84 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To include all the data columns in the table in your dashboard, hover the cursor over the Add All Columns row at the top of the table and click the Add icon. Green check marks are displayed next to each column in the table, indicating that they will be included in your dashboard. To remove a table and all of its columns from being included in your dashboard, click the Delete icon next to the name of the table. 6 You can include data in your dashboard by filtering the data in a column, combining the data from two different database tables, and so on. For steps, see the appropriate links below: To include data in a dashboard based on an expression, page 88 To filter the data to be included in a dashboard, page 89 To filter and include data in a dashboard based on multiple expressions, page 90 To combine data from two tables in a database, page 91 7 Repeat the appropriate steps above to select and define the data that you want to include in your dashboard. 8 Once you are satisfied with the data that you have selected, from the top toolbar, click the Execute SQL icon. A preview of your data is displayed in the Data Preview panel below. Analytics Express automatically identifies business attributes and metrics from your data and displays them as business attributes or metrics in the Data Preview panel. 9 For each column of data in your file that Analytics Express has identified as a business attribute or metric, you can choose whether to include the column as data in your dashboard, change whether the column is treated as a business attribute or a metric, and so on. Hover the cursor over the name of the column, then click the arrow icon to display a pop-up menu. Select from the following: To define the column as a business attribute, point to Attribute. a If the column's data type is Date, Time, or DateTime, you can define your data in more specific detail by having Analytics Express automatically generate additional time-related information based on the type of data provided. For example, if the column is assigned the Date data type, you can have Analytics Express automatically generate an attribute containing the year 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 85

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide for each date. Select the check box next to each attribute that you want to have automatically generated, then click OK. b You can identify a data column as containing geographical information, as described Identifying geographical information in your data, page 83. To identify the data column as containing geographical information, select the type of geographical information it contains, such as City, State, or Country. Select the check box next to each attribute that you want to have automatically generated based on the data column, then click OK. To include the data column as data in your dashboard without identifying it as containing geographical information, select None, then click OK. To define the column as a metric, select Metric. To avoid including the data column in your dashboard, select Delete. To specify the name that will be used to identify the column in your dashboard, select Rename. Type a name in the field and press ENTER. 10 Click Continue, then do one of the following: To create a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, click the icon of the visualization to use to display your data. If the visualization you selected above allows you to choose between different visualization subtypes to use to display your data, a row of additional icons is displayed, representing each of the available subtypes. For example, if you want to represent your data as a bar graph, you can choose to display it as a vertical bar graph or a horizontal bar graph. Click the icon for the subtype to use to display your data. For a list of visualizations and the subtypes available for each visualization, see Select a Visualization dialog box, page 260. Your visualization is created and added to the dashboard. To create a customizable, detailed dashboard that gives you freedom pixel by pixel, click Advanced Templates, then select a template to use to create your new dashboard. The options are: Blank Template: Select this option for a dashboard with one large content section. Tile and Two Contents: Select this option for dashboards that contain two columns of content. 86 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Four Contents: Select this option to create a dashboard divided into four content sections. Banded Template: Select this option to create a bill or listing, with address space at the top of the dashboard. The rows of data below the address are displayed using alternating background colors to help users view the data more easily. ipad Template: Select this option to create a dashboard with one content section, sized for display on an ipad. 11 Your dashboard is created and displayed. To save the dashboard, click Save at the bottom of the page. 12 Type a name and description for the dashboard in the Name and Description fields. 13 Click OK. The dashboard is saved. Once you have created your dashboard, you can add text and data visualizations to the dashboard, format items on the dashboard, organize your data into multiple pages, and so on. For steps to add content to an easy-to-create dashboard, see the appropriate links below: Adding text and data to a dashboard, page 95 Layering and organizing data in dashboards, page 143 Letting users filter data in dashboards, page 147 For steps to add content to a customizable, detailed dashboard, see the appropriate links below: Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards, page 178 Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard, page 179 Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182 Adding widgets to dashboards, page 185 Including data in a dashboard based on an expression You can include the result of an expression as data in your dashboard. For example, if you want to add product profit information to your dashboard, 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 87

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide you can define an expression as [PRODUCT.REVENUE] - [PRODUCT.COST]. The result of this expression is then included in the dashboard as an attribute or metric, along with any other data (such as data columns) you include in the dashboard. Prerequisite The following procedure assumes that you have chosen to create a dashboard using data from a database and have added at least one database table to the editor pane. For steps, see Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83. To include data in a dashboard based on an expression 1 In the editor pane, hover the cursor over the data column that contains the data to include in the dashboard, then click the arrow icon that appears. A pop-up menu is displayed. Select Expression. 2 In the Expression pane, type the expression to use to include data in the dashboard. You can include a data column in an expression by typing [TABLENAME.COLUMNNAME], where TABLENAME is the name of the table containing the data column and COLUMNNAME is the name of the data column. Analytics Express automatically provides suggestions for you as you type. 3 You can add functions to your expression to calculate values such as sums or averages. Perform the following steps: a Click the Insert icon. To select a function, point to Function, then choose the name of the function from the list. b Select the appropriate options to provide arguments for the function. You can hover the cursor over the name of each argument for more information on what type of data the function requires. When finished, click OK. Your function is displayed in the Expression pane. 4 Repeat the steps above as appropriate to define your expression. 5 Click Save to apply your changes. 88 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Filtering data to be included in a dashboard You can include data that meets a specific condition in a dashboard. To do this, you create a filtering condition. For steps, see To filter the data to be included in a dashboard, page 89. If you define multiple filtering conditions, you can view a list of the filtering conditions used to include data in your dashboard, and define how the filtering conditions are combined and evaluated. For steps, see To filter and include data in a dashboard based on multiple expressions, page 90. Prerequisites The following procedures assume that you have chosen to create a dashboard using data from a database and have added at least one database table to the editor pane. For steps, see Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83. You must define at least two filtering conditions to define how the filtering conditions are combined. You must define at least three filtering conditions to group and evaluate filtering conditions together. To filter the data to be included in a dashboard 1 In the editor pane, hover the cursor over the data column that contains the data to filter, then click the arrow icon that appears. A pop-up menu is displayed. Point to Filter, then select one of the following: To filter your data using a simple comparison, select the operator to use to create the comparison, then enter the values to compare the data column to. Click OK to apply your changes. A filter icon is displayed next to the name of the data column, indicating that the data in the column will be included in the dashboard. To filter based on an expression, such as [Credit_Card_Purchases.Books] + [Credit_Card_Purchases.Electronics] > 5000000, select Expression. Select the appropriate options to define the expression and click Save to apply your changes. A filter icon is displayed next to the name of the data column, indicating that the data in the column will be included in the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 89

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To filter and include data in a dashboard based on multiple expressions 1 From the toolbar, click the Filters icon. A list of all the filtering conditions that you have defined to include in the dashboard is displayed. Do one of the following: To include data in the dashboard by creating a new filtering condition: a b c d Click Add Condition. In the Expression pane, type the filtering condition to use to select data for the database for the database. You can add functions to the condition to calculate values such as sums or averages. Click the Insert icon. To select a function, choose the name of the function from the list. Select the appropriate options to provide arguments for the function and click OK. Your function is displayed in the Expression pane. Repeat the steps above as appropriate to define your condition. When finished, click Save to apply your changes and create the condition. To define how the data that meets the filtering conditions is combined: By default, filter conditions are combined using the AND operator. You can change the operator used to combine two filter conditions. To do so, click AND between the conditions, then select the operator to use to combine the conditions. To evaluate and group filtering conditions together: You can ensure that filtering conditions are evaluated together when your data is included in the dashboard by grouping conditions together. Hover the cursor between the two conditions, then do one of the following: To group the conditions together, click the Group Conditions icon. To ungroup the conditions, click the Ungroup Conditions icon. 2 Repeat the appropriate steps above to define how to filter and include data in the dashboard. 3 Click OK to apply your changes. 90 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Combining data from two tables in a database You can determine how data from columns in two different tables in a database is combined and included in your dashboard. To do this, you define a join between the columns of the two tables. Prerequisite The following procedure assumes that you are importing data from a database and have added at least two database tables to the editor pane. For steps, see Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83. To combine data from two tables in a database 1 In the editor pane, click and drag the name of the column from the first table onto the column from the second table. The join is automatically created and a line representing the join is displayed in the editor pane, running from the column in the first table to the column in the second table. 2 You can specify additional options for the join, such as the way the data is combined (called the join type) or the condition that data must satisfy in order to be included in the joined data (called the join condition). Click the line representing the join, then select one of the following: To delete the join, select Delete. To only include data in which the joined columns from both tables satisfy the join condition, select Inner Join. To include all data from the column in the first table and only the data from the column in the second table in which the join condition is satisfied, select Left Outer Join. To include all data from the column in the second table and only the data from the column in the first table in which the join condition is satisfied, select Right Outer Join. To include all data from both columns, select Outer Join. To change the join condition, select More Options. Next to Join Operator, select the operator to use to compare columns in the join, such as greater than (<) or equals (=). Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 91

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating, editing, renaming, duplicating, and deleting database connections When you are creating dashboards using data from a database connection, you can create, edit, or delete database connections. Separate steps are below to perform each of these tasks in Analytics Express. To create a database connection 1 From the Dashboards page, click New Dashboard. 2 From the left, click Database. Click Continue. 3 Click the New Connection icon. The Database Connections dialog box opens. 4 Define the database connection by providing the appropriate details for the database connection, including the type of the connection to create (such as Oracle or SQL Server), the database management system (DBMS), and the login name and password to use to connect to the database. The information required can vary depending on the specific type of database connection that you want to create. For a list of the information required for your specific database type, contact your database administrator. 5 Type a name for the database connection in the Name field. 6 Click OK to save your changes. To edit a database connection 1 From the Dashboards page, click New Dashboard. 2 From the left, click Database. Click Continue. 3 Hover the cursor over the name of the database connection to edit, then click the arrow icon and select Edit. The Database Connections dialog box opens. 4 In the Database Connections dialog box, edit the database connection by providing the appropriate details for the database connection, including the type of the connection to create (such as Oracle or SQL Server), the 92 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 database management system (DBMS), and the login name and password to use to connect to the database. The information required can vary depending on the specific type of database connection that you want to edit. For a list of the information required for your specific database type, contact your database administrator. 5 Click OK to save your changes. To rename a database connection 1 From the Dashboards page, click New Dashboard. 2 From the left, click Database. Click Continue. 3 Hover the cursor over the name of the database connection to rename, then click the arrow icon and select Rename. Type a name for the database connection and press ENTER to apply your changes. To create a copy of a database connection 1 From the Dashboards page, click New Dashboard. 2 From the left, click Database. Click Continue. 3 Hover the cursor over the name of the database connection to edit, then click the arrow icon and select Duplicate. The copy is created and added to the list of database connections. To delete a database connection 1 From the Dashboards page, click New Dashboard. 2 From the left, click Database. Click Continue. 3 Hover the cursor over the name of the database connection, then click the Delete icon. A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to delete the database connection. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 93

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Linking attributes across datasets If your dashboard contains data from multiple data sources, and the same attribute is used in more than one set of data (called a dataset), you can ensure that Analytics Express treats the attribute as the same attribute across each dataset. To do so, you link the attribute across each dataset in which it appears. Any attribute that has been linked across multiple datasets is displayed with a blue indicator. In a quick, easy-to create dashboard, a linked attribute looks like. In a detailed, customizable dashboard, a linked attribute looks like. For background information and examples of how including data from more than one dataset can affect how your data is displayed in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, see About creating visualizations using data from multiple datasets, page 99. Prerequisite Your dashboard must contain data from at least two datasets. For steps to add datasets to a dashboard in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, see Adding and removing datasets from a quick, easy-to-use dashboard, page 96. For steps to add datasets to a dashboard in a detailed, customizable dashboard, see Adding and removing datasets from detailed, customizable dashboards, page 177. To link attributes in a dashboard 1 Do one of the following: Click the name of the dashboard to run it. In the My Data panel, any already linked attributes are shown with a blue chain on their icon:. Right-click the attribute to link. In the dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. In the Dataset Objects panel, any already linked attributes are shown with a blue indicator:. Right-click the attribute to link. 2 Select Link To. In the list of available datasets, point to the dataset that contains the attribute to link to, and then select that attribute. 3 A message is displayed indicating that the link might affect other dashboards that the attribute is used on. Click OK to continue. 94 About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 4 To remove a link, right-click the linked attribute and select Unlink. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard Quick, easy-to-create dashboards allow you to display your data in a polished, visually-striking format that takes a minimal amount of time to set up and use. You can add text, interactive data visualizations, data filtering, and multiple layers of organization to your dashboard, then take advantage of Analytics Express s presentation-quality formatting options to optimize your display. Adding text and data to a dashboard, page 95 Layering and organizing data in dashboards, page 143 Letting users filter data in dashboards, page 147 Formatting and working with dashboards, page 155 For background information on the different types of dashboards that you can create in Analytics Express, and steps to create them, see About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express, page 68. Adding text and data to a dashboard Once you have created a dashboard, you can add content such as text, interactive visualizations, and new metrics, as follows: Adding and removing datasets from a quick, easy-to-use dashboard, page 96 Adding, editing, and removing text in a dashboard, page 97 Creating, adding, and deleting visualizations, page 98 Creating and adding new metrics to a dashboard, page 135 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 95

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Adding and removing datasets from a quick, easy-to-use dashboard Once you have created a dashboard, you can add or remove additional sets of data (called datasets) from the dashboard. You can use attributes and metrics from multiple datasets to create visualizations, add filters to your dashboard, and so on. If you remove a dataset from a dashboard, some objects on the dashboard may contain references to data that is no longer available. These objects will be automatically updated to remove any data from the deleted dataset. For example, a visualization contains data from multiple datasets and one of the datasets is removed from the dashboard, the attributes and metrics that are no longer available are removed from the visualization. Prerequisite The following procedures assume that you have already created the dashboard that you want to modify. To add a dataset to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Add Dataset icon. Select the appropriate options to add a new set of data to your dashboard. For detailed steps, see the following: For detailed steps to add data from a saved file, see Creating a dashboard using data from a saved file, page 73. For detailed steps to add data from a report stored on Salesforce.com, see Creating a dashboard using data from a Salesforce.com report, page 79. For detailed steps to add data from a database connection, see Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83. The dataset is added to the dashboard and displayed as an option in the drop-down list at the top of the My Data panel. 96 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To remove a dataset from a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the drop-down list at the top of the My Data panel, select the dataset to remove. If the My Data panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. 2 Hover the cursor over the name of the My Data panel, then click the arrow icon in the top right. Select Remove Dataset. A confirmation message is displayed. 3 Click OK. The dataset is removed from the dashboard. Adding, editing, and removing text in a dashboard You can add text to a dashboard, then format, size, and rearrange the text as desired. Separate steps to add, edit, and remove text in a dashboard are below. To add text to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the Tools menu, select Insert Text Field. A text field is automatically added to the dashboard. In the field, type the text to display. 2 Hover the cursor over the text field, then click the arrow icon in the top right. A floating toolbar is displayed, containing formatting options such as font type and font size. Select the appropriate options to format your text. 3 When you are finished editing the text field, click outside the text field to apply your changes. To edit text in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, click the text that you want to edit, then type the text to display. 2 Hover the cursor over the text field, then click the arrow icon in the top right. A floating toolbar is displayed, containing formatting options such 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 97

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide as font type and font size. Select the appropriate options to format your text. 3 When you are finished editing the text field, click outside the text field to apply your changes. To remove text from a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the text field you want to delete, then click the arrow icon displayed to the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Click X. A message is displayed asking you to confirm your choice. 3 Click OK. The text field is removed from the dashboard. To move a text field 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 Click and drag the text field, so that a blue indicator line is displayed in the location in which you want to move the text field. The text field is moved and displayed in its new location. To size a text field 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 Click the text field you want to size. Click and drag the handles to size the text field. Creating, adding, and deleting visualizations A visualization is an interactive, visual representation of the data in a dashboard. You can add visualizations to a dashboard to provide rich, engaging ways to display and analyze your data. For example, you can add a Graph visualization to a dashboard to slice and dice your data, or use a Network visualization to examine the relationships between business attributes. 98 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 You can add the following visualizations to a dashboard: Graph visualization: You can choose between a variety of different graphs to use to display your data, such as an area graph, line graph, or pie chart. For steps to add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, see Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106. Grid visualization: You can display data in an interactive grid, then pivot, sort, move, drill, filter, and perform additional manipulations on your data. For steps to add a Grid visualization to a dashboard, see Creating and adding a Grid visualization to a dashboard, page 123. Heat Map visualization: You can quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of business variables at once using the Heat Map visualization (also called the Tree Map visualization). Your data is displayed as a combination of colored rectangles, with each rectangle representing a business attribute element, and the rectangles are colored and sized according to the value of business metrics in the visualization. For steps to add a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard, see Creating and adding a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard, page 124. Map visualization: You can display locations as image markers or bubble markers on a map, using the Map visualization (also called the ESRI Map visualization). You can enable map items to be clustered together and displayed as a circle when a large number of map markers must be displayed in the same map area. For steps to add a Map visualization to a dashboard, see Creating and adding a Map visualization to a dashboard, page 126. Network visualization: You can examine relationships between business attribute elements using the Network visualization (also called the Network Diagram visualization). The business attribute elements in your data are displayed as a network of nodes, with lines between the nodes representing relationships between each business attribute element. For steps to add a Network visualization to a dashboard, see Creating and adding a Network visualization to a dashboard, page 129. About creating visualizations using data from multiple datasets If your dashboard contains more than one dataset, you can include data from multiple datasets in a visualization. For background information and steps to add or remove datasets from a dashboard, see Adding and removing datasets from a quick, easy-to-use dashboard, page 96. By default, when you add multiple datasets to a visualization, Analytics Express automatically attempts to link together related attributes that 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 99

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide appear in more than one dataset. For example, Analytics Express attempts to link attributes that share the same name. Attributes that are linked together are displayed with a blue indicator and are displayed as one attribute when added to a visualization. You can manually link attributes, or choose to unlink attributes that are already linked. Unlinked attributes with the same name are treated as two separate attributes when displayed in a visualization. For more information on linking and steps to manually link attributes, see Linking attributes across datasets, page 94. As an example: The Northern dataset contains the Region attribute and the Profit metric. It contains the Central, Mid-Atlantic, Northeast, and Northwest regions. The Southern dataset contains the Region attribute and the Revenue metric. It contains the Central, South, Southeast, and Southwest regions. In the image below, the two original datasets are displayed in the two Grid visualizations on the top, with their dataset names displayed in the title bar. The Grid visualization on the bottom contains data from both datasets: the Region attribute, the Profit metric from the Northern dataset, and the Revenue metric from the Southern dataset. Analytics Express combines the data from both datasets and displays the combined grid with information that is complete as possible. Because Revenue data does not exist for the Mid-Atlantic, Northeast, and Northwest regions, the corresponding cells in the grid are displayed as blank. In 100 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 contrast, the Central region is included in both of the original datasets, so it has both Profit and Revenue data. If you combine data from multiple datasets in a visualization, and one dataset contains attribute data that can be used to relate multiple attributes to each other, Analytics Express can use the relationships between the attributes to calculate additional data. For example, consider the following scenario: Dataset 1 contains Region, Year, and Category. Dataset 2 contains Region and Year. Dataset 3 contains Region and Category. In the image below, the contents of each dataset are displayed in the three grid visualizations at the top. Data from all the datasets is combined in the bottom Grid visualization. As shown in the image, Dataset 1 contains each of the attributes in Dataset 2 and Dataset 3. Data in the combined grid is calculated at the level of Region, Year, and Category. The Revenue data from Dataset 1 is available at the Region-Year-Category level, so a different Revenue value is displayed for each combination of Region, Year, and Category. However, the Profit metric from Dataset 2 is available at the Region-Year level, and contains no Category information. As a result, the combined grid contains Profit data at the Region-Year level, and repeats for all four categories. Similarly, the Cost metric from Dataset 3 is available at the Region-Category level, and contains no Year information. As a result, the 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 101

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide combined grid contains Cost data at the Region-Category level, and repeats for each year in the visualization. Determining which data is displayed in a visualization When you create a visualization that contains data from multiple datasets, you can determine which data is included in the visualization. For visualizations that contain attributes and metrics, the data displayed in the visualization is determined by the metrics added to the visualization, then by the dataset defined as the visualization's grid source (also called the data source). For details, see For visualizations that contain attributes and metrics, page 102. For visualizations that contain only attributes, the data displayed in the visualization is determined by the dataset defined as the visualization's grid source (also called the data source). For details, see For visualizations that contain only attributes, page 103. For steps to define the grid source for a visualization, see To define the grid source for a visualization, page 104. For visualizations that contain attributes and metrics For visualizations that contain attributes and metrics, you can determine which attribute elements are displayed in the visualization by adding metric data. For example, in the image below: The first dataset contains the Category attribute and the Profit metric. Only data for Movies and Music is included in the dataset. The second dataset contains the Category attribute and the Revenue metric. Only data for Books and Movies is included in the dataset. The combined Revenue and Profit grid at the bottom contains the Category attribute, the Revenue Metric, and the Profit metric. Because either 102 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Revenue or Profit data exists for the Books, Movies, and Music categories, Books, Movie, and Music are all included in the combined grid. For visualizations that contain only attributes For visualizations that contain only attributes, the visualization's grid source determines which attribute elements are included in the visualization, as follows: If a dataset is selected as the grid source: For each attribute in the visualization, only attribute elements included in the grid source are displayed in the visualization. Attribute elements that exist only in other datasets are not displayed. If the visualization has no grid source: For each attribute in the visualization, all attribute elements are displayed, regardless of which dataset they belong to. For example, a dashboard has two datasets, both containing the Region attribute. The first dataset contains the regions Central, Mid-Atlantic, Northeast, and Southeast. The second dataset contains the regions Mid-Atlantic, Northwest, Southeast, and Southwest. In the image below, the Grid visualization contains the Region attribute. The first dataset is defined as the grid source for the visualization. As a result, the 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 103

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide visualization contains only elements from the first dataset: Central, Mid-Atlantic, Northeast, and Southeast. In the image below, the visualization has no grid source. All elements of Region from all datasets in the dashboard are displayed in the visualization: Central, Mid-Atlantic, Northeast, Northwest, Southeast, and Southwest. Prerequisite The dashboard that contains the visualization must include at least two datasets. For steps to add a dataset to a dashboard, see Adding and removing datasets from a quick, easy-to-use dashboard, page 96. To define the grid source for a visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization. 2 If the visualization's Drop Zones panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. The name of the Drop Zones panel for a visualization can vary depending on the type of visualization you are modifying. For example, the Drop Zones panel appears as the Grid panel when modifying a Grid visualization, and appears as the Network panel when modifying a Network visualization. 3 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, click the Add icon. Select Show All, then do one of the following: To define a dataset as the grid source, hover the cursor over the name of the dataset to use as the grid source, then click the Use As the Primary Source of Data icon. The name of the dataset is 104 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 highlighted and an icon is displayed next to its name to signify that it is defined as the grid source. To define the visualization as having no grid source, if a dataset has the This is the Primary Source of Data icon displayed next to its name, click the icon. The icon disappears from the list of datasets and the visualization is defined as having no grid source. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. Creating a blank visualization You can create and add a blank visualization to a dashboard, for use as a placeholder. You can add a specific type of blank visualization to the dashboard, such as a Grid or Heat Map, or add a generic blank visualization and choose the visualization's type later. If you add a generic blank visualization to the dashboard, the visualization has no specific type. Once you decide on the type of visualization to use to display your data, you select the visualization type from a list, and Analytics Express automatically adds the appropriate attributes and metrics to the visualization to optimize your display. If you add a specific type of blank visualization to the dashboard, you can select and add each report object to display in the visualization. For steps to create a specific type of visualization, see the related links below: Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106 Creating and adding a Grid visualization to a dashboard, page 123 Creating and adding a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard, page 124 Creating and adding a Network visualization to a dashboard, page 129 Prerequisite This procedure assumes that you have already created the dashboard that you want to modify. For steps, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 105

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To add a blank visualization to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, add the blank visualization by doing one of the following: To add a generic blank visualization without defining the visualization's type, from the toolbar, click the Add Visualization icon. The blank visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed. To add a specific type of blank visualization, click the arrow to the right of the Add Visualization icon. Select the type of visualization to add to the dashboard. The blank visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed with an icon representing the visualization's type. 2 Once you have added your blank visualization to the dashboard, you can customize your display by adding data to the visualization. For steps, see Adding, replacing, and removing data from visualizations, page 131. 3 If you chose to add a generic blank visualization to the dashboard, you can select the type of visualization to use to display your data. In the blank visualization, click Select a Visualization, then click the icon of the visualization to use to display your data. Analytics Express automatically adds attributes and metrics to the visualization to optimize your display. 4 For steps to add data to a specific type of blank visualization, see the appropriate link in the introduction above. Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard You can display and analyze your data in a graphical format by adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard. Analytics Express provides a number of graph types (called graph styles) to meet your reporting needs, including vertical area graphs, pie charts, bubble graphs, and so on. For steps to create a dual-axis or combination graph, see Creating a Graph visualization with a dual-axis or combination graph, page 113. For steps to create a pie or ring graph, see Creating a Graph visualization with pie or ring graphs, page 115. For general steps to create all other types of graphs, including bar, area, and line graphs, see To create and add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 111. 106 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 The Graph visualization is a powerful, interactive visualization that allows you to display your data using a variety of graph styles, such as the line graph, bubble graph, or grid, and then slice and dice the data as needed. You can: Organize the data displayed in the graph based on a specific business attribute. For example, a bar graph contains the number of units sold for several regions. You can choose to display a different bar for each individual store within each region. Color graph items (such as bubbles, lines, or bars) based on a business attribute or a metric. For example, you can choose to represent each business attribute element in a graph using a different color. You can choose to have graph items automatically colored based on the value of a metric, with the darkest colors being displayed for the largest metric values. Automatically size graph items based on the value of a metric, with the largest elements being displayed for the largest metric values. Slice your data, by displaying a graph for each element of a business attribute. For example, you can display the revenue data for each Region as a separate line graph, or display a series of bar graphs, each containing store sales information for a different year. An example of a Graph visualization is displayed below. The data in the visualization is shown as a series of bar graphs, with a separate bar displayed for each Call Center. Each Call Center is represented by a unique bar color. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 107

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Finally, the data is sliced to display a separate graph for the revenue data for each product category and quarter. To design a Graph visualization, you should perform the following basic steps. These are included in the steps to create a Graph visualization below. See To create and add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 111 for details. Determine the graph style to use to display your data, such as a bar graph or scatter graph. For example images and a description of the data required to display each graph style, see Minimum object requirements for each Graph visualization style, page 121. Add the business attributes and metrics that are required to display the data using the graph style that you have chosen. Select additional display options, such as whether to size or color bars, bubbles, and other graph items based on business attributes or metric values. Slice the data to show the graphs at the level of data that you want to display. Displaying metric data in a visualization using the Metric Names attribute The Metric Names attribute contains the names of the metrics in a visualization. You can determine how to display these metrics using the Metric Names attribute. For example, you can add the Metric Names 108 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 attribute to the Break By area of a line graph to display a separate line for each metric in the graph. The Metric Names attribute is automatically added to the Graph panel when you add metrics to the visualization. You can then choose how to display the metrics by placing the Metric Names attribute on one of the following areas: Vertical Axis: To display metric names in rows in the graph, place the Metric Names attribute on the Vertical Axis area. If the Vertical Axis area contains only attributes (including the Metric Names attribute), each attribute can be used either to slice data into rows of graphs, or to display values along the Y-axis. Horizontal Axis: To display metric names in columns in the graph, place the Metric Names attribute on the Horizontal Axis area. If the Horizontal Axis area contains only attributes (including the Metric Names attribute), each attribute can be used either to slice data into columns of graphs, or to display values along the X-axis. Break By: To display a graph item (such as a bar or line) for each metric, place the Metric Names attribute on the Break By area. Slice: To display a wedge for each metric in the Angle area, place the Metric Names attribute on the Slice area. This option is available for pie or ring graphs. You can also color graph items based on the metrics that they represent, by clicking and dragging the Metric Names attribute from any of the above areas to the Color By area. For example, in an area graph containing the Profit per Employee, Revenue per Employee, and Cost per Employee metrics, you can display each metric using a different color. In a dual-axis or combination graph, the Metric Names attribute controls the display of the metrics in the Metrics area. In a pie or ring graph, if you have placed at least two metrics in the Angle area and there are no metrics in the Horizontal Axis area or Vertical Axis area, the Metric Names attribute controls the location in which the names of the metrics in the Angle area are displayed. If you have placed metrics on the Horizontal Axis area or the Vertical Axis area, the Metric Names attribute controls the display of the metrics in the Horizontal Axis area or Vertical Axis area. In any other type of graph, the Metric Names attribute controls the display of the metrics in the Horizontal Axis area or Vertical Axis area. For example, in the image below, a visualization containing pie graphs is displayed. The Profit and Profit Per Employee metrics are placed on the 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 109

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Angle area, and no metrics have been placed on the Vertical Axis or Horizontal Axis areas. The Metric Names attribute, which controls the display of Profit and Profit per Employee, is placed on the Horizontal Axis area. As a result, separate columns of pie graphs for Profit and Profit Per Employee are displayed in the visualization. Because the Horizontal Axis area contains only attributes (in this case, the Metric Names attribute), you can determine whether to use the metrics to slice data into columns of graphs, or to display values along the X-axis. In the image above, note the arrow icon displayed in the Horizontal Axis area, which is placed below the Metric Names attribute. In the image below, the arrow is placed above the Metric Names attribute. As a result, the graphs are no longer divided into columns for Profit and Profit Per Employee. Instead, Profit and Profit Per Employee are displayed along the X-axis. For steps to create a dual-axis or combination graph, see Creating a Graph visualization with a dual-axis or combination graph, page 113. For general 110 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 steps to create a pie or ring graph, see To create and add a pie or ring graph to a dashboard, page 116. The following are steps to create all other types of graphs, including bar, area, and line graphs. Prerequisites This procedure assumes that you have already created and opened the dashboard to add your visualization to. For steps to create a dashboard, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. You should be familiar with the Metric Names attribute and how it can be used to display data in a Graph visualization. For details, see Displaying metric data in a visualization using the Metric Names attribute, page 108. To create and add a Graph visualization to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the Add Visualization icon, then select Graph. A blank graph visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed with an icon representing the visualization's type. 2 To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag attributes or metrics to the Graph panel, as described in the steps below. If the My Data panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. 3 To display values along the X-axis and Y-axis of the graph, perform the following steps: a b c d To display data on the X-axis of the graph, place attributes and metrics on the Horizontal Axis area. To display data on the Y-axis of the graph, place attributes and metrics on the Vertical Axis area. If the Horizontal Axis area contains only attributes, an arrow icon is displayed in the list of attributes. All attributes displayed below the arrow icon are shown in the X-axis of the graph. Click and drag the arrow icon to place the arrow above all attributes and metrics in the Horizontal Axis area. If the Vertical Axis area contains only attributes, an arrow icon is displayed in the list of attributes. All attributes displayed below the arrow icon are shown in the Y-axis of the graph. Click and drag the 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 111

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide arrow icon to place the arrow above all attributes and metrics in the Vertical Axis area. 4 To color the items in the graph based on attributes or metrics, place attributes and metrics on the Color By area, as follows: To color the graph items based on an attribute, place at least one attribute on the Color By area. Each element in the attribute is displayed using a different color. For example, you can display the sales data for each employee using a different bar riser color. If you add more than one attribute to the Color By area, each combination of the attribute elements is displayed using a different color. To color graph items based on the value of a metric, place one metric on the Color By area. The graph items in the visualization are automatically shaded based on the value of the metric. For example, you can automatically color the bubbles in a bubble graph based on the value of the Profit metric, with larger profit values displayed using darker colors and smaller profit values displayed using lighter colors. 5 To display a separate graph item for each element in an attribute, place at least one attribute in the Break By area. For example, you can display the revenue data for each region as a separate line graph, or display a bar riser for each year of data. 6 To have the graph items automatically sized based on the value of a metric, place one metric in the Size By area. Graph items corresponding to larger metric values are automatically displayed as larger in size, while graph items for smaller metric values are displayed as smaller in size. For example, in a line graph, lines representing larger metric values are displayed as thicker than lines representing smaller metric values. 7 Once you have added data to the visualization, you can choose to slice the data into rows and columns of separate graphs, based on attributes. If you slice the data into both rows and columns, a table of graphs is displayed, with a graph for each combination of the attribute elements. Choose from the following: To display a row of graphs in the visualization, click and drag at least one attribute to the top of the Vertical Axis area. If an arrow icon is displayed in the Vertical Axis area, the attribute should be placed above the arrow. Each graph is displayed in a separate row, one for each element in the attribute. To display a column of graphs in the visualization, click and drag at least one attribute to the top of the Horizontal Axis area. If an arrow icon is displayed in the Horizontal Axis area, the attribute should be 112 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 placed above the arrow. Each graph is displayed in a separate column, one for each element in the attribute. 8 To display additional metrics in a tooltip when a user hovers the cursor over a graph item, place the metrics you want to display on the Tooltip area. 9 You can define other options, such as whether graph items are displayed as squares, lines, or circles, or whether the areas in an area graph are displayed as absolute or stacked. For steps, see Formatting a Graph visualization, page 161. 10 To save your dashboard, click Save. Creating a Graph visualization with a dual-axis or combination graph You can add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, to allow users to quickly explore data in a polished graphical display. Steps are provided below to add a dual-axis or combination graph to a dashboard. For steps to create a pie or ring graph, see Creating a Graph visualization with pie or ring graphs, page 115. For general steps to create all other types of graphs, including bar, area, and line graphs, see To create and add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 111. Prerequisite This procedure assumes that you have already created and opened the dashboard to add your visualization to. For steps to create a dashboard, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 113

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To create and add a dual-axis or combination graph to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, click the Add Visualization icon. An empty visualization is automatically added to the dashboard. 2 Click Select a Visualization in the empty visualization. The Select a Visualization dialog box opens, with a green icon displayed next to the visualization that Analytics Express recommends based on the data in your dashboard. Do one of the following: To create a dual-axis graph, click the Dual Axis icon, then click the icon of the graph subtype to use to display your data. To create a combination graph, click the Combination of Bar and Area icon. Your visualization is created and displayed. Analytics Express automatically adds attributes and metrics to the graph. 3 If desired, you can clear the visualization and select each attribute and metric to display in the graph. Perform the following steps: a If the My Data panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. b From the toolbar, click the Clear Visualization icon. All data in the visualization is removed. c From the My Data panel, click and drag attributes or metrics to the Graph panel, as follows: To add an attribute to the categories, or groups of data usually found along the X-axis of the graph, drag the attribute to the Categories area. To add an attribute to the series, or groups of data usually found along the Y-axis of the graph, drag the attribute to the Series area. To add a metric to the graph, drag the metric to the Metrics area. The Metric Names attribute, an attribute, is automatically added to the Graph panel. You can change whether the name of each metric in the graph is displayed on the categories or series of the graph by clicking and dragging the Metric Names attribute to the Categories or Series area. 4 To save your dashboard, click Save. 114 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Creating a Graph visualization with pie or ring graphs You can add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, to allow users to quickly explore data in a polished graphical display. Steps are provided below to add pie or ring graphs to a dashboard. For steps to create a dual-axis or combination graph, see Creating a Graph visualization with a dual-axis or combination graph, page 113. For general steps to create all other types of graphs, including bar, area, and line graphs, see To create and add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 111. You can take advantage of a variety of display styles to display pie or ring graphs. For example, you can display pie graphs in a scatter layout, or display ring graphs in a grid. For a list of available display styles, see Displaying pie or ring graphs using display layouts, page 119. If your Graph visualization contains pies or rings displayed in the same position in the visualization, the graphs are overlaid on top of each other, as shown in the image below. A 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 115

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide white circle is displayed around pie graphs that have been overlaid on top of other pie graphs to distinguish them as separate graphs. Prerequisites This procedure assumes that you have already created and opened the dashboard to add your visualization to. For steps to create a dashboard, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. You should be familiar with the Metric Names attribute and how it can be used to display data in a Graph visualization. For details, see Displaying metric data in a visualization using the Metric Names attribute, page 108. To create and add a pie or ring graph to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the Add Visualization icon, then select Graph. A blank graph visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed with an icon representing the visualization's type. 2 From the Show menu, select Properties. In the Properties panel, from the Shape drop-down list, select Pie or Ring. Click X in the top right of the Properties panel to close it. 3 To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag attributes or metrics to the Graph panel, as described in the steps below. If the My Data panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. 116 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 4 To determine the size of wedges in the pie or ring graph, place at least one metric on the Angle area. Wedges that represent larger metric values are displayed as larger than wedges that represent smaller metric values. If you add multiple metrics to the Angle area, each metric in the Angle area is displayed as a separate pie or ring graph in the visualization. 5 To determine the number of wedges in the pie or ring graph, choose from the following: To display a wedge for each element of an attribute, place at least one attribute on the Slice area. To display a wedge for each metric in the Angle area, place the Metric Names attribute on the Slice area. 6 You can determine the attributes and metrics to display along the X-axis and Y-axis. Depending on the data that you select, you can also show data in the visualization using a specific display layout. For example, you can display pie graphs in a scatter chart or grid. For a list of display styles, example images, and the data requirements to use each style, see Displaying pie or ring graphs using display layouts, page 119. Perform the following steps: a b c d To display data on the X-axis of the graph, place attributes or metrics on the Horizontal Axis area. To display data on the Y-axis of the graph, place attributes or metrics on the Vertical Axis area. If the Horizontal Axis area contains only attributes, an arrow icon is displayed in the list of attributes. All attributes displayed below the arrow icon are shown in the X-axis of the graph. Click and drag the arrow icon to place the arrow above all attributes and metrics in the Horizontal Axis area. If the Vertical Axis area contains only attributes, an arrow icon is displayed in the list of attributes. All attributes displayed below the arrow icon are shown in the Y-axis of the graph. Click and drag the arrow icon to place the arrow above all attributes and metrics in the Vertical Axis area. Determine color, break by, and sizing options 7 To color the wedges in a visualization, choose from the following: To color the wedges based on the attribute element that each wedge represents, place at least one attribute on the Color By area. Each element in the attribute is displayed using a different color. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 117

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To color the wedges based on the value of a metric, place one metric on the Color By area. Wedges corresponding to smaller metric values are displayed as lighter in color than wedges corresponding to larger metric values. To color the wedges based on the metric that each wedge represents, place the Metric Names attribute on the Color By area. Each metric in the Angle area is displayed using a different color. 8 You can display a separate ring or pie graph for each element in an attribute, each metric in the Angle area, or both. For example, you can display the revenue data for each Region as a separate pie graph. This option is available if the Slice area is empty and no attributes or metrics are displayed on the X-axis or Y-axis, or if the Slice area contains an attribute and the X-axis or Y-axis contains at least one metric. To display a separate graph for each element in an attribute, place at least one attribute in the Break By area. To display a separate graph for each metric in the Angle area, click and drag the Metric Names attribute onto the Break By area. 9 To have the pie or ring graphs automatically sized based on the value of a metric, place one metric in the Size By area. Pie or ring graphs corresponding to larger metric values are automatically displayed as larger in size, while pie or ring graphs for smaller metric values are displayed as smaller in size. Slice the data into rows and columns 10 Once you have added data to the visualization, you can choose to slice the data into rows and columns of separate graphs, based on attributes. If you slice the data into both rows and columns, a table of graphs is displayed, with a graph for each combination of the attribute elements. Choose from the following: To display a row of graphs in the visualization, click and drag at least one attribute to the top of the Vertical Axis area. If an arrow icon is displayed in the Vertical Axis area, the attribute should be placed above the arrow. Each graph is displayed in a separate row, one for each element in the attribute. To display a column of graphs in the visualization, click and drag at least one attribute to the top of the Horizontal Axis area. If an arrow icon is displayed in the Horizontal Axis area, the attribute should be placed above the arrow. Each graph is displayed in a separate column, one for each element in the attribute. 118 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 11 To display additional metrics in a tooltip when a user hovers the cursor over a graph item, place the metrics you want to display on the Tooltip area. 12 To save the dashboard, click Save. Displaying pie or ring graphs using display layouts You can display the pie or ring graphs in a visualization using a variety of different display layouts. For example, you can display pie graphs in a scatter graph or arrange ring graphs in a grid, with a ring graph for each combination of attribute elements displayed on the X-axis and Y-axis. The table below displays a list of possible layouts you can choose from when designing pie or ring graphs and the attributes and metrics required to display each layout type. Goal Minimum Data Requirements Example Display the pie or ring graphs in a vertical layout One metric in the Vertical Axis area Display the pie or ring graphs in a horizontal layout One metric in the Horizontal Axis area 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 119

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Goal Minimum Data Requirements Example Display the pie or ring graphs in a scatter graph layout One metric in the Vertical Axis area One metric in the Horizontal Axis area Display the pie or ring graphs in a bubble graph layout One metric in the Vertical Axis area One metric in the Horizontal Axis area One metric in the Size By area Display the pie or ring graphs in a grid layout One attribute in the Vertical Axis area One attribute in the Horizontal Axis area 120 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Minimum object requirements for each Graph visualization style The table below contains example images and data requirements for each graph style available for the Graph visualization. Graph Style Requirements Example Line (also called the Line Graph) You can display the data as a vertical or horizontal line graph, to allow users to view lines representing metric values for each element of an attribute. Bar (also called the Bar Graph) You can display the data as a vertical or horizontal bar graph, to allow users to view bars representing metric values for each element of an attribute. Area You can display the data as a vertical or horizontal area graph, to allow users to view an area representing metric values for each element of an attribute. To create a graph using the Line graph style, place attributes and metrics on the Graph panel as follows: To display a vertical line graph: Place at least one attribute in the X Axis area. Place at least one metric in the Y Axis area. To display a horizontal line graph: Place at least one metric in the X Axis area. Place at least one attribute in the Y Axis area. To create a graph using the Bar graph style, place attributes and metrics on the Graph panel as follows: To display a vertical bar graph: Place at least one attribute in the X Axis area. Place at least one metric in the Y Axis area. To display a horizontal bar graph: Place at least one metric in the X Axis area. Place at least one attribute in the Y Axis area. From the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag attributes and metrics onto the Graph panel as follows: To display a vertical area graph: Place at least one attribute in the Horizontal Axis area. Place at least one metric in the Vertical Axis area. To display a horizontal area graph: Place at least one metric in the Horizontal Axis area. Place at least one attribute in the Vertical Axis area. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 121

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Graph Style Requirements Example Scatter (also called the Scatter Graph) You can display a scatter plot that allows users to visualize the trends of two different metrics for a set of attribute elements. Bubble (also called the Bubble Graph) You can display a bubble plot that allows users to visualize the trends of three or more different metrics for a set of attribute elements. Grid (also called the Grid Graph) You can use the Grid style to allow users to identify trends across combinations of data. Each marker in the grid can be automatically sized or colored based on the value of a metric. For example, in the image to the right, a separate bubble is displayed for each combination of publisher and quarter. Bubbles representing large revenue values are displayed in dark blue, and bubbles for smaller revenue values are displayed in light blue. To create a graph using the Scatter graph style, place attributes and metrics on the Graph panel as follows: Place at least one metric in the X Axis area. This metric determines the position of each bubble on the X-axis of the graph. Place at least one metric in the Y Axis area. This metric determines the position of each bubble on the Y-axis of the graph. To create a graph using the Bubble graph style, place attributes and metrics on the Graph panel as follows: Place at least one metric in the X Axis area. This metric determines the position of each bubble on the X-axis of the graph. Place at least one metric in the Y Axis area. This metric determines the position of each bubble on the Y-axis of the graph. Place one metric in the Size By area. This metric determines the size of each bubble. To create a graph using the Grid graph style, place attributes and metrics on the Graph panel as follows: Place at least one attribute in the X Axis area. A column of bubbles will be displayed for each element in this attribute. Place at least one attribute in the Y Axis area. A row of bubbles will be displayed for each element in this attribute. 122 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Graph Style Requirements Example Pie or Ring You can view the contribution of attribute elements or metrics to a total by displaying data in a pie or ring graph. From the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag attributes and metrics onto the Graph panel as follows: Place at least one attribute in the Slice area. Elements of this attribute will be displayed as separate slices in the Pie or Ring graph. Place at least one metric in the Angle area. This metric determines the size of slices in the Pie or Ring graph. A separate Pie or Ring graph is displayed for each metric. Creating and adding a Grid visualization to a dashboard Once you create a dashboard, you can add a Grid visualization to the dashboard to display data in a tabular layout, as shown in the image below. You can quickly interact with data in the grid to optimize your view of the information displayed in the visualization. For example, you can: Sort business attribute elements or metric values in ascending or descending order, or sort data based on multiple conditions. Rearrange the display of business attributes and metrics in the grid. Filter your data to display only selected business attribute elements or metric values. Add and display subtotals in the grid. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 123

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Prerequisites This procedure assumes that you have already created and opened the dashboard to add your visualization to. For steps to create a dashboard, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. If the My Data panel is not displayed in the left, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. To add a Grid visualization to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the Add Visualization icon, then select Grid. A blank visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed with an icon representing the visualization s type. 2 To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag business attributes and metrics onto the Grid panel. As you click and drag each item onto the Grid panel, a green line indicates the location in which the item will be added. The business attribute or metric is added to the area and the indicator line disappears. Add attributes and metrics as follows: To add a business attribute to the rows of the grid, click and drag the business attribute onto the Rows area. To add a business attribute to the columns of the grid, click and drag the business attribute onto the Columns area. To add a metric to the grid, click and drag the metric onto the Metrics area. To change whether the metrics are displayed on the rows or columns of the grid, drag and drop the Metrics Names attribute to either the Rows or Columns area of the Graph panel, as appropriate. 3 To save your dashboard, click Save. You can determine whether to show banding in rows in the grid, merge row and column headers, and so on. For steps, see Formatting a Grid visualization, page 169. Creating and adding a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard A Heat Map visualization is a combination of colored rectangles, each representing a business attribute element. A Heat Map visualization allows you to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at 124 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 one time. Heat maps are often used in the financial services industry to review the status of a portfolio. In a Heat Map visualization: The size of each rectangle represents its relative weight. The color of each rectangle represents its relative value. For example, in the image below, larger values are green and smaller values are red. The large groups of rectangles, such as the Mid-Atlantic group of rectangles in the image below, represent different groups of data. The small individual rectangles, such as the New York rectangle in the image below, represent individual business attribute elements. Prerequisites This procedure assumes that you have already created and opened the dashboard to which you want to add your visualization. For steps to create a dashboard, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. If the My Data panel is not displayed in the left, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. To add a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard 1 To add a new visualization to the dashboard, click the arrow to the right of the Add Visualization icon, then select Heat Map. A blank visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed with an icon representing the visualization's type. 2 To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag business attributes and metrics onto the Heat Map panel. As you click and drag each item onto the Heat Map panel, a green line indicates the 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 125

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide location in which the item will be added. The business attribute or metric is added to the area and the indicator line disappears. Perform the following steps: a b c d e Click and drag at one business attribute onto the Grouping area. The elements of the business attribute are displayed as rectangles in the visualization. You can group individual rectangles into larger rectangles in the visualization. To do so, click and drag the business attribute to use to group the rectangles onto the Grouping area, directly above the attribute you just added above. To have the rectangles sized automatically based on the value of a metric, click and drag the metric onto the Size By area. Rectangles for large metric values are displayed as larger than rectangles for small metric values. To have the rectangles colored automatically based on the value of a metric, click and drag the metric onto the Color By area. To display additional metrics in a tooltip when a user hovers the cursor over a rectangle in the visualization, click and drag the metrics you want to display onto the Tooltip area. 3 To save your dashboard, click Save. You can determine whether you can delete rectangles from the visualization, how to size and position rectangles in the visualization, and so on. For steps, see Formatting a Heat Map visualization, page 170. Creating and adding a Map visualization to a dashboard Once you create a dashboard, you can add a Map visualization to the dashboard to display your data as map markers on an interactive map. You can: Display map markers as static images in the visualization, or display the map markers as bubble markers. If you display map markers as images, you can have the images colored based on the value of a metric. If you choose to display the map markers as bubble markers, the size of each bubble marker is determined based on the value of a metric, with larger bubble markers displayed for larger metric values and smaller bubble markers displayed for smaller metric values. 126 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Choose which information to display in a pop-up Information Window when a user clicks a map marker in the visualization. For general steps to add data to a dashboard, see Adding and removing datasets from detailed, customizable dashboards, page 177. For steps to manually identify an attribute that contains location information, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. Prerequisites This procedure assumes that you have already created the dashboard that you want to add the visualization to. For steps to create a dashboard, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. To display map markers, your dashboard must include an attribute that contains the location in which to display each map marker in the visualization. You can add this attribute to the dashboard in the following ways: While adding attribute and metric data to a dashboard, have Analytics Express identify an attribute as containing location information. For example, you are adding data to the dashboard from a spreadsheet. The spreadsheet contains a column called City, which contains the names of multiple cities. Analytics Express automatically identifies the column as containing city information. Analytics Express automatically identifies attributes that contain zip codes, or the names of countries, states, or cities. While adding attribute and metric data to a dashboard, manually identify an attribute as containing location information. For example, 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 127

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide a column in your database table contains a list of zip codes. You can define the column as an attribute that contains zip code information. When the visualization is displayed, a map marker is displayed on the map for each location listed in the attribute. To create and add a Map visualization to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, click the arrow to the right of the Add Visualization icon, then select Map. A blank visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed with an icon representing the visualization's type. 2 If the Dataset Objects panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. If the Map panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. 3 From the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag the attribute that contains the location of each map marker onto the Geo Attribute area. 4 You can display map markers as static images or as bubble markers. From the Map panel, perform the following steps: To display the map markers as images, perform the following steps: a If the Color By area is not displayed, click the Color By icon. The Size By area becomes the Color By area. b From the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag the metric to use to color the map markers to the Color By area. To display the map markers as bubble markers, perform the following steps: a If the Size By area is not displayed, click the Size By icon. The Color By area becomes the Size By area. b From the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag the metric to use to size the map markers to the Size By area. 5 You can display the map markers in different colors based on the value of the metric. Under Additional Data, click the Thresholds icon. In the Thresholds Editor, choose the colors to use to display the map markers and the range of metric values to apply each color to. For detailed steps, see Formatting a Map visualization, page 172. 128 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 6 By default, when a user clicks a map marker in the visualization, an Information Window containing additional information about the location is displayed. You can include additional attributes or metrics to be displayed in the Information Window. To do so, from the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag the objects you want to display to the Tooltip area. 7 To save your dashboard, click Save. You can determine whether to cluster map markers in a Map visualization. For steps, see Formatting a Map visualization, page 172. Creating and adding a Network visualization to a dashboard Once you create a dashboard, you can add a Network visualization to the dashboard to quickly and easily identify relationships between related items and clusters, such as when visualizing a social network or displaying a market basket dashboard. Business attribute elements are displayed as nodes in the visualization, with lines (called edges) drawn between the nodes to represent relationships between elements. Once the visualization is created, you can view characteristics of the nodes and the relationships between them, using display options such as node size, edge thickness, and edge color. For example, if a node is displayed for each 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 129

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide store in a country, you can display a connection between two nodes using a thicker line if the two stores share a large number of customers. Prerequisites This procedure assumes that you have already created and opened the dashboard to which you want to add your visualization. For steps to create a dashboard, see Creating a dashboard, page 73. If the My Data panel is not displayed in the left, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. To add a Network visualization to a dashboard 1 To add a new visualization to the dashboard, click the arrow to the right of the Add Visualization icon, then select Network. A blank visualization is added to the dashboard and displayed with an icon representing the visualization s type. 2 To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag business attributes and metrics onto the Network panel. As you click and drag each item onto the Network panel, a green line indicates the location 130 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 in which the item will be added. The business attribute or metric is added to the area and the indicator line disappears. Perform the following steps: a b c d e To determine the nodes at which to start displaying edges in the visualization, click and drag a business attribute onto the From Item area. Each element of this attribute will be displayed as a node in the visualization. To determine the nodes at which the edges in the visualization end, click and drag a business attribute onto the To Item area. Each element of this attribute will be displayed as a node in the visualization. To determine the thickness of each edge in the visualization, with edges for larger metric values displayed as thicker than edges for small metric values, click and drag a metric onto the Edge Size area. To color edges in the visualization based on the value of a metric, click and drag the metric onto the Edge Color area. To determine the size of each node, with nodes for larger metric values displayed as larger than nodes for small metric values, click and drag a metric onto the Node Size area. 3 To save your dashboard, click Save. You can format the display of the visualization, such as the size of the font used to show labels for nodes in the visualization, or the color in which to display edges that represent low metric values. For steps, see Formatting a Network visualization, page 174. Adding, replacing, and removing data from visualizations Once you have created and added a visualization to a dashboard, you can add, replace, or remove data from the visualization. If you have added more than one dataset to your dashboard, a visualization can include data from multiple datasets at the same time. Prerequisite The following procedure assumes that you have already created the visualization to add data to. For steps, see the appropriate link below: Creating a blank visualization, page 105 Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 131

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and adding a Grid visualization to a dashboard, page 123 Creating and adding a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard, page 124 Creating and adding a Network visualization to a dashboard, page 129 To add, replace, and remove data from a visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization that you want to modify. 2 If the My Data panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. If the visualization's Drop Zones panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. The name of the Drop Zones panel for a visualization may vary depending on the type of visualization you are modifying. For example, the Drop Zones panel appears as the Grid panel when modifying a Grid visualization, and appears as the Network panel when modifying a Network visualization. 3 If your dashboard contains multiple datasets, from the drop-down list in the My Data panel, select the dataset that contains the data to add to the visualization. The My Data panel is updated to display attributes and metrics from the dataset you selected. 4 Add, replace, and remove data from the visualization by doing one of the following: To add data to the visualization, click and drag an attribute or metric from the My Data panel onto the appropriate area in the visualization's Drop Zones panel, so that a green indicator line is displayed in the location in which you want to place the attribute or metric. The attribute or metric is added to the visualization and displayed. To replace the data displayed in a visualization, click and drag an attribute or metric from the My Data panel onto the report object on the visualization's Drop Zones panel that you want to replace, so that a blue arrow icon is displayed next to the cursor. The data is replaced in the visualization and displayed. To remove data from the visualization, in the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the report object that you want to remove, then click X. The report object is removed from the visualization. 132 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 5 Repeat the appropriate steps above to add, replace, and remove data from the visualization as desired. Modifying, duplicating, and deleting visualizations This section describes common tasks to manage the visualizations in a dashboard, such as changing the visualization's display type or creating copies of an existing visualization, and steps to perform them. To change a visualization's display type 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the visualization, then click the arrow icon on the top right. 2 A list of options is displayed. Select Change Visualization. 3 Click the icon of the visualization to use to display your data. A green icon is displayed next to the visualization Analytics Express recommends based on the data in your dashboard. 4 If the visualization you selected above allows you to choose between different visualization subtypes to use to display your data, a row of additional icons is displayed, representing each of the available subtypes. For example, if you want to represent your data as a bar graph, you can choose to display it as a vertical bar graph or a horizontal bar graph. Click the icon for the subtype to use to display your data. To create a copy of a visualization on the currently displayed panel 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the visualization to copy, then click the arrow icon on the right. Select Duplicate. The new visualization is added to the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 133

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To copy a visualization to a specific panel or layout 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the visualization to copy, then click the arrow icon on the right. Point to Copy To, then do one of the following: To copy the visualization to an existing panel, select the panel to copy the visualization to. To create a new panel and copy the visualization to it, select New Panel. To copy the visualization to an existing layout, select the layout to copy the visualization to. If the layout includes multiple panels, select the name of the panel to add the visualization to. To create a new layout and copy the visualization to it, select New Layout. A message is displayed notifying you that the filters in the currently displayed layout will not be copied to the new layout along with the visualization. Click OK. The new visualization is added to the dashboard. To duplicate a visualization 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the visualization you want to copy, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to Copy To, then select the panel to which you want to copy the visualization. The new visualization is automatically copied and added to the dashboard. To move a visualization 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the visualization you want to move, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to Move To, then select one of the following: To move the visualization to an existing panel, select the panel to move the visualization to. To create a new panel to move the visualization to, select New Panel. 134 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 3 The new visualization is automatically moved to its new location. To delete a visualization from a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the tab of the visualization you want to delete, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Select Delete. A message is displayed, asking if you want to delete the visualization. 3 Click OK. The visualization is removed from the dashboard. Creating and adding new metrics to a dashboard You can create new metrics using data from business attributes and metrics already included in a dashboard. For example, you can create a new metric by subtracting the values of one metric from the values of another metric, such as Revenue Forecast - Revenue. You can create a new metric that ranks another metric's values from least to greatest, or displays the values of another metric as percentages of an accumulated total. When you create a new metrics based on existing metrics in a dashboard, the new metric performs a calculation on-the-fly with the data available on the dashboard. For steps to create, modify, or delete metrics in a dashboard, see the appropriate link below: You can take advantage of shortcuts in Analytics Express to quickly and easily add simple metrics to a dashboard. For steps, see Adding metrics to a dashboard on-the-fly, page 136. Analytics Express provides a wide variety of functions to use to create metrics. For example, you can create a new metric that calculates the absolute value of another metric. For steps, see Creating a metric in a dashboard based on a function, page 140. You can create complex metrics from scratch by manually typing metric formulas. For steps, see Creating a new metric in a dashboard from scratch, page 141. You can modify or delete the metrics that you have created. For steps, see Editing or deleting metrics in a dashboard, page 142. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 135

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Adding metrics to a dashboard on-the-fly You can quickly and easily add simple metrics to a dashboard on-the-fly. For example, you can create a metric by adding two metrics together, or by ranking the values of an existing metric. Steps are below to create each type of metric in a dashboard: To create a new metric based on an arithmetic calculation, page 136 To create a new metric by changing how the values of an existing metric are aggregated, page 137 To create a metric to calculate a running total or a moving total, page 137 To create a metric to calculate percentages of a cumulative total, page 138 To create a new metric by ranking the values of another metric, page 138 To create a new metric by combining the values of two or more metrics, page 139 To create a new metric based on an attribute, page 140 Prerequisite If the Drop Zones panel for the visualization is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. The name of the Drop Zones panel for a visualization may vary depending on the type of visualization you are modifying. For example, the Drop Zones panel appears as the Grid panel when you are making changes to a Grid visualization, and appears as the Network panel when you are making changes to a Network visualization. To create a new metric based on an arithmetic calculation 1 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric you want to use to create the metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to Calculation. 136 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 3 From the first drop-down list, select the first metric to include in the calculation. 4 Select the arithmetic operator you want to use to combine the metrics. 5 From the next drop-down list, select the second metric to use in the calculation or type a number in the field. 6 Click OK. To create a new metric by changing how the values of an existing metric are aggregated 1 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric you want to use to create your new metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to Aggregation, then select the function to use to calculate values in your new metric, such as Sum or Average. Your metric is created and added to the visualization. To create a metric to calculate a running total or a moving total 1 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric you want to use to create your new metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to New Metric, then select one of the following: To create a new metric to calculate a running total, select Running Totals. Select the function to use to calculate the running total. For example, to calculate a running sum, select Sum. To calculate a moving total, select Moving Totals. Select the function you want to use to calculate the moving total. For example, to calculate a moving sum, select Sum. In the Window Size field, type the window size to use to calculate the moving total. 3 Click OK. Your metric is created and added to the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 137

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To create a metric to calculate percentages of a cumulative total 1 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric you want to use to create your new metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to Percent to Total. Select one of the following: The options available can vary depending on whether attributes have been added to the visualization, and the location in which attributes have been added. For example, if the Year attribute is added to the Rows area of a Grid visualization, you can select Over Rows to display the metric values as percentages of the accumulated row total. If the Category and Month attributes are added to the visualization, you can choose to create the percent-to-total metric based on Category or Month. To display the metric values as percentages of an accumulated row total, select Over Rows. To display the metric values as percentages of a grand total, select Grand Total. To display the metric values as percentages of a cumulative total for each element of an attribute, select the name of the attribute. Your metric is created and added to the dashboard. To create a new metric by ranking the values of another metric 1 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric whose values you want to rank, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to New Rank Metric, then select one of the following: To display the metric values by rank in ascending order, select Ascending. To display the metric values by rank in descending order, select Descending. 3 You can choose to break the rankings by a specific attribute. For example, a Grid visualization displays revenue data for each Call Center in a 138 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Region. If you choose to break the data by Region, each Call Center will be ranked based on its regional revenue standing. If you choose to break the data by Country, each Call Center will be rank based on its revenue standing within its country. Under Break By, select the check box next to each attribute you want to use to break the ranking data. 4 Click OK. To create a new metric by combining the values of two or more metrics 1 Press CTRL and click the name of each metric you want to combine. Hover the cursor over the name of the last metric you selected, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to New Metric, then select the function you want to use to combine the metrics, as follows: To add the metrics together, select Add. To calculate the average of the selected metrics, select Average. To calculate the maximum across each of the selected metrics, select Greatest. To calculate the minimum across each of the selected metrics, select Least. To calculate the product of the selected metrics, select Multiply. To divide the first metric you selected by the second, select Metric1/ Metric2. To divide the second metric you selected by the first, select Metric2/ Metric1. To subtract the second metric you selected from the first, select Metric1-Metric2. To subtract the first metric you selected from the second, select Metric2-Metric1. To calculate the difference between the metrics as a percentage of the second metric you selected, select (Metric1-Metric2)/Metric2. To calculate the difference between the metrics as a percentage of the first metric you selected, select (Metric2-Metric1)/Metric1. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 139

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide The metric is created and added to the dashboard. To create a new metric based on an attribute 1 Hover the cursor over the name of the attribute to use to create the metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to New Metric, then select the type of calculation you want to perform on each element in the attribute, such as Count or Maximum. The metric is created and added to the dashboard. Creating a metric in a dashboard based on a function You can quickly create a new metric based on a function, such as the absolute value and sine functions. To do this, you must specify the function you want to create the metric based on, then provide the required arguments for the function from data in the dashboard. To create a metric based on a function 1 In a dashboard, if the Drop Zones panel for the visualization is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. The name of the Drop Zones panel for a visualization may vary depending on the type of visualization you are modifying. For example, the Drop Zones panel appears as the Grid panel when you are making changes to a Grid visualization, and appears as the Network panel when you are making changes to a Network visualization. 2 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of a metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 3 Point to New Metric, then select More Functions. 4 A list of functions is displayed in the bottom pane. From the pane, select the function you want to use to create the metric. To display only functions from a specific category in the pane, select the category from the Select a Category drop-down list. You can search for a function by typing a function name in the Select a Function field. You can click 140 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Details to see a description of the function, examples, and syntax information. 5 Click Next. A list of arguments, which provide the inputs to functions, is displayed. 6 Select the required arguments for each function. You can hover the cursor over the name of each argument to display a tooltip showing what type of argument is required. 7 Type a name for the metric in the Metric Name field, then click Finish. The new metric is added to the dashboard. Creating a new metric in a dashboard from scratch You can create complex metrics from scratch by manually typing a formula for the new metric. For example, you can create a new metric by subtracting the values of one metric from the values of another metric, such as Revenue Forecast - Revenue. You can assign a number to each value of a metric, to rank its value from least to greatest, or display metric values as percentages of an accumulated total. To create a metric from scratch 1 In a dashboard, if the Drop Zones panel for the visualization is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. The name of the Drop Zones panel for a visualization may vary depending on the type of visualization you are modifying. For example, the Drop Zones panel appears as the Grid panel when you are making changes to a Grid visualization, and appears as the Network panel when you are making changes to a Network visualization. 2 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of a metric. A list of options is displayed. 3 Point to New Metric, then select Enter Formula. 4 Type a name for the metric in the Metric Name field. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 141

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 5 Type the metric formula in the Formula field. You can add attributes, metrics, and functions to the formula by selecting from the following: To add an attribute or metric to the formula, from the Available Objects list, double-click the name of the attribute or metric. The attribute or metric is automatically added to the Formula field. To add a function to the formula, click the Function icon. Perform the following steps: a b c A list of available functions is displayed in the bottom pane. From the pane, select the function you want to use to create the metric. To display only functions from a specific category in the pane, select the category from the Select a Category drop-down list. You can search for a function by typing a function name in the Select a Function field and clicking the Search icon. You can click Details to see a description of the function, examples, and syntax information. Click Next. A list of arguments, which provide the inputs to functions, is displayed. Select the required arguments for each function. You can hover the cursor over the name of each argument to display a tooltip showing what type of argument is required. Click Finish to apply your changes.the function is automatically added to the Formula field. 6 Click OK. The new metric is added to the dashboard. Editing or deleting metrics in a dashboard Once you have created and added new metrics to a dashboard, you can quickly edit the definition of a metric, or delete metrics from the dashboard. To edit a metric in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, if the My Data panel for the visualization is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. 2 In the My Data panel, hover the cursor over the metric, then click the arrow icon. A list of options is displayed. 3 Select Edit. The New Metric Editor opens. 142 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 4 Select the appropriate options to define the metric, then click OK. For detailed steps, see Creating a new metric in a dashboard from scratch, page 141. To delete a metric from a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, if the My Data panel for the visualization is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. 2 In the My Data panel, hover the cursor over the metric, then click the arrow icon. A list of options is displayed. 3 Select Delete. The metric is removed from the dashboard. Layering and organizing data in dashboards You can create dashboards with multiple layers of organization to view data in more intuitive and useful ways, as follows: Layout tabs: You can create a book of data in a dashboard using layouts, with each layout displayed on a separate page in the dashboard. You can switch between layouts by clicking the tab of the layout that you want to display. For steps, see Adding, rearranging, renaming, and deleting layouts in a dashboard, page 143. Panels: You can use panels to create stacks of analytic layers on a single dashboard page. You can switch between the panels in a layout to examine your data using different layers. Each layout tab in a dashboard can contain multiple panels. For steps, see Adding, modifying, duplicating, and deleting panels from a dashboard, page 145. Adding, rearranging, renaming, and deleting layouts in a dashboard You can create a book of data in a dashboard using layouts. You can quickly switch between each layout in a dashboard by clicking the different layout tabs, much like turning the pages in a book. If users filter or group data on a layout tab in the dashboard, the data will be filtered or grouped across all panels on the layout tab. Users can edit the contents of each layout separately, without affecting the contents on other 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 143

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide layouts in the dashboard. For steps to allow users to filter data, see Letting users filter data in dashboards, page 147. For steps to group data, see Grouping data in a dashboard, page 21. Separate steps are below to add, rearrange, rename, or delete layouts in a dashboard. To add a layout to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, do one of the following: To add a new blank layout, click the Add Layout icon in the top right. A new empty layout is added to the dashboard. Add text, visualizations, and other elements to the layout as desired. For steps, see Creating a dashboard. To duplicate an existing layout and have the new layout contain existing visualizations, text fields, and formatting, hover the cursor over the layout's tab, then click the arrow icon on the right. Select Duplicate. The layout is duplicated and added to the dashboard as a new layout. To rearrange the display order of layouts in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, do one of the following: To quickly rearrange a layout tab, click and drag the tab of the layout to its new location in the list of tabs. To move a layout one tab to the left in the list of tabs, hover over the name of the layout's tab, click the arrow icon in the top right, and select Move Left. To move a layout one tab to the right in the list of tabs, hover over the name of the layout's tab, click the arrow icon in the top right, and select Move Right. To rename a layout in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the layout's tab, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 144 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 2 Select Rename, then type a new name for the tab in the field. 3 Press ENTER. The layout is renamed. To delete a layout in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover over the name of the layout's tab, then click the arrow icon in the top right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Select Delete. A confirmation message is displayed. Click OK to remove the layout from the dashboard. Adding, modifying, duplicating, and deleting panels from a dashboard You can use panels to create stacks of analytic layers on a single dashboard page. Panels summarize key business indicators in easy-to-read interfaces and are essential building blocks for interactive dashboards. Once you add panels to a dashboard, users can switch between panels to view the different layers of data. If users filter or group data on a layout tab in the dashboard, the data will be filtered or grouped across all panels on the layout tab. For steps to allow users to filter data, see Letting users filter data in dashboards, page 147. For steps to group data, see Grouping data in a dashboard, page 21. Separate steps are below to add, rename, rearrange, duplicate, or delete panels in a dashboard. To add a panel to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the Tools menu, select Add Panel. A new, empty panel is added to the dashboard. 2 Add text, visualizations, and other elements to the panel as desired. For steps, see Adding text and data to a dashboard, page 95. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 145

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To rename a panel in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the name of the panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right. A list of options is displayed. Select Rename. 2 Type a name for the panel in the field, then press ENTER. To rearrange panels in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the name of the panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right. A list of options is displayed. Select one of the following: To move the panel one spot to the left in the list of panels, select Move Left. To move the panel one spot to the right in the list of panels, select Move Right. To duplicate a panel in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the name of the panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Select Duplicate. The new panel is added to the dashboard. To delete a panel from a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the name of the panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Select Delete. A confirmation message is displayed. Click OK to remove the panel from the dashboard. 146 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Letting users filter data in dashboards Users can filter the data displayed in a dashboard by selecting options in the Filters panel. For example, a dashboard displays sales data for several different product categories, from 2007 to 2010. A user can filter the data in the dashboard to only display sales data for books and movies in 2010. You can determine whether selections in one filter affect selections in another filter, or whether the dashboard display is automatically updated when an item is selected in the Filters panel. For steps, see the appropriate link below: Adding and removing filters in a dashboard, page 147 Determining whether to automatically apply filtering selections, page 151 Determining whether to allow filters to restrict other filters, page 152 Using a visualization as a filter to update the data displayed in another visualization, page 153 Adding and removing filters in a dashboard You can allow users to filter the data displayed in a dashboard by selecting options in the Filters panel. For example, a dashboard displays sales data for several different product categories, from 2007 to 2010. If you add attribute filters to the dashboard for the Product Category and Year business attributes, users can filter the data in the dashboard to only display sales data for books and movies in 2010. If you add a metric filter to the dashboard for the Sales metric, users can choose to display only those product categories whose sales numbers exceed $1 million. Separate steps are below to add each type of filter. Allowing users to filter data based on attributes, page 148 Allowing users to filter data based on metrics, page 148 Allowing users to filter data for the top n attribute elements, page 150 Removing filters from a dashboard, page 151 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 147

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Allowing users to filter data based on attributes To add an attribute filter to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, if the My Data panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. If the Filters panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 From the My Data panel, click the attribute you want to use to filter data, and drag it onto the Filters panel. You can select and add more than one attribute to the Filters panel at a time. Press CTRL and click each attribute that you want to select. 3 Hover the cursor over the name of the filter that you just added, then click the arrow icon. A list of options is displayed. 4 Point to Display Style, then select the style you want to use to display the filter. 5 You can choose to include or exclude data for items selected in the filter. Do one of the following: To display data in the dashboard only for selected items, select Include. To display data in the dashboard for all items except the items selected in the filter, select Exclude. Allowing users to filter data based on metrics To add a metric filter to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, if the My Data panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. the Filters panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 From the My Data panel, click the metric you want to use to filter data, and drag it onto the Filters panel. 3 Hover the cursor over the name of the filter that you just added, then click the arrow icon. Point to Display Style and select one of the following: 148 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To filter data by defining a condition that the data must meet, select Qualification. To filter data by choosing values on a slider, select Slider. 4 Hover the cursor over the name of the filter that you just added, then click the arrow icon and select one of the following: To filter on the metric's values, select Qualify on Value. For example, you can display data only for stores with profit data greater than or equal to $1,000,000. To rank metric values and display only the n highest values, select Rank Highest. For example, you can display data for the ten employees with the longest tenure in years. To rank metric values and display only the n lowest values, select Rank Lowest. For example, you can display data for the ten stores with the lowest costs. To filter for the top n% of metric values, select Rank % Highest. For example, if eight items are displayed in a visualization, Rank % Highest = 25 displays the top two items. To filter for the bottom n% of metric values, select Rank % Lowest. For example, if eight items are displayed in a visualization, Rank % Lowest = 25 displays the bottom two items. 5 Do one of the following: To filter data by defining a condition that the data must meet, perform the following steps: a b c Click Greater than or equal to. From the drop-down list, select the operator you want to use to compare data, such as Less Than or Equals. For example, to display data values that are less than 50,000, select Less Than. In the field, type the value you want to use to filter data. For example, to display data values that are less than 50,000, type 50000. Press ENTER. The qualification is automatically created and displayed. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 149

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To filter data by choosing values on a slider, perform the following steps: a b Click and drag the endpoints of the slider to cover the range of values for which you want to filter data. You can choose to include or exclude data using the values selected in the slider. Hover the cursor over the metric name and click the arrow icon, then do one of the following: To display data in the dashboard only for metric values selected in the slider, select Include. To display data in the dashboard for all metric values except the values selected in the slider, select Exclude. Allowing users to filter data for the top n attribute elements Once you have added an attribute filter, you can create a new filter that contains the top n elements in the attribute, ranked by a specific metric. For example, if your dashboard contains an attribute filter based on the Product Category business attribute, you can allow users to filter data based on the top 3 product categories, ranked by sales numbers. To add a Top N qualification filter to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, if the Filters panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 From the Filters panel, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute filter, then click the arrow icon. A list of options is displayed. Point to Top N. 3 From the first drop-down list, select one of the following. To create a qualification filter to display data for the top n attribute elements, select Highest. To have your new filter display data for the bottom n attribute elements, select Lowest. 4 In the field, type the number of elements you want to include in the new filter. 150 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 5 From the Ranked By drop-down list, select the metric to use to rank each element. 6 Click OK. Your filter is added to the Filters panel. Removing filters from a dashboard To remove a filter from a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, If the Filters panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 Hover the cursor over the Filters panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right of the panel. A list of options is displayed. 3 Select Remove Filter. A message is displayed, asking whether you want to clear the selections in the filter in addition to removing the filter. Select one of the following: To clear the selections and remove the filter, click OK. To return to the dashboard without removing the filter, click Cancel. Determining whether to automatically apply filtering selections You can choose to automatically filter data when a user makes selections in a filter, or to filter data only when the user clicks Apply in the Filters panel. To determine whether to automatically apply selections made in the Filters panel 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the Filters panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right of the panel. A list of options is displayed. 2 Do one of the following: To automatically filter data when an item is selected in a filter, select Auto-Apply Changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 151

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To filter data only when the user clicks Apply in the Filters panel, clear Auto-Apply Changes. Determining whether to allow filters to restrict other filters You can determine whether making selections in one filter affects the choices displayed for any other filter. For example, you create a dashboard, then add the Category and Subcategory filters to the dashboard. You can enable selections in the Category filter to affect which product subcategories are displayed under Subcategory. If a user selects Books in the Category filter, the items in the Subcategory filter are restricted, and only product subcategories within Books are displayed. The following steps apply only to filtering on attributes. Selecting an item in a metric filter does not affect the items displayed in any other filter. Prerequisite You must have added at least two attribute filters to the Filters panel. For steps, see Allowing users to filter data based on attributes, page 148. To determine whether selections in one filter affect items in any other filter 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the Filters panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right of the panel. A list of options is displayed. 2 Point to Filtering, then select one of the following: No Filtering: Elements selected in one filter do not change the items available in any other filter. Filter All Below: Making a selection in one filter restricts the items available in all the filters below it in the Filters panel (or to its right, if the Filters panel is displayed at the bottom of the dashboard). This includes filters that are hidden. You can click and drag a filter to place it above or below the filters already displayed in the panel. Filter All: Selecting an element in one filter restricts the elements available in every other filter. 152 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Using a visualization as a filter to update the data displayed in another visualization Once you have added visualizations to a dashboard, you can enable users to filter or select elements in one visualization (the source) to automatically update the data displayed in another visualization (the target) on the same panel. Users can: Filter or drill on data in the source to update the data displayed in one or more targets. For example, the source visualization contains a list of product categories. When a user filters data in the source to include only data for the Movies category, the data in the target is automatically updated to display only data for Movies. Similarly, if the user drills to Subcategory in the source, the target is updated to display data at the Subcategory level. For steps to filter or drill on data in a visualization, see the appropriate link below: Analyzing data in a Graph visualization, page 23 Analyzing data in a Grid visualization, page 31 Analyzing data in a Heat Map visualization, page 34 Analyzing data in a Map visualization, page 36 Analyzing data in a Network visualization, page 39 Select elements in the source to restrict the data displayed in one or more targets. For example, if the target displays revenue data across several years and a user selects 2012 in the source, the data in the target is automatically updated to display only revenue data for 2012. Highlight the data displayed in one or more targets by selecting elements in the source. For example, if the target is a Heat Map visualization displaying delayed flights for several airports and a user selects BWI in the source, the rectangles for BWI are highlighted in the Heat Map. You can highlight the data displayed in the following types of visualizations: Graph, other than dual-axis and combination graphs Grid Heat Map Network 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 153

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Prerequisite Both the source and target visualizations must be added to the same panel in the dashboard. To enable or disable a visualization to update the data displayed in another visualization 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the visualization to use as the source, then click the arrow icon in the top right. Select Use as Filter. 2 Under Apply filtering on VisualizationName to the following targets, select the check box next to each visualization to use as a target. 3 Once you have selected at least one target visualization, you can allow users to either filter or highlight data in the target by selecting elements in the source visualization. Do one of the following: To enable users to filter the data in the target by selecting elements in the source, select the Enable filtering on selection check box. To enable users to highlight the data in the target by selecting elements in the source, clear the Enable filtering on selection check box. 4 If a drop-down list is displayed next to the Enable filtering on selection option, the visualization already allows users to update data in the target by filtering or drilling on a single, specific attribute in the source. Select one of the following: To continue allowing users to update data in the target by filtering or drilling based on the attribute, select For Attribute AttributeName, where AttributeName is the name of the attribute. To allow users to update data in the target by filtering or drilling on any data in the source, select For All Data. 5 If you enable users to filter the data in the target by selecting elements in the source, you can enable users to clear their selection in the source visualization and removing their filtering or highlighting. For example, if the source is a Grid visualization that allows users to select from elements of Year to filter data in the target, the user can click the Year header to 154 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 display data for all years at the same time in the target. Do one of the following: To allow users to clear their selections in the source, select the Allow users to clear all selections check box. To disable clearing selections, clear the Allow users to clear all selections check box. 6 Click OK to apply your changes. Formatting and working with dashboards Once you have created a dashboard, you can determine how filters are displayed, or arrange, size, and maximize the display of visualizations in the dashboard, and so on. Separate steps are provided below to perform each of these tasks. Prerequisite You must have at least two visualizations or one visualization and one text field in a dashboard before you can rearrange visualizations in the dashboard. For steps to add visualizations or text fields to a dashboard, see Adding text and data to a dashboard, page 95. To rearrange visualizations in the dashboard 1 In a dashboard, if the visualization's title bar is not displayed, hover the cursor over the visualization and click the arrow icon in the top right, then select Show Title Bar. 2 Hover the cursor over the visualization s title bar. The cursor becomes directional arrows. 3 Click the visualization's title bar and drag the visualization, so that a blue indicator line shows in the location to which the visualization will be moved. The indicator line disappears and the visualization is moved to its new location in the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 155

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To size a text field or visualization in the dashboard 1 In a dashboard, hover the cursor over the edges of the text field or visualization. The cursor becomes horizontal or vertical arrows. 2 Click and drag the edges of the text field or visualization to size it. The text field or visualization is automatically sized, and the other items displayed in the dashboard are resized to fit in the remaining space. To maximize or restore a visualization 1 In a dashboard, if the visualization's title bar is not displayed, hover the cursor over the visualization and click the arrow icon in the top right, then select Show Title Bar. 2 Hover the cursor over the visualization, then do one of the following: To maximize the display of the visualization, from the visualization s title bar, click the Maximize icon. To restore the visualization to its default size, from the visualization s title bar, click the Restore icon. To expand or collapse the display of all filters 1 In a dashboard, if the Filters panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 Hover the cursor over the Filters panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right of the panel. A list of options is displayed. Do one of the following: To expand and display all filters in the Filters panel, select Expand All. To collapse all filters in the Filters panel, displaying only their headers, select Collapse All. 156 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To move the Filters panel to the bottom or left side of the dashboard 1 In a dashboard, if the Filters panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Filters. 2 Hover the cursor over the Filters panel, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right of the panel. A list of options is displayed. 3 Point to Display, then select one of the following: To move the Filters panel to the left side of the dashboard, select Left. The Filters panel is moved to the left side of the dashboard, with the filters displayed in a vertical list layout. To move the Filters panel to the right side of the dashboard, select Right. The Filters panel is moved to right left side of the dashboard, with the filters displayed in a vertical list layout. To move the Filters panel to the bottom of the dashboard, select Bottom. The Filters panel is moved to the bottom of the dashboard, with the filters displayed next to each other in a horizontal layout. To move the Filters panel to the top of the dashboard, select Top. The Filters panel is moved to the top of the dashboard, with the filters displayed next to each other in a horizontal layout. Formatting visualizations Once you have added a visualization to a dashboard, you can format the visualization by choosing whether to display its title bar, the format in which to display numeric values in the visualization, rename a business attribute or metric, and so on. You can select general formatting options for a visualization, as follows: Displaying a title bar for a visualization allows you to provide a descriptive title for the visualization, as well as click and drag a visualization's title bar to rearrange the visualizations displayed in a dashboard. For steps, see To show or hide the title bar for a visualization, page 158. You can rename a business attribute or metric in a visualization. For steps, see To rename an attribute or metric in a visualization, page 158. You can apply formatting to numeric values in a visualization. For example, you can choose to display 1,000 as a currency value, such as 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 157

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide $1,000.00, or in scientific format, as 1E03. For steps, see To format numeric values in a visualization, page 159. For steps to perform additional formatting for a specific type of visualization, see the appropriate link below: Formatting a Graph visualization, page 161 Formatting a Grid visualization, page 169 Formatting a Heat Map visualization, page 170 Formatting a Map visualization, page 172 Formatting a Network visualization, page 174 To show or hide the title bar for a visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization you want to format. 2 Hover the cursor over the visualization, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right. A list of options is displayed. Do one of the following: To show the title bar, select Show Title Bar. To hide the title bar, select Hide Title Bar. To rename an attribute or metric in a visualization 1 In a dashboard, in the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute or metric that you want to rename, then click the arrow icon displayed in the top right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Select Rename. A field displaying the name of the attribute or metric is displayed. 3 Type a new name for the attribute or metric in the field, then press ENTER. The attribute or metric is renamed. 158 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To format numeric values in a visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization you want to format. 2 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the attribute or metric whose values you want to format, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. Point to Number Format. 3 From the first drop-down list, select the type of number formatting you want to use to display numeric values, as follows: To display numbers without any special formatting, select General. To display numbers with a fixed number of decimal places, select Fixed, then perform the following steps: a b From the Type drop-down list, select the format to use to display each value. You can choose whether to display numbers with a separator symbol every three digits. To display the separator, click the Use 1000 Separator icon to highlight it. Numbers are displayed with a separator symbol every three digits (for example 1,000,000). To display numbers without the separator symbol (for example, 1000000), click the button again to remove the highlight. c You can add additional decimal places to the displayed numbers, or decrease the number of decimal places shown. Do one of the following: To add decimal places, click the Increase Decimal Places icon. To decrease the number of decimal places, click the Decrease Decimal Places icon. To display numbers formatted as currency, select Currency, then perform the following steps: a In the Currency Symbol field, type the currency symbol you want to use to display the numeric values. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 159

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide b c d From the Currency Position drop-down list, select the position in which to display the currency symbol. From the Type drop-down list, select the format you want to display the currency values in. You can add additional decimal places to the displayed numbers, or decrease the number of decimal places shown. Do one of the following: To add decimal places, click the Increase Decimal Places icon. To decrease the number of decimal places, click the Decrease Decimal Places icon. To display numbers formatted as dates, select Date. From the Type drop-down list, select the format to use to display the dates. To display numbers formatted as time values, select Time. From the Type drop-down list, select the format to use to display each time value. To display numbers as percentages, select Percentage, then perform the following steps: a b From the Type drop-down list, select the format to use to display the percentages. You can add additional decimal places to the displayed numbers, or decrease the number of decimal places shown. Do one of the following: To add decimal places, click the Increase Decimal Places icon. To decrease the number of decimal places, click the Decrease Decimal Places icon. To display numbers as fractions, select Fraction. From the Type drop-down list, select the format to use to display the fractions. To display numbers in scientific format, select Scientific. You can add additional decimal places to the displayed numbers, or decrease the number of decimal places shown. Do one of the following: To add decimal places, click the Increase Decimal Places icon. To decrease the number of decimal places, click the Decrease Decimal Places icon. 160 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To display numbers in a custom number format, select Custom. In the field, type the format you want to use to display numbers, along with the symbols you want to use to display them. The pound symbol (#) represents the numeric value. For example, to display a number with two decimal places, such as 12.34, type #.##. A preview of the numeric value is displayed as you type. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. To remove all thresholds defined using a metric Prerequisite The following procedure assumes that you have already created a threshold for at least one metric in the visualization. If the visualization's Drop Zones panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. The name of the Drop Zones panel for a visualization may vary depending on the type of visualization you are modifying. For example, the Drop Zones panel appears as the Grid panel when modifying a Grid visualization, and appears as the Network panel when modifying a Network visualization. 1 Click the visualization to remove the threshold from. From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric you want to remove thresholds from, then click the arrow icon on the right. A list of options is displayed. 2 Select Clear Thresholds. All thresholds defined for the metric are removed, and no longer affect the display of data in the visualization. Formatting a Graph visualization You can format a Graph visualization to determine the shape used to display graph items, whether to have Analytics Express optimize space in the visualization by automatically sizing graph items, and so on. The options available vary depending on the type of Graph visualization you have created, as described below: For dual-axis and combination graphs, you can choose to display data in the visualization using a specific graph style, or determine the number of 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 161

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide items to display on the categories of the graph. For steps, see To format a dual-axis or combination graph, page 162. For other types of graphs, including bar, area, and line graphs, you can perform the following tasks: You can determine the shape used to display graph items, whether to have Analytics Express optimize space in the visualization by automatically sizing graph items, and so on. For steps, see To select formatting options for a Graph visualization, page 162. You can determine whether axis scale values are displayed on the X-axis and Y-axis using space-saving abbreviations. For example, you can have the value 1,000,000 displayed as 1M. For large currency values, such as those above 10,000, the currency symbol is not included as part of the abbreviation. For example, the value $500,000.00 is displayed as 500K. For steps, see To determine whether metric labels in the visualization are abbreviated, page 168. You can format how the graph legend is displayed. For steps, see To format the legend in a Graph visualization, page 168. Prerequisite The procedures below assume that you have already created the visualization that you want to format. For steps, see Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106. To format a dual-axis or combination graph 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization to format. 2 If the Properties panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Properties. 3 From the Subtype drop-down list, select the subtype of graph to display. 4 Type the maximum number of category values to display in the graph in the Maximum Categories field. To select formatting options for a Graph visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization to format. 162 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 2 If the Properties panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Properties. 3 To size the visualization, from the Fit To drop-down list, select one of the following: To size the visualization so that all graph items are displayed, select Content. To size the visualization to take up all available screen space, select Window (default). 4 You can specify how Analytics Express determines the minimum and maximum values to display on the axes of each graph in the visualization. From the Axis Scale drop-down list, select one of the following: To display each graph on axes with the same minimum and maximum values, select Global (default). To display each graph using the same minimum and maximum Y-axis values across each column of graphs, and the same X-axis values across each row of graphs, select Per row/column. To allow Analytics Express to display each graph using the axis values best suited to display the data contained in the graph, select Per Cell. To specify custom axis formatting options, such as selecting different minimum and maximum axis values for specific metrics in the visualization, select Custom. The Axis Scale dialog box opens. Perform the following steps: The options available vary based on your selections and the number and placement of metrics displayed on the X-axis and Y-axis of your visualization. a From the Scale For drop-down list, select the metrics that you want to specify axis formatting options for, as follows: To select formatting options for all metrics in the visualization, select All Metrics. To select formatting options for all metrics on the X-axis, select X Axis Metrics. To select formatting options for all metrics on the Y-axis, select Y Axis Metrics. To select formatting options for a specific metric, select the name of the metric. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 163

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide b To determine how to display the axes for the metrics selected in the Scale For drop-down list above, from the Set To drop-down list, select one of the following: To display each of the selected metrics on axes with the same minimum and maximum values, select Global (default). To display the selected metrics using the same minimum and maximum Y-axis values across each column of graphs, and the same X-axis values across each row of graphs, select Per row/ column. To allow Analytics Express to display the selected metrics using the axis values best suited to display the metric data, select Per Cell. To define specific minimum and maximum values to use to display the selected metrics, select Custom. In the Min and Max fields, type the minimum and maximum axis values. For example, if you selected Profit in the Scale For drop-down list, and you want to display the Profit metric on an axis that includes values from 0 to 5 million, type 0 in the Min field and 5000000 in the Max field. c d Repeat the appropriate steps above to define axis formatting options for additional metrics, as desired. Click OK to apply your changes. 5 From the Shape drop-down list, select the shape to use to display graph items in the visualization. 6 You can determine how to display a graph when there is enough data to display the graph using more than one graph subtype. For example, a bar graph contains one attribute in the X Axis area of the Graph panel, and one metric in the Y Axis area. By default, if you add an attribute to the Break By area, a stacked bar graph is displayed. You can choose to display the graph as clustered instead. From the Subtype drop-down list, select one of the following: The options available vary depending on the type of graph displayed in the visualization. To allow Analytics Express to determine which type of graph to display, select Automatic. To display the elements as absolute, select Absolute. 164 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To display the elements as clustered, select Clustered. To display the elements as stacked bars, select Stacked. To display the elements in a stacked percent graph, select 100% Stacked. 7 You can show or hide data labels for graph items in the visualization. For example, if your visualization contains a vertical bar graph, with the number of delayed flights displayed as a separate bar for each airline, you can display the number of delayed flights for each airline over the corresponding bar in the visualization. From the Data Labels drop-down list, select one of the following: To show data labels using the metric values associated with each graph item, select Show values. In the example above, the number of delayed flights would be displayed over each bar in the visualization. To show data labels using the attribute values associated with each graph item, select Show text. In the example above, the name of the airline would be displayed over each bar in the visualization. This option is only available if you have added an attribute to the Break By area. To hide data labels, select Hide (default). 8 You can determine whether color banding is applied to alternating rows in the visualization. Banding rows can make reading multiple rows of data easier. Do one of the following: To display banded rows in the visualization, select the Banding check box. Rows in the visualization are displayed using alternating colors. To display the visualization without banding, clear the Banding check box. 9 You can choose whether to have a legend displayed in the visualization. From the Legend drop-down list, select one of the following: To display the legend, select Show (default). To hide the legend, select Hide. 10 If your visualization displays graphs across multiple columns, you can determine the horizontal alignment of column labels for graphs in the visualization. Next to Column Alignment, select whether to align items to the Left, Center, or Right. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 165

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 11 If your visualization displays graphs across multiple rows, you can determine the horizontal and vertical alignment of row labels for graphs in the visualization, as follows: a b In the top row next to Row Alignment, select whether to align items to the Left, Center, or Right. In the second row next to Row Alignment, select whether to align items to the Top, Center, or Bottom. 12 You can specify how Analytics Express determines the maximum size of graph items in the visualization. By default, Analytics Express attempts to automatically size graph items in the visualization to optimize the graph display. For example, in a bubble graph, Analytics Express attempts to display large bubbles for large metric values and small bubbles for small metric values, without hiding smaller bubbles under large ones if they overlap. Under Max Size, from the Type drop-down list, select one of the following: To have Analytics Express automatically size graph items to optimize the graph display, select Automatic (default). To have graph items automatically sized to touch each neighboring graph item, select Auto Fit. This option is only available for the Grid graph style. To manually select the size in which to display graph items, select Manual. In the Value field, type the maximum size of the graph items as a ratio between.01 and 1. For example, type 1 to display the largest bubble markers at the maximum size at which the visualization can display graph items. If the Size By area does not contain a metric, this value determines the size of all elements displayed in the visualization. If the Size By area contains a metric, this value is the size of the largest graph item displayed in the visualization. This option is only available if the Size option is set to Manual. 13 You can specify how Analytics Express determines the minimum size with which to display graph items in the visualization. Under Min Size, from the Type drop-down list, select one of the following: To have Analytics Express automatically size graph items to optimize the graph display, select Automatic (default). To have graph items automatically sized as proportional to the largest values displayed in the visualization, select Proportional. To manually size graph items, select Manual. In the Value field, type a percentage. The graph item for the smallest metric value in the 166 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 visualization will be displayed as a percentage of the size of the largest element. For example, to display the smallest value using a graph item 20 percent of the size of the largest graph item in the visualization, type.2. 14 You can choose whether to have a single border displayed around the entire visualization area (the graph legend remains outside the border). From the Outside Border drop-down list, select one of the following: To display the border, select Show (default). To hide the border, select Hide. 15 You can determine how the X-axis and Y-axis of each graph in the visualization are displayed. From the Axes drop-down list, select one of the following: To display both the X-axis and the Y-axis, select Show Both (default). To hide both the X-axis and the Y-axis, select Show None. To display only the X-axis, select Show Only X. To display only the Y-axis, select Show Only Y. 16 You can determine how the horizontal and vertical boundary lines between each graph in the visualization are displayed. From the Matrix Lines drop-down list, select one of the following: To display all boundary lines, select Show All (default). To hide all boundary lines, select Show None. To display only horizontal boundary lines, select Show Only Horizontal. To display only vertical boundary lines, select Show Only Vertical. 17 You can determine whether to show or hide grid lines in each graph in the visualization. From the Grid Lines drop-down list, select one of the following: To allow Analytics Express to determine whether to show grid lines, select Automatic (default). To show grid lines in the visualization, select Show. To hide grid lines in the visualization, select Hide. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 167

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To determine whether metric labels in the visualization are abbreviated 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization. If the Graph panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. 2 In the Graph panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric whose values are graphed along the X-axis or Y-axis, then click the arrow icon on the right. Select one of the following: To abbreviate metric values, select Condense Labels. To display metric values without abbreviation, clear Condense Labels. If the metric you just formatted is included on the same drop zone area (the Horizontal Axis area or Vertical Axis area) and the same axis as other metrics in the visualization, perform the following steps for each metric that shares the same drop zone area and axis: a b Hover the cursor over the name of the metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. Clear Condense Labels. Hover the cursor over the name of the metric, then click the arrow icon on the right. Point to Number Format, then select the appropriate options to apply the same number formatting to this metric as the first metric you formatted. Click OK to apply your changes. For detailed steps to apply number formatting to a metric, see Formatting visualizations, page 157. 3 Repeat the appropriate steps above to format both X-axis and Y-axis values. To format the legend in a Graph visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization. If the Properties panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Properties. 2 From the Legend drop-down list, select Show. 3 You can change the position of the legend in the visualization. Click and drag the legend to the place to move the legend to, so that a blue indicator line is displayed in the new position. The legend is automatically moved and added to the visualization in the position you selected. 4 You can expand or collapse the legend. Do one of the following: 168 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To expand the legend, click the Maximize Legend icon at the top of the legend. To collapse the legend, click the Minimize Legend icon at the top of the legend. Formatting a Grid visualization You can format a Grid visualization, to determine whether to show banding in rows in the grid, merge row and column headers, and so on. To format a Grid visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization to format. 2 If the Properties panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Properties. 3 You can determine whether color banding is applied to rows in the visualization. Do one of the following: To display banded rows in the visualization, select the Show Banding check box. Rows in the visualization are displayed using alternating colors. To display the visualization without banding, clear the Show Banding check box. 4 From the Width drop-down list, select one of the following: To size the visualization so that all data in the grid is displayed, select Contents (default). To size the visualization to take up all available screen space, select Window. To allow users to manually resize the width of each column in the visualization, select Fixed. 5 You can determine whether to prevent the row or column headers in the grid from being realigned or shifted. From the Lock drop-down list, select one of the following: To lock the display of column headers, select Columns (default). 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 169

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To lock the display of row headers, select Rows. To lock the display of row and column headers, select Rows and Columns. To allow users to realign and shift row and column headers, select None. 6 You can determine whether to merge row or column headers that are repeated in the grid. From the Merge drop-down list, select one of the following: To merge column headers, select Columns (default). To merge row headers, select Rows. To merge row and column headers, select Rows and Columns. To display row and column headers without merging, select None. Formatting a Heat Map visualization You can format a Heat Map visualization, to determine whether you can delete rectangles from the visualization, select the algorithm used to size and position rectangles in the visualization, and so on. To format a Heat Map visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization to format. 2 If the Properties panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Properties. 3 You can enable or disable deleting rectangles from the visualization. If this option is enabled, you can delete rectangles from the visualization by hovering over a rectangle and clicking the X icon. Do one of the following: To allow rectangles to be deleted from the visualization, select the Delete check box. To disable deleting rectangles, clear the Delete check box. 170 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 4 You can enable or disable zooming in and out of rectangles in the visualization by clicking them. Do one of the following: To enable zooming in and out of rectangles, select the Zoom check box. To disable zooming in and out of rectangles, clear the Zoom check box. 5 You can choose whether to display the metric values for each rectangle in the visualization. For example, you add Region, Profit, and Revenue to the visualization. The visualization displays rectangles for each customer region. You can select the Show metric values check box to display the profit and revenue data for the Mid-Atlantic region in the Mid-Atlantic rectangle, the profit and revenue data for the Northeast region in the Northeast rectangle, and so on. Do one of the following: To show the metric values, select the Show metric values check box. To hide the metric values, clear the Show metric values check box. 6 You can choose whether to label each rectangle with the name of the attribute element it represents. From the Show Labels drop-down list, select one of the following options: To show the rectangle labels, select On (default). To hide the rectangle labels, select Off. To display the rectangle labels with the size of each label reflecting the size of the rectangle, select Proportional. Rectangles that contain large values will be displayed with larger labels than rectangles that contain small values. 7 Select one of the following options under Layout: To size the rectangles in the Heat Map visualization to make them as easy to read as possible, select Keep readability, not element order. To size and position the rectangles to make them as easy to read as possible, while still attempting to display them in the same order in which they appear in the visualization's Heat Map panel, select Balance readability and order. To position the rectangles in the Heat Map visualization in the same order in which they appear in the visualization's Heat Map panel, select Keep element order, not readability. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 171

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Formatting a Map visualization Once you have created a Map visualization, you can: Determine whether map markers are clustered together and displayed as a circle when a large number of map markers must be displayed in the same area. Users can double-click on a cluster to zoom in on the area and display individual map markers. For steps, see To determine whether to cluster map markers in a Map visualization, page 172. Color map markers in the visualization based on the value of a metric. For steps, see To color map markers in a Map visualization based on the value of a metric, page 172. Prerequisite The procedures below assume that you have already created the visualization that you want to format. For steps, see Creating and adding a Map visualization to a dashboard, page 126. To determine whether to cluster map markers in a Map visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization. If the Properties panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Properties. 2 From the Clustering drop-down list, select one of the following: To allow Analytics Express to determine whether to cluster map markers, select Automatic. To cluster map markers, select On. To display map markers without clustering, select Off (default). To color map markers in a Map visualization based on the value of a metric 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization. If the Map panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. 2 From the Map panel, click the Thresholds icon. The Thresholds Editor opens. 3 From the Show drop-down list, select the set of colors to apply to the values, such as Green or Red. 172 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 4 From the Based on drop-down list, select the metric to color the map markers based on. 5 From the second drop-down list, select one of the following: To color map markers based on the value of the metric, select Value. For example, you can display metric values greater than 5 million in blue. To color map markers based on the top x metric values, select Highest. For example, you can display the top 5 metric values in red. To color map markers based on the bottom x metric values, select Lowest. For example, you can display the bottom 5 metric values in green. To color map markers based on the top x percent of metric values, select Highest %. For example, you can display the top 10% of metric values in blue. To color map markers based on the bottom x percent of metric values, select Lowest %. For example, you can display the bottom 50% of metric values in orange. 6 From the Break By drop-down list, select the attribute level at which you want to restart counting rank or percent values for the metric. To continue counting without restarting, select None. This option is available if you have selected Highest, Lowest, Highest %, or Lowest %. 7 Each colored band displayed on the horizontal slider bar represents a different range of metric values. When the visualization is displayed, the color of each band is used to display metric values that fall into the band s range. You can click and drag a thumb left or right along the horizontal slider bar to increase or decrease the range of values covered by the band. Choose from the following: To create a new band, click a band to divide it into two separate bands. To change the color applied to the range of metric values covered by a band, double-click the band or click the Edit Color icon, then select a color. To delete a band, hover the cursor over the band, then click the Delete icon. The band is deleted. 8 To preview your changes in the visualization, click Apply. 9 When finished, click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 173

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Formatting a Network visualization Once you create a Network visualization, you can format the display of the visualization, such as whether to show labels for nodes in the visualization, or the color in which to display edges that represent low metric values. Steps are below to select formatting options for a Network visualization. To format a Network visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization to format. 2 If the Properties panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Properties. 3 You can choose whether to show descriptive labels for nodes in the visualization. Do one of the following: To show labels for nodes in the visualization, select the Show node label check box. To show nodes in the visualization without labels, clear the Show node label check box. 4 You can display edges in the visualization as arrows to show the node at which each edge starts and ends. Do one of the following: To display edges as arrows, select the Show edge direction check box. To display edges as lines instead of arrows, clear the Show edge direction check box. 5 You can show an animation when a user changes the layout style used to display nodes in the visualization. Do one of the following: To show the transition, select the Animate layout transition check box. To allow users to change the layout style without showing the transition, clear the Animate layout transition check box. 6 From the Node size aggregation drop-down list, select the function to use to aggregate the metric values used to determine node size in the visualization. 174 Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To automatically color edges in a Network visualization based on a metric value 1 You can have edges in the visualization automatically colored based on the value of a metric. To do so, you must define a threshold on the metric in the Edge Color area. If the Network panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. 2 From the Network panel, click the Thresholds icon. 3 From the Show drop-down list, select a set of colors to apply to the visualization, such as Green or Red. 4 From the Based on drop-down list, select the metric to color elements in the visualization based on. 5 From the second drop-down list, select one of the following: To have elements colored based on the value of the metric, select Value. For example, you can display metric values greater than 5 million in blue. To have elements colored based on the top and bottom x metric values, select Rank. For example, you can display the top 5 metric values in red, and display the bottom 5 metric values in green. To have elements colored based on the top and bottom x percent of metric values, select Percent. For example, you can display the top 10% of metric values in green, the next 40% of metric values in yellow, and the bottom 50% of metric values in red. 6 From the Break By drop-down list, select the level of data at which to calculate ranks or percentages. This option is only available if you selected Rank or Percent above. 7 Each band displayed in the dialog box represents a different range of values. You can click and drag a thumb left or right along the horizontal slider bar to increase or decrease the range of values covered by the band. Choose from the following: To create a new band, click a band to divide it into two separate bands. To change the color applied to the range of values covered by a band, double-click the band or click the Edit Color icon. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 175

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To delete a band, hover the cursor over the band, then click the Delete icon. The band is deleted. 8 You can preview your changes by clicking Apply. Once you have finished defining the threshold, click OK. The threshold is created. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard Customizable, detailed dashboards give you the freedom to define, pixel by pixel, exactly what data to display in your dashboard and where. For example, you can: Showcase your data using a variety of interactive data visualizations (called widgets), and define exactly which data to display in each widget Add and place items in the dashboard, such as widgets, images, shapes, and text fields, precisely where you want them. Fine-tune your dashboard with a wide variety of design and formatting options, including images, hyperlinks, and grid and graph styles. See the appropriate link below for steps to add content to your dashboard and define formatting options: Adding and removing datasets from detailed, customizable dashboards, page 177 Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards, page 178 Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard, page 179 Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182 Adding widgets to dashboards, page 185 Adding Information Windows to dashboards, page 202 Formatting dashboards, page 206 For background information on the different types of dashboards that you can create in Analytics Express, and steps to create them, see About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express, page 68. 176 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Adding and removing datasets from detailed, customizable dashboards Once you have created a dashboard, you can add or remove additional sets of data (called datasets) from the dashboard. You can use attributes and metrics from multiple datasets to create visualizations, add filters to your dashboard, and so on. If you remove a dataset from a dashboard, some objects on the dashboard may contain references to data that is no longer available. These objects will be automatically updated to remove references from the removed dataset. For example, a visualization contains data from multiple datasets and one of the datasets is removed from the dashboard, the attributes and metrics that are no longer available are removed from the visualization. Prerequisite The following procedures assume that you have already created the dashboard to modify. To add a dataset to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 If the Dataset Objects panel is not displayed, from the Tools menu, select Dataset Objects. 3 In the Dataset Objects panel, click the Add Dataset icon. 4 Select the appropriate options to add a new set of data to your dashboard. For detailed steps, see the following: For detailed steps to add data from a saved file, see Creating a dashboard using data from a saved file, page 73. For detailed steps to add data from a report stored on Salesforce.com, see Creating a dashboard using data from a Salesforce.com report, page 79. For detailed steps to add data from a database connection, see Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83. The dataset is added to the dashboard and displayed as an option in the drop-down list at the top of the My Data panel. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 177

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To remove a dataset from a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 If the Dataset Objects panel is not displayed, from the Tools menu, select Dataset Objects. 3 In the Dataset Objects panel, select the name of the dataset to remove. Click the Remove Dataset icon. 4 A confirmation message is displayed. Click OK. The dataset is removed from the dashboard. Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards Once you have created a dashboard, you can add distinct visual elements to your dashboard by adding text, images, lines, and shapes. Analytics Express lets you arrange and format each item in a dashboard with Pixel-Perfect accuracy, allowing you to create dashboards that look exactly the way you want them to. To add text, images, lines, and shapes to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 From the Insert drop-down menu, select one of the following: Text: To add text to the dashboard, select Text. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area in which to add the text, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. A text field is displayed. Type the text to display in the field, then click outside the text field to apply your changes. To add text containing attribute and metric values directly to the dashboard, from the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag attributes and metrics onto the Layout area. The attributes and metrics are added to the dashboard as shortcut text, which is replaced with attribute and metric values when the dashboard is displayed in Express Mode. 178 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Image: To add an image to the dashboard, select Image. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area in which to add the image, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. In the Source field, type the URL of the image and click OK to apply your changes. Line: To add a line to the dashboard, select Line. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area in which to add the line, then click and drag the cursor to draw the line. Shape: To add a shape to the dashboard, point to Shape, then select the type of shape to add. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area in which to add the shape, then click and drag the cursor to designate the area where the shape should be placed. 3 Continue adding items to the dashboard as described above. You can click and drag items to move them, or click and drag the handles displayed around an item to resize it. When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard You can display your data in a simple table format (called a grid), or choose from a wide variety of visually appealing, out-of the-box graphs. Once you have added grids and graphs to a dashboard, you can quickly add content to your dashboard by dragging and dropping data directly onto a grid or graph. MicroStrategy Analytics Express allows you to see a preview of your grids and graphs, which are automatically updated as you add data to your dashboard. To add a grid to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 From the Insert drop-down menu, select Grid. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape over the area in which to add the grid. The grid appears. 3 If the My Data panel is not displayed to the left, from the Tools drop-down menu, select Dataset Objects. 4 From the My Data panel, drag and drop items onto the grid. A preview of your data is automatically displayed as you add each item. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 179

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 5 Continue adding data to the grid as described above. You can rearrange items in the grid by clicking and dragging them to a new location, or remove an item from the grid by dragging it from the grid back to the My Data panel. When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. To add a graph to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 From the Insert drop-down menu, point to Graph, then select the type of graph to add. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape over the area to add the graph to. The graph appears. 3 Hover the cursor over the graph, then click the Graph Zones icon. The Categories, Series, and Metrics areas appear, as shown in the image above. 4 If the My Data panel is not displayed to the left, from the Tools drop-down menu, select Dataset Objects. 5 From the My Data panel, drag and drop items representing business measures and key performance indicators (called metrics) onto the Metrics area to add them to the graph. Examples of metrics include Revenue, Number of Employees, and Inventory Count. As you add metrics to the graph, the Metrics item will appear in the Categories or Series area. To change the place in which metrics are displayed in the 180 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 graph, drag and drop the Metrics item to the appropriate area, as described in the next step. 6 From the My Data panel, drag and drop data onto the Categories and Series areas as follows: Categories: Drag items onto the Categories area to display data on the categories of the graph. Generally, data displayed on the categories of a graph is displayed along the X-axis. For example, for a Vertical Bar graph, you can drag and drop Year onto the Categories area to display a bar along the X-axis to represent each year. Series: Drag items onto the Series area to display data on the series of the graph. Generally, data displayed on the series of a graph is displayed along the Y-axis of the graph. In the Vertical Bar graph example above, you can drag and drop Number of Flights onto the Series area to display the bars as shorter or taller depending on the number of airline flights that took place during each year. As you add data, the display of the graph is automatically updated to reflect your changes. 7 Continue adding items to the graph as described above. You can move items between the categories and the series of the graph by clicking and 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 181

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide dragging them to the appropriate area, or remove an item from the graph by dragging it back to the My Data panel. When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. Adding selectors to dashboards You can add interactivity to a dashboard by allowing each user to choose which data he wants to view. Selectors allow users to select items or values to update the display of data in grids, graphs, widgets, and so on. For example, a user can change the range of time for which sales data is displayed in a graph, or choose to display data only for specific departments. Steps to add a selector to a dashboard are below. Users can choose items in a selector to do the following: Change the panel displayed in a panel stack, which is a collection of layers of data (called panels) in a dashboard. Determine which data to display in a grid, graph, panel stack, or widget Limit which items are displayed in another selector Selectors come in a wide variety of appearances from which you can select when adding a selector to a dashboard. The following display types are available for selectors: Drop-down: Items in the selector are displayed as choices in a drop-down list. Slider: Items are displayed as values along a slider. Users can click and drag the thumb of the slider to select an item. Sliders are useful for browsing the data in a graph. For example, you can place the slider under or above the graph it will control. Users can drag the thumb along the slider to view different sets or ranges of values in the graph. 182 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Check Boxes: Items are displayed using a series of check boxes. Radio Buttons: Items are displayed using a series of radio buttons. Button Bar: Each item is displayed as a separate, clickable button. Listbox: Items are displayed as selectable options in a list. Link Bar: Each item is displayed as a text link. Search Box: Users can search for an item by typing the name of the item into the field. As the user types text, matching items are displayed for the user to choose from. This is particularly convenient for selectors that contain a long list of items. Metric Slider: Numeric values are displayed along a slider. Users can drag the thumbs of the slider to determine the range of values for which data is displayed. Metric Qualification: Users determine a specific condition under which to display data. For example, users can choose to display data only for 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 183

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide employees who have been with a company for ten or more years, as shown in the image below. If a dashboard contains multiple datasets and a selector, which items are displayed in the selector depends whether the selector filters or slices data. A slicing selector shows only the items available on the grid, graph, widget, or other object that the selector updates (called the target). A filtering selector shows all the items available in all datasets in the dashboard. For example, a selector containing the names of product categories targets a grid that displays only Books and Movies data from the first dataset in the dashboard. A second dataset in the dashboard contains Books and Music, but no data from the second dataset is displayed on the grid. If the selector is filtered, the selector displays Books, Movies, and Music (all the categories available in all the datasets). If the selector is sliced, the selector displays Books and Movies (only the categories displayed on the grid). For background information and steps to add datasets to a dashboard, see Adding and removing datasets from detailed, customizable dashboards, page 177. For more information about filtering and slicing selectors, see Properties and Formatting dialog box: Selector, page 322. To add a selector to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 From the Insert drop-down menu, point to Selector, then select the type of selector to add. The options are described above. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area to add the selector to, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. You can click and drag selectors to move them, or click and drag the handles displayed around a selector to resize it. 184 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 3 Right-click the selector and select Properties and Formatting. Select the appropriate options to format the selector, such as which items to display in the selector, which objects in the dashboard the selector updates, and whether users can choose multiple items in the selector at once. Click OK to apply your changes. 4 When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. Once you have created a dashboard, you can format the dashboard to make it appear exactly the way you want. You can: Format the entire dashboard. For example, you can choose the height and width of the dashboard, determine the size of the dashboard's margins, or choose the background color of the dashboard. For details, see Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 293 and Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 308. Format items in the dashboard, such as text, shapes, and grids. For example, you can display title bars for grids or panel stacks in a dashboard, display shapes with colored borders, or hide or show items in the dashboard. For details, see Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 308. Format graphs in the dashboard. For example, you can change the type of graph used to display your data or select the font type and size used to display text in a graph. For details, see Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 308. Adding widgets to dashboards Widgets are data visualizations that provide rich, engaging ways to analyze data in dashboards. For example, you can quickly compare the value of a key performance indicator to forecasted values using the Microcharts widget, or compare the box office performance of multiple films at once using the Heat Map widget. Although each type of widget looks different and is used in a unique way, the main purpose of all widgets is the same: to provide users with a visually distinctive, interactive look into their data. Steps are below to add a widget to a dashboard. The following list briefly summarizes each type of widget that you can use in a dashboard. Data Cloud: A Data Cloud widget displays the names of business concepts in various sizes to depict the differences in business measures 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 185

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide between each item. A Data Cloud widget can help you quickly identify the most significant positive or negative contributions to a business measure. For steps to add a Data Cloud widget to a dashboard, see Creating a Data Cloud widget, page 186. Heat Map: The Heat Map widget is a combination of colored rectangles, each representing a business concept, that allow you to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of business measures at once. For steps to add a Heat Map widget to a dashboard, see Creating a Heat Map widget, page 188. Microcharts: The Microcharts widget conveys information in such a way that the user can, at a glance, determine the trend of a business measure over time or how a measure is performing compared to forecasted figures. For steps to add a Microcharts widget to a dashboard, see Creating a Microcharts widget, page 191. By default, when a widget is first added to a dashboard, it is displayed as an empty placeholder. In order to display data in the widget, you must add attributes and metrics to the placeholder: Attributes are the business concepts reflected in your stored business data in your data source. Attributes provide a context in which to report on and analyze business facts or calculations. The attributes organize and group the metrics. For example, while knowing your company s total sales (a metric) is useful, knowing where and when the sales took place provides the kind of analytical depth that users require on a daily basis. Metrics represent business measures and key performance indicators. From a practical perspective, metrics are the calculations performed on data stored in your data source. Metrics are similar to formulas in spreadsheet software. Creating a Data Cloud widget A Data Cloud widget displays business attribute elements in various sizes to show the differences in metric values between the elements. A Data Cloud widget can help you quickly identify the most significant positive or negative contributions to a business measure. 186 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 The font size of each attribute element in a Data Cloud widget represents a metric value for that element. A bigger font for an element indicates a larger metric value. In the Data Cloud widget shown above, the cities associated with a larger number of mobile subscribers are displayed using larger names, while those with a smaller number of mobile subscribers are displayed using smaller names. To create and add a Data Cloud widget to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then select Data Cloud. 3 The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area to add the widget to, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. The widget is displayed as a placeholder. 4 If the My Data panel is not displayed to the left, from the Tools drop-down menu, select Dataset Objects. 5 From the My Data panel on the left, select attributes and metrics and drag them on top of the widget's placeholder. An example of a correctly defined placeholder is displayed in the image below. As you click and drag attributes and metrics onto the placeholder, a yellow line indicates 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 187

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide the location on the placeholder where the item will be added. Place the attributes and metrics as follows: Click and drag one attribute onto the placeholder, so that the yellow indicator line is displayed on the leftmost edge of the placeholder. The attribute is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. The elements of this attribute are displayed as names in the widget. For example, if the attribute is City, a list of cities is displayed in the widget. Click and drag one metric onto the placeholder, so that the yellow indicator line is displayed on the topmost edge of the placeholder. The metric is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. This metric is used to determine the size of each name in the widget once the dashboard is run. You can display the values of additional metrics in tooltips when the user hovers the cursor over a name in the widget. To do so, click and drag additional metrics onto the placeholder, ensuring that the indicator line is displayed as a vertical line to the right of the Metrics column. You can click and drag metrics to the left and right of other metrics to rearrange them; the leftmost metric must be the metric you used to size each element in the widget. 6 You can click and drag a widget to move it, or click and drag the handles displayed around a widget to resize it. When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. Creating a Heat Map widget A Heat Map widget is a combination of colored rectangles, each representing an individual element of a business attribute. A Heat Map widget allows you to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at one time. Heat Maps are often used in the financial services industry to review the status of a portfolio. In a Heat Map widget: The size of each rectangle represents its relative weight. 188 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 The color of each rectangle represents its relative value. For example, in the image below, larger values are green and smaller values are red. The large groups of rectangles, such as the Perigee group of rectangles in the image below, represent different groups of data. The small individual rectangles, such as the Literature rectangle in the image below, represent individual business attribute elements. To create and add a Heat Map widget to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then select Heat Map. 3 The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area to add the widget to, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. The widget is displayed as a placeholder. 4 If the My Data panel is not displayed to the left, from the Tools drop-down menu, select Dataset Objects. 5 From the My Data panel on the left, select attributes and metrics and drag them on top of the widget's placeholder. An example of a correctly defined placeholder is displayed in the image below. As you click and drag attributes and metrics onto the placeholder, a yellow line indicates 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 189

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide the location on the placeholder where the item will be added. Place the attributes and metrics as follows: Click and drag one attribute onto the placeholder, so that the yellow indicator line is displayed on the leftmost edge of the placeholder. The attribute is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. The elements of this attribute are displayed as individual rectangles in the widget. You can group individual rectangles in the widget into larger groups, as displayed in the image above. To do so, place a second attribute to the left of the first. For example, if the Supplier attribute contains BMG and the Item Category attribute contains Rock and Pop, you can place Supplier directly to the left of Item Category on the placeholder to display a large group of rectangles called BMG in the widget, containing individual rectangles Rock and Pop. Add at least two metrics to the placeholder, as follows: a b c Click and drag one metric onto the placeholder, so that the yellow indicator line is displayed on the topmost edge of the placeholder. The metric is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. This metric is used to determine the size of each rectangle in the widget once the dashboard is run, which represents the rectangles' relative weight. Place a second metric directly to the right of the first. This metric is used to determine the color of each rectangle in the widget once the dashboard is run, which represents the rectangles' relative value. You can have additional metric values displayed in a tooltip when the user hovers the cursor over a rectangle in the widget. To do so, place additional metrics to the right of the metrics you added to the placeholder in the steps above. 6 You can click and drag a widget to move it, or click and drag the handles displayed around a widget to resize it. When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. 190 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Creating a Microcharts widget The Microcharts widget consists of compact visualizations that allow users to quickly analyze trends in data. Microcharts convey information so that a user can, at a glance, determine the trend of a metric over time or how a metric is performing compared to forecasted figures. The Microcharts widget is useful for this purpose because individual microcharts can display business attribute and metric data in a small graph that would otherwise be displayed as a single value in a grid cell. Each of the microchart types available provides a unique way to visualize your data, as described below: Microchart Bar charts Description Bar microcharts plot a metric with respect to time using vertical bars. Use bar microcharts to examine the trends in a metric s current value and historical data. Sparklines Sparkline microcharts plot a metric with respect to time using a line graph. Use sparkline microcharts to examine the trends in a metric s current value and historical data. Sparkline microcharts consist of the following: A line graph that depicts the metric s value over time. A horizontal reference line, which provides a comparison point between the metric's performance and the reference value. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 191

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Microchart Bullet chart Description Bullet microcharts compare the value of one metric against other metrics, typically representing target values. One common example is comparing the year-to-date value of a metric to the annual target or the forecasted performance of the metric. Bullet charts consist of the following: A horizontal performance measure bar. This represents the value of the metric being compared. A vertical reference line, which is typically the target value for the metric. Colored reference bands that indicate numeric ranges against which the performance measure bar can be compared. These bands provide additional reference points for gauging the performance of the metric. By default, when you create a Microcharts widget, individual attribute elements are each represented by a row of microcharts in the widget. You can display one row for each metric (also called a key performance indicator, or KPI) in the widget instead. For steps, see To create a Microcharts widget displayed as a KPI List, page 195. The Microcharts widget provides a variety of display styles (called operation modes) to use to display your data: Grid: The Microcharts widget is displayed by default in Grid mode, which displays rows of data in a simple grid layout. In this mode, all the rows of microcharts are displayed at the same time. Vertical Scroll: In this mode, the widget automatically scrolls through and displays individual rows of microcharts one at a time. Users can manually scroll from one row to the next using Previous and Next buttons on the right side of the widget. For steps to display a Microcharts widget in Vertical Scroll mode, see To display a Microcharts widget in Vertical Scroll mode, page 199. Ticker: In this mode, data in the widget is displayed in a scrolling ticker that moves from right to left. You can determine what data is included in the ticker. For example, you can display microcharts, and add text next to each microchart to provide background information or highlight a trend displayed in the microchart. This text is displayed alongside the microcharts as they scroll horizontally. This mode is not available if the widget is displayed as a KPI List. For steps to display a Microcharts widget in Ticker mode, see To display a Microcharts widget in Ticker mode, page 199. 192 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To create and add a Microcharts widget to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then select Microcharts. 3 The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area to add the widget to, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. The widget is displayed as a placeholder. 4 If the My Data panel is not displayed to the left, from the Tools drop-down menu, select Dataset Objects. 5 From the My Data panel on the left, select attributes and metrics and drag them on top of the widget's placeholder. An example of a correctly defined placeholder is displayed in the image below. As you click and drag attributes and metrics onto the placeholder, a yellow line indicates the location on the placeholder where the item will be added. Place the attributes and metrics as follows: Add at least two attributes to the placeholder, as follows: a b c Click and drag the first attribute onto the placeholder, so that the indicator line is displayed on the leftmost edge of the placeholder. The attribute is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. The names of each element of this attribute are displayed in the first column of the widget, with one row of data displayed for each element. If desired, place additional attributes to the right of the first. Each attribute is used to display additional rows of microcharts. Place one time-based attribute, such as Quarter or Year, to the right of all other attributes on the placeholder. This attribute provides the values displayed along the X-axis in the bar and sparkline microcharts. Click and drag one metric onto the placeholder, so that the indicator line is displayed on the topmost edge of the placeholder. The metric is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. This metric determines the height of each bar or point displayed in the bar and sparkline microcharts. You can add additional metrics to the placeholder to display horizontal reference lines and bullet microcharts. To do so, place 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 193

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide additional metrics to the right of the metric you just added to the placeholder, as described in the following steps: a b c d e f g The second metric creates the horizontal reference lines that are displayed in the sparkline microcharts. The third metric determines the length of the performance measure bar in the bullet microcharts. The fourth metric determines the maximum possible value that can be displayed in the bullet microcharts. The fifth metric determines the right-most boundary of the first color band in the bullet microcharts. The sixth metric determines the right-most boundary of the second color band in the bullet microcharts. The seventh metric determines the value of the vertical reference line in the bullet microcharts, which typically represents the target metric value. Any additional metrics are displayed in the columns of the widget, after the microcharts and their associated metrics. 6 From the toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Properties. From the drop-down list, select Options, then determine which types of microcharts, such as bar or sparkline microcharts, are enabled for display in the widget by choosing from the following: To show sparkline microcharts, click the Sparkline tab and select the Show sparkline graph check box. To show bar microcharts, click the Bar tab and select the Show bar graph check box. To show bullet microcharts, click the Bullet tab and select the Show bullet graph check box. Click OK to apply your changes. 194 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 7 You can click and drag widgets in Editable Mode to move them, or click and drag the handles displayed around a widget to resize it. When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. Once you have added the Microcharts widget to your dashboard, the widget is displayed in Grid mode by default, as described in the introduction above. For steps to display the widget using a different display mode, see the appropriate link below: To display a Microcharts widget in Vertical Scroll mode, page 199 To display a Microcharts widget in Ticker mode, page 199 Displaying a Microcharts widget as a KPI List In KPI List mode, each metric in the Microcharts widget is represented by its own row of microcharts by default. Because all data for a metric is presented in its own row in the widget, trends are easier to spot, as shown below: To create a Microcharts widget displayed as a KPI List 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 From the Insert menu, point to Widgets, then select Microcharts. 3 The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area to add the widget to, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. The widget is displayed as a placeholder. 4 If the My Data panel is not displayed to the left, from the Tools drop-down menu, select Dataset Objects. 5 From the My Data panel on the left, select attributes and metrics and drag them on top of the widget's placeholder. An example of a correctly defined placeholder is displayed in the image below. As you click and 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 195

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide drag attributes and metrics onto the placeholder, a yellow line indicates the location on the placeholder where the item will be added. Place the attributes and metrics as follows: Click and drag a single time-based attribute, such as Month or Year, onto the placeholder, so that the indicator line is displayed on the leftmost edge of the placeholder. The attribute is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. This attribute provides the values displayed along the X-axis in the bar and sparkline microcharts. Click and drag one metric onto the placeholder, so that the indicator line is displayed on the topmost edge of the placeholder. The metric is added to the placeholder and the indicator line disappears. This metric determines the height of each bar or point displayed in the bar and sparkline microcharts, and is used to display the first row of microcharts in the widget. You can add additional metrics to the placeholder to display additional rows of microcharts, as well as horizontal reference lines and bullet microcharts. To do so, place additional metrics to the right of the metric you just added to the placeholder, as described in the following steps: a b c d e f The second metric creates the horizontal reference lines that are displayed in the sparkline microcharts. The third metric determines the length of the performance measure bar in the bullet microcharts. The fourth metric determines the maximum possible value that can be displayed in the bullet microcharts. The fifth metric determines the right-most boundary of the first color band in the bullet microcharts. The sixth metric determines the right-most boundary of the second color band in the bullet microcharts. The seventh metric determines the value of the vertical reference line in the bullet microcharts, which typically represents the target metric value. 196 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 g Any additional metrics are displayed as additional rows of microcharts in the widget. 6 From the toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Properties. From the drop-down list at the top left, select Mode. 7 By default, each metric on the placeholder is calculated and displayed as an individual row in the widget. To display elements such as reference lines and bullet charts, you must define the number of metrics to use to display each row. In the Metrics per KPI field, type the number of metrics to use to generate the rows of microcharts for each KPI, using the following guidelines: If one metric is used per KPI, only sparkline and bar charts and their metrics are displayed. The horizontal reference line is not displayed in the sparkline microcharts. If two metrics are used per KPI, sparkline and bar charts and their metrics are displayed. The horizontal reference line is displayed in the sparkline microcharts. If three to six metrics are used per KPI, sparkline and bar charts and their metrics are displayed. Additional metrics are displayed to the right of the sparkline and bar charts and their metrics. If seven or more metrics are used per KPI, sparkline, bar, and bullet charts are all displayed. Additional metrics are displayed to the right of the sparkline and bar charts. 8 From the drop-down list, select Options, then determine which types of microcharts, such as bar or sparkline microcharts, are enabled for display in the widget by choosing from the following: To show sparkline microcharts, click the Sparkline tab and select the Show sparkline graph check box. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 197

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To show bar microcharts, click the Bar tab and select the Show bar graph check box. To show bullet microcharts, click the Bullet tab and select the Show bullet graph check box. 9 You can provide names for the columns that display the last metric value included in the sparkline or bullet microcharts. For example, in the image below, the label This Quarter is used to identify the column. From the drop-down list at the top left, select Labels, then perform the following steps: a b On the Sparkline tab, in the Associated Metric field, type a name for the column that contains the metric values included in the sparkline microcharts. On the Bullet tab, in the Associated Metric field, type a name for the column that contains the metric values included in the bullet microcharts. 10 Click OK to apply your changes. 11 You can click and drag widgets in Editable Mode to move them, or click and drag the handles displayed around a widget to resize it. When finished, view your changes by clicking the Express Mode icon in the toolbar. Once you have added the Microcharts widget to your dashboard, the widget is displayed in Grid mode by default, as described in Creating a Microcharts widget, page 191. You can display the widget in Vertical Scroll mode instead. For steps, see To display a Microcharts widget in Vertical Scroll mode, page 199. 198 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To display a Microcharts widget in Vertical Scroll mode In this mode, the widget automatically scrolls through and displays individual rows of microcharts one at a time. Users can manually scroll from one row to the next using Previous and Next buttons on the right side of the widget, as shown in the image below. To display a Microcharts widget in Vertical Scroll mode 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. 2 Right-click the widget and select Properties. From the drop-down list at the top left, select Mode. 3 On the Mode tab, from the Operation Mode drop-down list, select Vertical Scroll. 4 Click the Vertical Scroll tab. 5 You can allow users to scroll through rows of microcharts manually using the Previous and Next buttons. To do so, select the Previous/Next buttons check box. 6 You can define the speed at which the widget automatically scrolls through rows of microcharts. From the Motion drop-down list, select a scrolling speed. 7 Click OK to apply your changes. To display a Microcharts widget in Ticker mode In Ticker mode, the Microcharts widget displays tickers representing one row of microcharts at a time, scrolling side to side. Tickers can contain static text and variables. When the widget is displayed in Express Mode, the variables are each replaced with a microchart or the value of an attribute or metric. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 199

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide For example, you can use variables to alert users when profits dip below a specified target. The following text in braces contains the variables for a sparkline microchart, the Region attribute, the Profit Target metric, and a bullet microchart, respectively. {&sparkline} The {Region} Region has NOT reached its profit target of {[Profit Target]} {&bullet} The resulting ticker is displayed below. By default, when you click the ticker for a row of microcharts, the contents of the row are displayed in a pop-up window, as displayed above. Each row in the widget is displayed as one of two types of tickers, depending on whether the value of the performance metric (the third metric on the widget s placeholder) has reached a target value (the seventh metric on the widget s placeholder). Ticker 1 is displayed when the value of the performance metric is less than the target metric value (or when the performance bar in the bullet microchart does not meet the vertical reference line, if bullet charts are displayed). Ticker 2 is displayed when the value of the performance metric is greater than or equal to the target metric value (or when the performance bar in the bullet microchart meets or exceeds the vertical reference line, if bullet charts are displayed). To display a Microcharts widget in Ticker mode 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Right-click the widget and select Properties. 200 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 2 From the drop-down list at the top left, select Mode. On the Mode tab, from the Operation Mode drop-down list, select Ticker. 3 On the Ticker tab, type a name for the ticker display in the Title field. This name appears at the top of the widget, above the ticker. 4 To allow users to manually scroll from row to row using the Preview and Next buttons, select the Previous/Next buttons check box. 5 You can allow users to click a ticker to display the contents of the row it represents in a pop-up window. To do so, select the Enable detail view check box. 6 From the Motion drop-down list, select a scrolling speed for the widget to use when automatically scrolling through items in the ticker. 7 You can define the contents displayed in the tickers. Choose from the following: To define the ticker to display for rows in the widget in which performance goals have not been met, in the Ticker 1 field, type the text to display. To define the ticker to display for rows in the widget in which performance goals have been met, in the Ticker 2 field, type the text to display. To display microcharts in the ticker, type {&bullet} for bullet microcharts, {&bar} for bar microcharts, or {&sparkline} for sparkline microcharts. To display the values of attributes and metrics in the tickers, type attributes and metrics in braces, for example, {Revenue}. For objects with spaces in the name, use brackets inside the braces, for example {[Revenue Forecast]}. 8 From the Ticker 1 color and Ticker 2 color drop-down lists, select a font color to use to display text in each ticker. 9 Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 201

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Adding Information Windows to dashboards You can let users view additional information about an object by clicking it in Express Mode or tapping it on an ipad with MicroStrategy Mobile. The information is displayed in a pop-up Information Window. An Information Window can be displayed for the following: An attribute on a grid or a graph A button An image An item in a selector A text field An object in a widget (available for the ipad) For example, a user clicks the attribute element Northeast in the grid shown below. The Information Window is displayed over the element, containing a graph with sales data for the Northeast region. As another example, on an ipad, a user can tap a store s name in a Data Cloud widget to view the store s address, phone number, and customer ratings. 202 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 In Design Mode and Editable Mode, the Information Window is displayed as an interactive panel stack in the location that you added it to the dashboard. The following are suggestions for content to add to an Information Window: Images, such as corporate logos or photos. For steps to add images to a dashboard, see Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards, page 178. Text containing attribute or metric data. In the store example described above, you can add a text field that contains the Store attribute to the Information Window. When the store s name is selected in the widget, the Information Window displays the name of the store. For steps to add text to a dashboard, see Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards, page 178. Grids or graphs containing additional business data. For steps to add a grid or graph to a dashboard, see Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard, page 179. Prerequisite The following procedure assumes that the dashboard contains one of the following: A text field, image, or button to use to display the Information Window. For steps to add a text field or image to a dashboard, see Adding text, images, lines, and shapes to dashboards, page 178. A grid or graph to use to display the Information Window. For steps to add a grid or graph to a dashboard, see Adding grids and graphs to a dashboard, page 179 A selector to use to display the Information Window. For steps to add a selector to a dashboard, see Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182. To add an Information Window to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. To define a panel stack to use as the Information Window 2 From the Insert menu, select Panel Stack. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area in which to add the panel stack, then click and drag the cursor to designate the area where the panel stack should be placed. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 203

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 3 Add content to the panel stack, such as text, images, and shapes. For examples and steps to add text and data, see Adding text and data to a dashboard, page 95. The contents of this panel stack are displayed in the Information Window when the Information Window is shown in Express Mode or on an ipad. 4 Right-click the panel stack and select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens. 5 From the left, select General. Ensure that the Use as Information Window check box is selected. 6 You can specify the location in which the Information Window is displayed in Express Mode or on an ipad. From the Placement drop-down list, select one of the following: For a dashboard displayed on the ipad, this option is applied if the Window Mode option is set to Appear. To allow Analytics Express to automatically determine where to display the Information Window, select Automatic (default). To display the Information Window in the same location in which the panel stack is displayed in Design Mode and Editable Mode, select Fixed. To display the Information Window above the item that the user selects to display the Information Window (called the selected object), select Above. To display the Information Window below the selected object, select Below. To display the Information Window to the left of the selected object, select Left. To display the Information Window to the right of the selected object, select Right. 7 From the Title drop-down list, select one of the following: To display the panel stack with a default title, select Current Panel Name (default). To type a title for the panel stack, select Custom Title. In the Custom Title field, type the title. 204 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 To define how the Information Window is displayed on an ipad with MicroStrategy Mobile 8 To determine how to display the Information Window on an ipad, from the Window Mode drop-down list, select one of the following: To display the Information Window as a pop-up window, select Appear (default). To display the Information Window with an animation that turns it over like a card, select Flip Up. To display the Information Window as a window that gradually increases in size, select Scale Up. To display the Information Window sliding onto the dashboard from the edge of the screen, select Slide. 9 If you selected Slide as the Window Mode, you can specify which edge to slide the Information Window from. From the Position drop-down list, select Above, Below, Left, or Right (default). 10 By default, the Information Window is closed when a user taps outside of the Information Window. To have users close the Information Window by tapping a button instead, select the Dismiss only when Close button is tapped check box. 11 Click OK to apply your changes. To define the text field, image, button, selector, or item in a grid, graph, or widget to use to display the Information Window 12 Choose from the following: To display the Information Window when the user selects a text field, image, or button, perform the following steps: a b c d Right-click the text field, image, or button, and select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens. From the left, select General. From the Panel Stack drop-down list, select the panel stack to use as the Information Window. Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 205

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To display the Information Window when the user selects an item in a grid, graph, or widget, perform the following steps: a b c d e For a graph, hover the cursor over the graph and click the Graph Zones icon. Right-click the attribute whose elements users will select to display additional information, and choose Use as Selector. Right-click the attribute again, and choose Edit Selector. The Configure Selector dialog box appears, as shown below. If the panel stack you created in the steps above is not included in the Selected Targets list, select the panel stack and click the Add to Selections icon to add it to the list. Click OK to apply your changes. To display the Information Window when the user selects an item in a selector, perform the following steps: a b c d Right-click the selector and select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens. From the left, select Selector. If the panel stack you created in the steps above is not included in the Selected Targets list, select the panel stack and click the Add to Selections icon to add it to the list. Click OK to apply your changes. Formatting dashboards You can format the content added to a dashboard, such as text, images, grids, graphs, widgets, and so on, as follows: Formatting text, images, lines, and shapes, page 207 Formatting grids and graphs, page 207 Formatting a Microcharts widget, page 207 206 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 Formatting text, images, lines, and shapes Once you have added an item to the dashboard, you can select options to format it. For example, you can change the font color of text or display a border around an image. To do so, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. Right-click the item, then select Properties and Formatting. Select the appropriate formatting options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box. For details on each of the formatting options available, see Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 308. Formatting grids and graphs Once you have added a grid or graph to the dashboard, you can select options to format it. For example, you can change the color of the borders displayed in a grid, or the number of decimal places used to display numbers in a graph. To do so, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon, then do one of the following: For grids, click the grid, then right-click the Select/Move icon. Select Properties and Formatting. Select the appropriate formatting options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box. For details on each of the formatting options available, see Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 308. For graphs, from the Format menu, select Graph. Select the appropriate options in the Format: Graph dialog box. For details on each of the formatting options available, see Interfaces for formatting graphs, page 361. Formatting a Microcharts widget Once you have created and added a Microcharts widget to a dashboard, you can select formatting options, such as whether to display the widget using a custom color theme or whether to display rows of charts in a grid layout. A Microcharts widget is made up of several small types of graphs or charts. You can format some aspects of the entire Microcharts widget, or format a specific type of microchart in the widget. For steps, see the appropriate link below: Formatting a Microcharts widget, page 208 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 207

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Formatting bar microcharts, page 212 Formatting sparkline microcharts, page 214 Formatting bullet microcharts, page 215 For an image of a Microcharts widget and steps to add one to a dashboard, see Creating a Microcharts widget, page 191. Formatting a Microcharts widget The table below contains a list of tasks that you can perform to apply general formatting to the widget, and steps to perform them. What to Format in the Widget Determine opacity of the widget s background This option is available if the Choose Theme option is set to Custom. Define the display mode used to show rows of microcharts in the widget Define the number of metrics used to calculate each row of microcharts in KPI List mode This option is only available if the widget is displayed in KPI List mode. For details, see Displaying a Microcharts widget as a KPI List, page 195. How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Opacity. 3 From the Background Opacity drop-down list, select the level of opacity. The higher the percentage, the less transparent the background is. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Mode tab. 4 From the Operation mode drop-down list, choose a display method from one of the following: Grid (default): In this mode, all the rows of microcharts are displayed at the same time in a grid layout. Vertical Scroll: In this mode, the widget automatically displays individual rows of microcharts one at a time. Users can manually scroll from one row to the next using Previous and Next buttons on the right side of the widget. Ticker: In this mode, microcharts and supplemental text are displayed in a scrolling ticker that moves from right to left. You can add text next to each microchart to provide background information or highlight a trend displayed in the microchart. This text is displayed alongside the microcharts as they scroll horizontally. This mode is not available if the widget is displayed in KPI List mode. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Mode tab. 4 Type a number in the Metrics per KPI field. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 208 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 What to Format in the Widget Show or hide the column headings Show or hide the text columns Lock or unlock the Microcharts layout When the layout is locked, users cannot move or sort columns in the widget. Ensure that the metric columns displayed in the widget on an ipad have enough space In Smooth Scroll mode, if there is enough space on the mobile device to display all the attribute columns in the widget plus at least one metric, the attribute columns are allowed to take up as much space as they require. If space is limited, priority is given to displaying the metrics in the widget, and attributes are displayed in the remaining space. Users can swipe horizontally to view the metric columns that cannot fit on a single page. Determine whether widget rows are displayed in groups that can be collapsed and expanded. This option is available only if the widget is displayed in Grid mode. This option is not available in KPI List mode. Show or hide the Previous and Next buttons in Vertical Scroll mode This option is available only if the operation mode is set to Vertical Scroll. How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Mode tab. 4 Select or clear the Hide column headers check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Mode tab. 4 Select or clear the Hide text columns check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Mode tab. 4 Select or clear the Lock layout check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Select the Enable smooth scroll mode for metrics (mobile only) check box. 4 From the Metric Column Spacing drop-down list, determine how to size and display columns in the widget by selecting one of the following: To display columns as more compact in width, select Compact. To display columns using the default width, select Normal. To display columns as wider than the default, select Large. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Select the Tree display check box. 4 From the Aggregation function drop-down list, select the function to use to calculate totals for the grouped rows. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Vertical Scroll tab. 4 Select or clear the Previous/Next buttons check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 209

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide What to Format in the Widget Set the scroll speed in Vertical Scroll mode This option is available only if the operation mode is set to Vertical Scroll. Add a descriptive title to the widget in ticker mode This option is only available if the operation mode is set to Ticker. Show or hide the Previous and Next buttons in Ticker mode This option is only available if the operation mode is set to Ticker. Display the corresponding row of microcharts in a pop-up window when a ticker is clicked in Ticker mode This option is only available if the operation mode is set to Ticker. Set the scroll speed in Ticker mode This option is only available if the operation mode is set to Ticker. Define the text displayed for the tickers in Ticker mode This option is only available if the operation mode is set to Ticker. How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Vertical Scroll tab. 4 From the Motion drop-down list, select a scroll speed for the widget to use when automatically scrolling through rows of microcharts. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Ticker tab. 4 Type the widget title in the Title field. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Ticker tab. 4 Select or clear the Previous/Next buttons check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Ticker tab. 4 Select or clear the Enable detail view check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Ticker tab. 4 From the Motion drop-down list, select a scroll speed for the widget to use when automatically scrolling through rows of microcharts. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Mode. 3 Click the Ticker tab. 4 In the Ticker 1(M3 < M7) field, type the ticker content to display for rows of microcharts in which the value of the performance metric has not reached its target value. 5 In the Ticker 2(M3 >= M7) field, type the ticker content to display for rows of microcharts in which the value of the performance metric has reached its target value. 6 From the Ticker 1 color and Ticker 2 color palettes, select a color to use to display Ticker 1 and Ticker 2. 7 Click OK to apply your changes. 210 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 What to Format in the Widget Show or hide metrics for hidden microcharts You can choose to enable the display of specific types of microcharts in the widget, such as sparkline or bullet microcharts. If you choose not to display these microcharts in the widget, the metrics that would have been used to display the hidden microcharts are displayed in columns in the widget by default. You can choose to show or hide these columns. Determine whether to apply formatting defined in the widget s underlying grid The following formatting can be inherited from the underlying grid: Number and date formatting Font type, alignment, and color Background and border color of row axis heading The color used to highlight items selected in the widget How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 Select or clear the Display metrics for hidden graphs check box. 3 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Editable Mode, right-click the widget, then point to View Mode and select Grid View. 2 Right-click the widget, then select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens. 3 Format the widget s underlying grid by selecting the appropriate options to format the row axis headers and values in the Properties and Formatting dialog box. For details on each formatting option, click Help. 4 Click OK to apply your changes and return to the widget. 5 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 6 From the drop-down list, select Options. 7 Do one of the following: To apply formatting from the widget s underlying grid, select the Inherit grid formatting check box. To display the widget without inheriting formatting, clear the Inherit grid formatting check box. 8 Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 211

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide What to Format in the Widget Determine the display theme to use to display the Microcharts widget on an ipad Determine the color used to highlight items selected in the widget Notes: The widget must be configured as a selector in order for users to choose items in the widget. You must apply formatting inherited from the widget s underlying grid, as described in the steps above. To display the selection color on a mobile device, you must display the widget using the Custom display theme, as described below. How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 From the Choose Theme drop-down list, select a color theme to use to display the widget, as follows: To display the widget using a light-colored theme, select Light (default). To display the widget using a dark-colored theme, select Dark. To display the widget using custom color options that you define, select Custom. The colors that you select for the widget in the Microcharts dialog box will be used to display the widget on a mobile device. 1 In Design or Editable Mode, right-click the widget's Grid/Graph, then select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens. 2 From the left under Format, click Color and Lines. 3 From the Selection Color drop-down list, select the color to use to highlight items. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. Formatting bar microcharts The table below lists the different aspects of the bar microcharts that you can format, and describes the steps to format them. What to Format in the Widget Show or hide the bar microcharts in the widget Show or hide the minimum and maximum values for the bar microcharts How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bar tab. 4 Select or clear the Show bar graph check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bar tab. 4 Select or clear the Min/max legend check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 212 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 What to Format in the Widget Show or hide the horizontal reference line Show or hide tooltips Adjust the color of the bars (series) in the bar microcharts These options are available if the custom theme is selected. Add a descriptive column header name above the bar microcharts How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bar tab. 4 Select or clear the Reference line check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bar tab. 4 Select or clear the Show Tooltips check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Colors. 3 Click the Bar tab. 4 From the Positive Values palette, select a color for the positive bars. 5 From the Negative Values palette, select a color for the negative bars. 6 From the Reference Line palette, select a color for the reference line. 7 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Labels. 3 Click the Bar tab. 4 In the Header field, type a descriptive name for the column heading that is displayed above the bar charts. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 213

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Formatting sparkline microcharts The table below lists the different aspects of the sparkline microcharts that you can format, and describes the steps to format them. What to Format in the Widget Show or hide the sparkline microcharts in the widget Show or hide the markers on the line graph in the sparkline microcharts Show or hide the horizontal reference line or sparkline background (reference area) Show or hide the column that contains the last metric value included in each row of sparkline microcharts Show or hide tooltips Select series line, reference line, and reference area (background) colors These options are available if the custom theme is selected. How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 Select or clear the Show sparkline graph check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 To show or hide all of the markers between the first and last markers, select or clear the All points check box. 5 To show or hide the first and last markers on the line graph, select or clear the End points check box. If All points is selected above, this option is not available. 6 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 Select or clear the Reference line check box to show or hide the reference line. 5 Select or clear the Reference area check box to show or hide the sparkline background. 6 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 Select or clear the Associated metric check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 Select or clear the Show Tooltips check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Colors. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 Select a color from the Series line, the Reference line, and the Reference area palettes. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 214 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 What to Format in the Widget Add a descriptive column heading name above the sparkline microcharts Add a descriptive heading name for the column that contains the last metric value included in each row of sparkline microcharts How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Labels. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 Type a name in the Header field. This text displays above the sparkline microcharts. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Labels. 3 Click the Sparkline tab. 4 Type a name or value in the Associated metric field. This text displays above the metric column. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. The heading name is only displayed when the Associated metric check box is selected from the Sparkline tab in the Options menu. Formatting bullet microcharts The table below lists the different aspects of the bullet microcharts that you can format, and describes the steps to format them. What to Format in the Widget Show or hide the bullet microcharts in the widget Show or hide the vertical reference line or color bands Show or hide a legend for the bullet microcharts Show or hide the column that contains the last metric value included in each row of bullet microcharts How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Select or clear the Show bullet graph check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Select or clear the Reference line check box. 5 Select or clear the Reference bands check box to show or hide color bands. 6 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Select or clear the Band legend check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Select or clear the Associated metric check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 215

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide What to Format in the Widget Determine whether the bullet microchart is displayed from left to right or right to left (inverted) Show or hide tooltips Define a minimum performance bar value for bullet graphs in the widget Bullet graphs with performance bars below the minimum value will not be displayed. Adjust the color of the performance bar These options are available if the custom theme is selected. Adjust the color of the vertical target line These option is available if the custom theme is selected. Adjust the color of the reference bands These options are available if the custom theme is selected. Add a descriptive column heading name above the bullet microcharts How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Select or clear the Invert graph axis check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Select or clear the Show Tooltips check box. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Options. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Type a value in the Minimum Value field. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Colors. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 From the Positive values palette, select a color for the positive parts of the performance bar. 5 From the Negative values palette, select a color for the negative parts of the performance bar. 6 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Colors. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 From the Reference line palette, select a color for the vertical target line. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Colors. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 From the Band 1, Band 2, and Band 3 palettes, select a color for each reference band, from left to right. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Labels. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 In the Header field, type a descriptive name for the column heading above the bullet charts. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 216 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data 3 What to Format in the Widget Add a descriptive heading name for the column that contains the last metric value included in each row of bullet microcharts Add descriptive names to the legend that describes the different reference band colors How to Format It 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Labels. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 Type a name in the Associated metric field. This text displays above the metric column. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. The heading name is only displayed when the Associated metric check box is selected from the Bullet tab in the Options menu. 1 In Express Mode, right-click the widget and select Properties. 2 From the drop-down list, select Labels. 3 Click the Bullet tab. 4 In the Band 1, Band 2, and Band 3 fields, type a descriptive name for each reference band name displayed on the legend, from left to right. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 217

3 Creating Dashboards to Display Your Data MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 218 Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

4 4.CREATING AND MANAGING TEAMS, TEAM HOME PAGES, AND USERS Introduction You can invite users to create an Analytics Express account, create and modify user groups, and customize the page that is displayed by default when a user logs in to Analytics Express (called a Team Launchpad). See the appropriate link below for background information and steps to perform each of these tasks: Creating, renaming, displaying, and deleting teams, page 220 Adding, inviting, and managing users, page 221 Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups, page 228 Creating Team Launchpads, page 232 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 219

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating, renaming, displaying, and deleting teams A team is a collection of users that can share their dashboards securely with any other members of their team. You can create as many teams as needed to separate users into different projects, departments, geographical areas, and so on. When you log in to Analytics Express, the list of teams that you have access to are listed in the Teams panel to the left. You can create, rename, and delete teams, or determine which teams are displayed in the Teams panel. Steps are provided below. To create a new team 1 In the Teams panel to the left, click the Create New Team icon. 2 In the Name and Description fields, type a name and description for the team. 3 Click OK. Your team is created and added to the list of teams. Once you have created a team, you can add users to it. For steps, see Adding a user to a team, page 222. To rename a team 1 In the Teams panel to the left, hover the cursor over the name of the team that you want to rename. 220 Creating, renaming, displaying, and deleting teams 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 2 Click the Team Information icon. 3 In the Name and Description fields, type a new name and description for the team. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. Your team is updated and displayed in the list of teams. To determine which teams are displayed in the Teams panel 1 In the Teams panel, click the Team Navigation Settings icon. A list of teams is displayed. 2 For each team in the list, do one of the following: To show the name of the team in the Teams panel, select the check box next to the team s name. To hide the name of the team in the Teams panel, clear the check box next to the team s name. 3 Click the Team Navigation Settings icon to apply your changes. To delete a team 1 In the Teams panel to the left, hover over the name of the team that you want to delete. 2 Click the Delete Team icon. A confirmation message is displayed. 3 Click OK. Your team is deleted and removed from the list of teams. Adding, inviting, and managing users Once you have created a team in Analytics Express, you can add users to the team to allow each user to view and share dashboards within the team. You can assign users permissions to view and modify dashboards, assign them to user groups, invite them to join teams, and so on. Adding a user to a team, page 222 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding, inviting, and managing users 221

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Adding multiple users to a team simultaneously, page 223 Inviting users to join a team, page 225 Adding personalization attributes to users, page 225 Removing a user from a team, page 227 Duplicating users across multiple teams, page 227 Adding a user to a team Use these steps to add one user at a time to a team. If you have a large list of users to add, you can add multiple users to a team at once using an uploaded file. For steps, see Adding multiple users to a team simultaneously, page 223. Prerequisites Before adding a user to a team, you must first know the user s name and email address. If desired, you can also add personalization attributes for the user, to customize the data that he can view in dashboards. For background information on personalization attributes, see Adding personalization attributes to users, page 225. You must be an Administrator. To add a user to a team 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that you want to add the user to. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Users. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Click the Add User icon. 4 In the User Name field, type the user s full name. 5 In the Email field, type the user s email address. 6 From the Role drop-down list, select one of the following: To allow the user to view, create, and share dashboards, click Consumer. 222 Adding, inviting, and managing users 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 To allow the user to perform administrative tasks, such as managing teams, adding users, and creating Team Launchpads, click Administrator. 7 If desired, in the remaining fields, type the values for any additional personalization attributes. For example, if you want each user to view data only for his country of residence, you can include a Country column to identify the current residence of each user. For background information and steps to create personalization attributes, see Adding personalization attributes to users, page 225. 8 To save your changes, click the Save Changes icon. To immediately invite the user to join the team, click Yes. To add the user without sending an invitation, click No. If you have dashboards you want to share, see Sharing dashboards with other users, page 238. If you do not yet have any dashboards created, see About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express, page 68 to design dashboards to share. Adding multiple users to a team simultaneously If you have a large list of users to add to a team, you can upload a file that contains all of the users that you want to add. If you have users who are already part of a team, you can export their names to a list and then use these steps to import the users into another team. For steps to export a list of users, see Duplicating users across multiple teams, page 227. Prerequisites You must have a file containing a list of the users that you want to add. The information must be in a.csv,.xls, or.xlsx file, and contain the following columns: Full Name: Each user s first name and last name. Email: Each user s unique email address. Team invitations are delivered to this address. Role: This column should contain one of the following values for each user: 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding, inviting, and managing users 223

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Consumer: Allow the user to view, create, and share dashboards. Administrator: Allow the user to perform administrative tasks, such as managing teams, adding users, and creating Team Launchpads. Any personalization attributes (optional). For example, if you want each user to view data only for his country of residence, you can include a Country column to identify the current residence of each user. For background information on personalization attributes, see Adding personalization attributes to users, page 225. You must be an Administrator. To add multiple users to a team at once 1 From the Teams panel on the left, click the team that you want to add the users to. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Users. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Click the Import Users icon, then click Browse. 4 Select the file that contains the users to add, and click Open. Click Continue. A preview of your data is displayed. 5 If you have chosen to include personalization attributes for the users, each personalization attribute is listed in a separate column and displayed in orange. To specify the data type of a personalization attribute, hover the cursor over the name of the personalization attribute, click the arrow icon, and select the desired data type. 6 Click Continue. An automatically generated email inviting users to join the team is displayed. Make any desired changes to the email. 7 Click Finish. The users are saved and the invitations are sent. If you have dashboards you want to share, see Sharing dashboards with other users, page 238. If you do not yet have any dashboards created, see About creating dashboards with MicroStrategy Analytics Express, page 68 to design dashboards to share. 224 Adding, inviting, and managing users 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 Inviting users to join a team Before a user can view the dashboards for a particular team, he must accept an invitation to the team. Analytics Express keeps track of whether each user has been invited to join a team, and whether he has accepted or declined that invitation. Each user that has been invited to a team is displayed with an icon next to their name that displays their invitation status, as follows: : The user has not yet been invited to the team. : The user has been invited to the team. : The user has declined the invitation to join the team. Prerequisite You must be an Administrator. To invite users to a team 1 From the Teams panel on the left, click the team that you want to invite the user to. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Users. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Select the check box next to the name of each user that you want to invite. 4 Click the Invite Users icon. An automatically generated email inviting users to join the team is displayed. Make any desired changes to the email. 5 Click Send to send the email invitation. Adding personalization attributes to users You can tailor the display of a dashboard to specific users using personalization attributes. For example, if your dashboards contain data for multiple regions, but users are only interested in seeing data for the region in which they live, you can create a personalization attribute that contains each user s region. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding, inviting, and managing users 225

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To customize the dashboard data that is displayed to each user, the personalization attribute values that you specify for each user must match values for business attributes in your dashboards. For example, if your dashboards contain data for the Northeast, Southeast, Northwest, and Southwest regions, the value of the personalization attribute for each user must exactly match one of these four values. You can add any number of personalization attributes to your user lists. Once you have created personalization attributes for users, you must define which personalization attributes to use when displaying specific dashboards. For detailed steps, see Personalizing the data to each team member, page 240. Prerequisite You must be an Administrator. To add personalization attributes to users 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that you want to add the personalization attribute to. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Users. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Click the Add Personalization icon. 4 In the Please enter the personalization attribute name field, type the name for the new personalization attribute. 5 Select the personalization attribute s data type from the Please specify the data type drop-down list. Click OK. The personalization attribute is added and displayed as a new column in the list of users. 6 For each user for which you want to specify a personalization attribute value, in the new column, type a value that corresponds to a dashboard attribute value. You can type semicolons between values to define more than one value at once. For example, to display data for the Northeast region as described above, type Northeast. To display data for the Northeast and Southeast regions, type Northeast;Southeast. 226 Adding, inviting, and managing users 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 Removing a user from a team If you no longer want a particular user to be able to view the team dashboards or Team Launchpad, you can remove him from the team. Prerequisite You must be an Administrator. To remove a user from a team 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that you want to delete the user from. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Users. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Click the check box next to the user s name and click the Delete icon. The user is removed from the team. Duplicating users across multiple teams If you want to duplicate users across multiple teams, you can export a list of users from a team and save it as a.csv file. You can then import each user in the list to a different team. For steps to import a list of users into a team, see To add multiple users to a team at once, page 224. Prerequisite You must be an Administrator. To export a list of users 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that contains the users that you want to export. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Users. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Click the Export Users icon, then do one of the following: 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding, inviting, and managing users 227

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To save the.csv file, click Save. To view the contents of the.csv file, click Open. Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups User groups provide a convenient way to manage a large number of users. Instead of assigning permissions to view and modify a dashboard to each user, you can assign the permissions to a group; the permissions automatically apply to all users in the group. All users are automatically members of the Everyone group, allowing you to easily assign permissions to all users. You can add new groups, and rename or delete the groups that you create. You cannot rename or delete the Everyone group. To create and add a user group to a team, page 228 To add users to a group, page 230 To remove users from a group, page 231 To add or move a single user to multiple groups at the same time, page 231 To rename a group, page 229 To duplicate an existing group, page 229 To delete a group, page 230 Prerequisites To display a custom home page (called a Team Launchpad) for the users in the group when they log in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express, you must have already created the Team Launchpad. For steps, see Creating Team Launchpads, page 232. You must be an Administrator. To create and add a user group to a team 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that you want to add the group to. 228 Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Groups. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Click the Add Group icon. A new group appears at the bottom of the Groups list. 4 In the New Group field, type the name of the group, then press ENTER. 5 To add users to this group, click Add Users. 6 Click the check box next to the name of each user that you want to add to the group, and then click OK. The users are added to the list of users in the group and displayed. 7 To display a custom home page (called a Team Launchpad) for the users in the group when they log in to Analytics Express, select the Enable Team Launchpad for this group check box. 8 To allow users to navigate to the default Analytics Express home page in addition to the Team Launchpad, select the Also Enable Full Navigation for this group check box. 9 Click the Save Changes icon to save your group. To rename a group 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that contains the group that you want to rename. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Groups. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 In the list of groups, click the name of the group that you want to rename, then type a new name in the field and press ENTER. 4 Click the Save Changes icon. To duplicate an existing group 1 If you want to create a user group that has a list of users in common with an existing group, you can save time by creating a copy of the existing group. From the Teams panel, click the team that contains the group that you want to duplicate. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups 229

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Groups. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 In the list of groups, hover the cursor over the name of the group. 4 Click the Duplicate Group icon. A copy of the group is created and added to the list of groups. 5 Click the Save Changes icon. To delete a group 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that contains the group that you want to delete. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Groups. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 In the list of groups, hover the cursor over the name of the group that you want to delete. 4 Click the Delete Group icon. 5 A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes. The group is deleted. When you choose to delete a group, only the group is deleted, not the users within the group. For steps to remove a user from a team, see To remove a user from a team, page 227. 6 Click the Save Changes icon. To add users to a group 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that contains the group that you want to add users to. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Groups. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 In the list of groups, click the name of the group that you want to add users to. Click Add Users. 230 Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 4 Click the check box next to the name of each user that you want to add to the group, and then click OK. The users are added to the list of users in the group and displayed. 5 Click the Save Changes icon. To remove users from a group 1 From the Teams panel, click the name of the team that contains the group that you want to remove users from. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Groups. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 In the list of groups, click the name of the group that you want to remove users from. 4 In the list of users to the right, hover the cursor over the name of each user that you want to remove, then click the Remove User From Group icon next to the user s name. 5 Click the Save Changes icon. To add or move a single user to multiple groups at the same time 1 In the Teams pane, click the name of the team that contains the user that you want to add or move. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Manage Groups. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 In the list of groups, click the group that contains the user to add more move. A list of all users in the team are displayed. 4 Hover the cursor over the name of the user that you want to add to multiple groups, then click the arrow icon. Do one of the following: To add the user to multiple groups, point to Add To, then select the check box next to each group that you want to add the user to. To move the user to multiple groups, point to Move To, then select the check box next to each group that you want to add the user to. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups 231

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 5 If you want to create a new group to add or move the user, select the bottom-most check box, then type the name of the group in the field. 6 Click OK to add the user to each of the selected groups. 7 To save your changes, click the Save Changes icon. Creating Team Launchpads You can create and customize a page to be displayed when users log in to MicroStrategy Analytics Express, called a Team Launchpad. This custom home page provides users with instant access to the images, videos, and dashboards that you have chosen to make available to the team. Analytics Express provides several templates to help you create your Team Launchpad. After choosing a template, you can replace the placeholder images, text, sections, and panels in the template with your own content to customize your Team Launchpad. Separate steps are provided below to create or delete a Team Launchpad. After you create a Team Launchpad, you can assign it to user groups within a team. When a member of the group logs in to Analytics Express, the Team Launchpad you created is displayed by default, instead of the Dashboards page. For steps, see Creating, modifying, and deleting user groups, page 228. Prerequisite You must be an Administrator. To create a Team Launchpad 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that you want to create the Team Launchpad for. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Team Launchpad. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 Click the Select Template icon. From the left, select one of the Team Launchpad templates, and then click OK. The Team Launchpad is displayed, with placeholder sections. You can replace these placeholders with your own content, as described in the steps below. 232 Creating Team Launchpads 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 4 To format the background of your Team Launchpad, hover your cursor over the top left corner of the template, and click the Page Format icon. Format the background by doing one of the following: To use one of the theme backgrounds that Analytics Express provides, click the Use a theme option, then click a theme. To use a solid color for the background, click the Use a color option. Select one of the colors on the palette, or click the More Colors icon for more choices. To use an image as the background, click the Use your own image option. In the Image URL field, type the URL location of the image. To ensure that your background can be properly viewed, use an image that is 1536 pixels wide and 1056 pixels tall. Click OK to apply the selected background. 5 To display an image in the Team Launchpad, hover your cursor over the top left corner of a placeholder image and click the Edit Image icon. a b Type the URL location of the image in the Image URL field. You can make the image a clickable link. Do one of the following: To create a link to a web site, select the URL option and type the link URL in the field below. To create a link to one of the team dashboards, click the Dashboard option, and select the dashboard that you want to link to from the drop-down list below. To display the image without adding a link, click the None option. c Click OK to apply your changes. 6 To display text in the Team Launchpad, hover the cursor over the top left corner of the text placeholder that you want to replace and click the Edit Text icon. a b Select the appropriate formatting options to format your text, then type the desired text in the pane below. Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating Team Launchpads 233

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 7 To edit a section in the Team Launchpad, hover your cursor over the top left corner of the section and click the Edit Section icon. Edit and format the section by performing the following steps: a A section consists of multiple images, accompanied by titles and descriptive text. Each image in the section is displayed in a separate row. For each image, perform the following steps: a b Type a title for the image in the Title field. You can make the image a clickable link. From the Type drop-down list, select one of the following: To display the image without adding a link, select None. To create a link to a web site, select URL. Type the link URL in the Target field. To create a link to one of the team dashboards, select Dashboard. From the Target drop-down list, select the dashboard that you want to link to. c d Type the description that you want to display below the image title in the Description field. You can provide your own image to replace the image placeholder, or select an image from the Analytics Express image gallery. Do one of the following: To provide your own image, type the URL location of the image in the Image URL field. To use an image from the image gallery, click the Select an image from our gallery icon. Select the image that you want to display, then click OK to apply your changes. b c d To add an additional image to the section, click Add Link. A new blank row is added. Select the appropriate options to define the image, as described in the steps above. To delete an image from the section, hover your cursor over the empty area directly to the left of the image s title and click X. The image is deleted and removed. To change the order in which an image appears, hover your cursor over the empty area directly to the left of the image s title. Click and drag the directional arrows icon until the red indicator line is displayed in the position where you want to move the image. The indicator line disappears and the image is relocated and displayed. 234 Creating Team Launchpads 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users 4 e f g To change the title that appears at the top of the section, type a new title in the Section Title field and select the desired font type and size options. To format the link title that appears below the image, select the desired font type and size options from the Link Title Font area. To format the link description, select the desired font type and size options from the Link Description Font area. 8 If a group of panels is included in the Team Launchpad, users can click the left and right arrows to flip through the content displayed on each panel. To edit a group of panels in the Team Launchpad, hover your cursor over the top left corner of the group and click the Edit Panel icon. Edit and format the panels by performing the following steps: a Each panel in the group consists of an image, which you can also make into a link. Each panel in the group is displayed in a separate row. For each image, perform the following steps: a You can provide your own image to replace the image placeholder, or select an image from the Analytics Express image gallery. Do one of the following: To provide your own image, type the URL location of the image in the Image URL field. To use an image from the image gallery, click the Select an image from our gallery icon. Select the image that you want to display, then click OK to apply your changes. b You can make the image a clickable link. From the Type drop-down list, select one of the following: To display the image without adding a link, select None. To create a link to a web site, select URL. Type the link URL in the Target field. To create a link to one of the team dashboards, select Dashboard. From the Target drop-down list, select the dashboard that you want to link to. b To add an additional panel to the group, click Add Link. A new blank row is added. Select the appropriate options to define the panel, as described in the steps above. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating Team Launchpads 235

4 Creating and Managing Teams, Team Home Pages, and Users MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide c d To delete a panel from the group, hover your cursor over the empty area directly to the left of the row that represents the panel and click X. The panel is automatically deleted and removed. To change the order in which a panel appears in the group, hover your cursor over the empty area directly to the left of the row that represents the panel. Click and drag the directional arrows icon until the red indicator line is displayed in the position where you want to move the panel. The indicator line disappears and the panels are automatically reordered. 9 To save your Team Launchpad, click the Save Changes icon. To delete a Team Launchpad 1 From the Teams panel, click the team that you want to delete the Team Launchpad from. 2 From the top toolbar, click Administration, then select Team Launchpad. If the top toolbar is not visible, click Full Navigation. 3 To delete the Team Launchpad, click the Delete Team Launchpad icon. A confirmation message is displayed. 4 Click OK. The Team Launchpad is completely removed, and any associated user groups will see the default Dashboards page when they log in. 236 Creating Team Launchpads 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

5 5.SHARING AND MANAGING DASHBOARDS Introduction Once you have created a dashboard, you can determine which users and user groups can access the dashboard and to what extent, schedule email deliveries of the dashboard to selected recipients, and personalize dashboards to display pertinent data to each user. You can rename, copy, delete, and update the data displayed in dashboards. For steps to perform each task, see the appropriate link below: Sharing dashboards with other users, page 238 Personalizing the data to each team member, page 240 Delivering your dashboards to users, page 241 Displaying your dashboard on a web page, page 244 Refreshing the data in dashboards, page 244 Creating and contributing to discussions, page 247 Renaming dashboards, page 249 Copying dashboards, page 249 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 237

5 Sharing and Managing Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Deleting dashboards, page 250 You can view the status of a dashboard using the Status column on the Dashboards page, which displays the following icons next to the name of each dashboard, as appropriate: : The dashboard has been shared with other users. : The data in the dashboard has been personalized for display to different users. : The data in the dashboard is set to be refreshed on a schedule. : One or more comment discussions has been added to the dashboard. Sharing dashboards with other users You can control the extent to which users can view and modify your dashboards by assigning permissions to users or user groups: Can View: Users or groups can browse to and run the dashboard. Can Modify: Users or groups can make changes to the dashboard and save their changes. Full Control: Users or groups have complete control over the dashboard, including the ability to copy and delete the dashboard, refresh the data in the dashboard, and assign permissions to other users or user groups. The ability to refresh a dashboard on a schedule and schedule email deliveries of a dashboard is restricted to the owner of the dashboard. If you want to assign permissions to multiple users at once, you can add each user to a user group, then assign the appropriate permissions to the entire group. For steps to create a group, see To create and add a user group to a team, page 228. To assign permissions to view, modify, or control a dashboard 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard that you want to assign permissions for. Click Share. 2 Click Edit Permissions. A list of users and groups with access to this dashboard and their respective access levels is displayed. 238 Sharing dashboards with other users 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Sharing and Managing Dashboards 5 3 To assign permissions to additional users or groups, click Browse. Perform the following steps: a b Select the check boxes next to the name of each user or group that you want to assign permissions to, then click OK. Each user or group that you selected is added to the Add Users/Groups pane. Next to the Add Users/Groups pane, from the drop-down list, select one of the following access levels: Can View: Users can browse to and execute the dashboard. Can Modify: Users can modify the dashboard and save their changes. Full Control: Users have full control over the dashboard, including the ability to copy and delete the dashboard, refresh the data in the dashboard, and assign permissions to other users or user groups. c Click Add. The users and groups are given the appropriate permissions. 4 To modify or remove permissions for a user or group, choose from the following: To modify permissions, under the Access column, hover the cursor over the row containing the name of the user or group. From the drop-down list, select the new permissions level that you want to assign. To remove permissions, under the Access column, hover the cursor over the row containing the name of the user or group. Click the Delete icon. 5 Repeat the appropriate steps above to add, modify, or remove permissions for each user or group. 6 When finished, click OK to apply your changes. An icon is displayed in the Status column for your dashboard, signaling that you have chosen to share the dashboard with other users. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Sharing dashboards with other users 239

5 Sharing and Managing Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Personalizing the data to each team member You can personalize the data that is displayed to each user that runs your dashboard. For example, if you create a dashboard that shows the number of on-time, delayed, and canceled flights for the BWI, IAD, and DCA airports, you may choose to share the dashboard with three managers, each responsible for one of the three airports. You can ensure that each manager only sees the data for the airport that they are responsible for when they open the dashboard. To personalize a dashboard for a user, you link an attribute in the dashboard to a corresponding personalization attribute. The personalization attribute defines the attribute value that each user is interested in. Using the example above: The dashboard must contain an attribute that contains the three different airports. For example, you may have an attribute called Airport, which contains BWI, IAD, and DCA. You create a personalization attribute for the airport managers. The value of this personalization attribute defines which airport the manager is responsible for. For example, if you create a personalization attribute called Managed Airport, the value of Managed Airport would be BWI for the manager in charge of BWI, and IAD for the manager in charge of IAD. You link the Airport attribute in the dashboard to the personalization attribute. You can personalize dashboards using multiple attributes. Prerequisite This procedure assumes you have already created at least one personalization attribute. For detailed steps to create personalization attributes, see Adding personalization attributes to users, page 225. To personalize a dashboard 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard. Click Share. 2 Click Personalize. A list of attributes contained in the dashboard is displayed on the left. 240 Personalizing the data to each team member 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Sharing and Managing Dashboards 5 3 For each dashboard attribute that you want to use to personalize the dashboard display, from the Personalization Attributes drop-down list, select the personalization attribute that defines the attribute values for each user. The dashboard attribute and the personalization attribute must have the same data type. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. An icon is shown in the Status column for your dashboard, signaling that you have chosen to personalize the data displayed in the dashboard. Delivering your dashboards to users With MicroStrategy Analytics Express, you can schedule recurring or one-time email deliveries to invite users to view your dashboards. Within these emails, you can include a portable PDF version of the dashboard, and provide a link to the dashboard location. Prerequisites You must be the owner of the dashboard to schedule deliveries. To deliver a dashboard to a list of contacts stored in a database table, the dashboard must be designed to run against a database each time the dashboard is opened (called an Express Delivery Dashboard). You must have a database table containing the list of contacts to which you want to deliver the dashboard. The table must contain separate data columns that provide the following: The email address of each contact The name of each contact Any personalization attributes to use to customize the dashboard display. For background information on personalizing dashboards, see Personalizing the data to each team member, page 240. To deliver a dashboard 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard to deliver. Click Share. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Delivering your dashboards to users 241

5 Sharing and Managing Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 2 Click Deliver. On the Deliver Settings page, click To. The options available may vary depending on the way the dashboard was created. Do one of the following: To deliver the dashboard to other members of your team, select the check box next to each user or user group that you want to send the dashboard to. Click OK to apply your changes. To deliver the dashboard to contacts stored in a database table, from the Database Connections panel to the left, click the name of the database that contains the contact information to use when sending the dashboard. A list of tables in the database is displayed. Perform the following steps: a b c d From the Available Tables panel, double-click the name of the table that contains the contact information. From the Please indicate the column that represents an email address drop-down list, select the data column that contains the email address of each contact to send the dashboard to. From the Indicate the column that represents the recipient's name drop-down list, select the data column that contains the name of each contact to send the dashboard to. You can provide personalization information to have the data displayed in the dashboard customized for each contact. A list of each attribute in the dashboard is displayed in the Indicate the Columns That Represent Dashboard Personalization Criteria area. For each dashboard attribute that you want to define personalization information for, from the appropriate Columns in Database drop-down list, select the data column that provides the values to use to personalize the data. For background information on personalizing dashboards, see Personalizing the data to each team member, page 240. 3 In the Subject field, type the subject of the email. 4 To include a PDF copy of the dashboard as an attachment in the email, select the Include a portable dashboard in PDF format check box. This attachment can be viewed with Adobe Reader 9.2 or newer. 5 By default, the body of the email is automatically generated for you and displayed in the pane at the bottom of the Delivery Settings page. When the email is delivered, {&RecipientName} is replaced with the recipients name, and {&ContentName} is replaced with the dashboard name. If desired, provide your own message by typing it into the pane. 242 Delivering your dashboards to users 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Sharing and Managing Dashboards 5 6 Select one of the following from the Frequency drop-down list: To send a single, one-time email, select One time, immediately. To send emails on a recurring schedule, select On the following schedule. Perform the following steps: a To specify the frequency with which to send the email messages, select Daily, Weekday, Weekly, or Monthly. For weekly schedules, select the desired delivery day from the drop-down list. For monthly schedules, select the 1st or the 15th day of the month from the drop-down list. b A preview of the time the email delivery will take place is displayed in the Select a Schedule Below dialog box (for example, Your schedule will run every last day of the month at 8:00PM ). The delivery time is displayed in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) by default. To display the time using a different time zone, from the drop-down list containing a list of time zones, select the appropriate time zone. The preview is automatically updated. c d e From the drop-down list containing available delivery times, select the time you want the dashboard to be delivered. The preview of the schedule delivery time is automatically updated. Click OK to apply your changes. To deliver this dashboard in an immediate, one-time email in addition to the scheduled delivery times, select the Also deliver the dashboard one time, immediately check box. 7 To schedule an additional delivery for this dashboard, in the left pane, click New Delivery. Follow the appropriate steps above to define the delivery settings. 8 Click OK to apply your changes. 9 If you have chosen to send the dashboard to a user that does not have permission to view or modify the dashboard, the Set Permissions dialog box opens. Select one of the following: To grant the user permission to view the dashboard, select the Grant view access on the dashboard option. Click OK. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Delivering your dashboards to users 243

5 Sharing and Managing Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To grant the user permission to view and modify the dashboard, select the Grant modify access on the dashboard option. Click OK. Displaying your dashboard on a web page You can generate HTML code to display a dashboard in an iframe on a web page, or obtain a direct link to the dashboard. Users sign in with their Analytics Express user name and password information to view the dashboard. To obtain the HTML code or link for a dashboard 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard. Click Share. To generate HTML code to display the dashboard in an iframe, click Embed (secure). a In the Width and Height fields, type the width and height, in pixels, of the iframe to display the dashboard in. To allow users to view and contribute to discussions while viewing the dashboard, select the Enable Discussions check box. To display the dashboard without discussions, clear the Enable Discussions check box. b The HTML code is generated and displayed in the Embed Link field. Highlight the code and press CTRL + C to copy it to the clipboard. When finished, click X. To display the direct link to the dashboard, select Show Link. In the Show Link dialog box, highlight the URL and press CTRL + C to copy it to the clipboard. When finished, click Close. Refreshing the data in dashboards You can refresh the data in a dashboard to ensure that it displays the most up-to-date information. You can choose to have the dashboard updated 244 Displaying your dashboard on a web page 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Sharing and Managing Dashboards 5 automatically on a schedule, view a list of times the dashboard was last refreshed, and so on. See the links below: To refresh your data, page 245 To refresh your data on a schedule, page 246 To view a dashboard s refresh history, page 247 To cancel refreshing data in a dashboard on a schedule, page 246 To refresh your data 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard that you want to refresh. Click Refresh Data. 2 Click Refresh Now. If your dashboard contains data from more than one data source, select the set of data to refresh. Click Continue. 3 Select the appropriate options to define the data to include in the dashboard when refreshing your data. These steps may differ based on the type of data that was originally used to create the dashboard (called the data source). For detailed steps to define which data to include in a dashboard, see the appropriate link below: Creating a dashboard using data from a saved file, page 73 Creating a dashboard using data from a Salesforce.com report, page 79 Creating a dashboard using data from a database connection, page 83 4 Click Finish to refresh your data, then select one of the following: Run Dashboard: Select this option to immediately run the dashboard with the updated data. Exit: Select this option to return to the Dashboards page. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Refreshing the data in dashboards 245

5 Sharing and Managing Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To refresh your data on a schedule Prerequisite You must be the owner of the dashboard to refresh data on a schedule. 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard that you want to refresh. Click Refresh Data. 2 Click Set Schedule. 3 To specify the frequency with which to refresh the data, select Daily, Weekday, Weekly, or Monthly. For weekly schedules, select the day you want to refresh the data from the drop-down list. For monthly schedules, select the 1st or the 15th day of the month from the drop-down list. 4 A preview of the time the email delivery will take place is displayed (for example, Your schedule will run every last day of the month at 8:00PM ). The delivery time is displayed in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) by default. To display the time using a different time zone, from the drop-down list containing a list of time zones, select the appropriate time zone. The preview is automatically updated. 5 From the drop-down list containing available delivery times, select the time you want the dashboard to be delivered. The preview of the schedule delivery time is automatically updated. 6 Click OK to apply your changes. An icon is shown in the Status column for your dashboard, signaling that you have chosen to refresh the data displayed in the dashboard on a schedule. To cancel refreshing data in a dashboard on a schedule 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard that is scheduled to be refreshed. Click Refresh Data. 2 Click Cancel Schedule. 246 Refreshing the data in dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Sharing and Managing Dashboards 5 To view a dashboard s refresh history 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard whose refresh history you want to view. Click Refresh Data. 2 Click Refresh History. A list is displayed, showing the last five times the dashboard was refreshed. 3 When finished, click OK. Creating and contributing to discussions Adding a comment discussion to a dashboard allows you to create a dialogue with other users, share your observations on data trends, and so on. You can add multiple discussions to a dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating and contributing to discussions 247

5 Sharing and Managing Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Once you have added a discussion to a dashboard, an icon is displayed next to the name of the dashboard on the Dashboards page. You can click this icon to add or delete additional comments and discussions. Prerequisite You must be the owner of the dashboard or have the Full Control access level for the dashboard to delete entire discussions or delete the comments of other users. To comment on dashboards 1 From the Dashboards page, click the name of a dashboard to run it. 2 If the Discussions panel is not displayed to the right, from the toolbar, click the Show Discussions icon. If this option is not available, the dashboard was not created to support discussions. To start a new discussion, click Start a new discussion. In the Title field, type a title for the discussion. In the Comment field, type a comment to use to start the discussion, then click Submit. The discussion is added and displayed in the Discussions panel. To add a comment to a discussion, locate the discussion that you want to add a comment to, then click Comment at the bottom of the discussion. Type your comment in the field and click Submit. Your comment is added to the discussion and displayed, along with your name and the time you submitted your comment. To show comments for a discussion, click Show Comments. To hide comments for a discussion, click Hide Comments. To delete a comment, hover the cursor over the comment that you want to delete, then click X. A confirmation message is displayed. Click OK. The comment is deleted and removed. 248 Creating and contributing to discussions 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Sharing and Managing Dashboards 5 To delete a discussion, hover the cursor over the discussion that you want to delete, then click X. A confirmation message is displayed. Click OK. The discussion is deleted and removed. Renaming dashboards Once you have created and saved a dashboard, you can rename the dashboard. To rename a dashboard 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard that you want to rename. Click Edit. 2 Click Name and Description. 3 Type a name and description for the dashboard in the Name and Description fields, then click OK to apply your changes. Copying dashboards You can make a copy of a dashboard for yourself, or make a copy that is available to a specific team. To copy a dashboard 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard that you want to copy. Click Copy, then select one of the following: Copy Here: Select this option to copy the dashboard to the Dashboards page. Copy to a Team: Select this option to copy the dashboard to the Dashboards page of a specific team. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Renaming dashboards 249

5 Sharing and Managing Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 2 Select the check box next to the name of the dashboard that you want to copy. You can select multiple dashboards. 3 If you have chosen to copy the dashboard to another team, from the Select Your Destination Team drop-down list, select the team that you want to copy the dashboard to. 4 Click OK. Your dashboard is copied. Deleting dashboards You can delete dashboards that are no longer in use. To delete a dashboard 1 On the Dashboards page, hover the cursor over the name of the dashboard that you want to delete. Click Edit. 2 Click Delete. A confirmation message appears, asking you if you want to delete the dashboard. Click Yes. 250 Deleting dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

6 6.INTERFACES FOR WORKING WITH DASHBOARDS Introduction For descriptions of the dialog boxes and other user interfaces for working with quick, easy-to-create dashboards, see the following sections: Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, page 252 Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard, page 256 Interfaces for creating visualizations, page 264 Interfaces for formatting visualizations, page 272 Interfaces for adding interactivity to a dashboard, page 284 Interfaces for creating metrics, page 286 For descriptions of the dialog boxes and other user interfaces for working with customizable, detailed dashboards, see the following sections: Interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed dashboards, page 289 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 251

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 293 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 308 Interfaces for thresholds, page 334 Interfaces for conditional formatting, page 342 Interfaces for derived elements, page 347 Interfaces for adding links, page 356 Interfaces for totals, page 358 Interfaces for formatting graphs, page 361 Interfaces for creating metrics for customizable, detailed dashboards, page 371 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards, page 374 Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for analyzing the data displayed in a dashboard, see the following sections: Advanced Sort Editor, page 252 Show Data dialog box, page 253 Advanced Sort Editor You can sort data in a visualization based on multiple conditions at the same time. To do so, use the Advanced Sort dialog box to define each sorting condition to use to sort the data. For steps to sort and analyze data, see Analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-use dashboard, page 14. The following options are available: Rows: Select this tab to sort data added to the rows of the visualization. 252 Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Columns: Select this tab to sort data added to the columns of the visualization. Sort By: From the drop-down list, select the attribute form or metric whose values you want to sort, then choose whether to sort the values in ascending or descending order, as follows: Ascending: Sort the data in ascending order (from A to Z). Descending: Sort the data in descending order (from Z to A). You can define additional sorting conditions by selecting additional attribute forms or metrics from the Then By drop-down lists and choosing to sort in ascending or descending order. When finished, click OK to apply changes and sort the data. Show Data dialog box You can examine the underlying attribute and metric data within a visualization in a simple grid format, using the Show Data dialog box. You can: Sort, pivot, and copy data in the grid Save the data in the grid as a CSV file Create a new Grid visualization using the data in the grid For detailed steps to view underlying data, see Examining the underlying data in a visualization, page 41. Adding, displaying, and deleting data views You can create and display additional views of your data in the Show Data dialog box. For example, you can create a view that includes data from all attributes and metrics displayed in the My Data panel, regardless of whether the attributes and metrics are displayed in the visualization. Each view is displayed on a different tab at the top of the Show Data dialog box. You can click on a tab to switch to a specific data view. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 253

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide When you examine the underlying data in a visualization, the My Data tab is automatically created and displayed in the Show Data dialog box. Depending on the data you chose to examine, this tab contains one of the following: Data from all attributes and metrics that have been added to the visualization Attribute and metric data for selected elements in the visualization only To add a view of your data, click the Add icon tabs, then select one of the following: displayed to the right of the All Objects: Select this option to create a view that includes data from all attributes and metrics displayed in the My Data panel. To create a view that contains data from a specific attribute in addition to the attributes and metrics currently displayed in the visualization, select the name of the attribute to include in the view. To delete an existing view, hover the cursor over the view's tab, then click X. You cannot delete the My Data tab. Sorting, pivoting, and copying the underlying data in a visualization When you examine the underlying data in a visualization, the attribute and metric data is shown in grid format. The attribute data is displayed in columns in the grid, followed by the metric data. You can sort and pivot data, resize columns, copy data rows in the grid, and so on. To sort data in the grid, click the header of the column to sort by. The data is automatically sorted in ascending order (A to Z). Click the header again to sort in descending order (Z to A). To move data in the grid, hover the cursor over the header of the data to move, then click the arrow icon. Select Move Left to move the column one space to the left, or Move Right to move the column one space to the right. To copy data rows in the grid, click on a row to select it. You can press CTRL and click specific rows to select them, or press SHIFT to select consecutive rows. Click the Copy to Clipboard icon to copy the data to the clipboard. You can then paste the copied rows into an application such as Word or Excel. To resize columns, hover the cursor over the right edge of the column to resize, so that the cursor becomes horizontal arrows. Click and drag the 254 Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 edge of the column to resize it, or double-click the edge of the column to have the column automatically sized to fit its contents. The following options are available: Show All Metrics: Select this option to include data from all metrics currently displayed in the My Data panel, including metrics that have not been added to the visualization. Save Data : Select this option to save the data on the currently displayed tab in a comma-separated values (CSV) file. Browse to the location in which to save the file, then type a name for the file and click Save to save it. Copy to Clipboard : Select this option to copy selected data rows to the clipboard. You can then paste the copied rows into an application such as Word or Excel. Add as a Grid To : Select this option to add the data on the currently displayed tab to the dashboard as a new Grid visualization. Do one of the following: To add the visualization to the currently displayed panel, select Current Panel. To add the visualization to a new panel, select New Panel. To view the underlying data in a visualization 1 Select the data to examine by doing one of the following: To display all the underlying attribute and metric data in a visualization, hover the cursor over the visualization. Click the arrow icon displayed in the top right, then select Show Data. To display underlying attribute and metric data only for selected elements in a visualization, select the elements to examine. Click the arrow icon displayed in the top right, then select Show Data. 2 The Show Data dialog box opens, with a grid containing the underlying data in the visualization. Select the appropriate options to view, save, or add additional data to the dashboard, as described above. When finished, click Close to return to the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard 255

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for adding text and data to dashboards, see the following sections: Dashboard Editor: My Data, page 256 Dashboard Editor: Filters, page 258 Dashboard Editor: Page-by, page 259 Select a Visualization dialog box, page 260 Show All dialog box, page 263 Dashboard Editor: My Data The My Data panel contains all of the attributes and metrics that can be displayed as data on a dashboard. To display the My Data panel while viewing a dashboard, from the Show menu, select Dataset Objects. If you have added data to the dashboard from more than one source, the My Data panel shows the attributes and metrics from one set of data (called a dataset) at a time. For example, if you create a dashboard using data from a saved file and add additional data to the dashboard from another file, the name of each file is displayed as an option in the drop-down list at the top of the My Data panel. You can display the attributes and metrics in a dataset by selecting the dataset from the drop-down list. Any attribute used in multiple datasets is displayed with a linked cube icon. In the example below, the To Country attribute is used in another dataset in the dashboard, while From Country is not. 256 Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 You can: Add or remove datasets from the dashboard. For steps, see Adding and removing datasets from a quick, easy-to-use dashboard, page 96. Link together related attributes from different datasets. For steps, see Linking attributes across datasets, page 94. Create, edit, and delete metrics for use in the dashboard. For steps, see Creating and adding new metrics to a dashboard, page 135. You can add, replace, or remove data from a visualization, as follows: To add data to the visualization, click and drag an attribute or metric from the My Data panel onto the appropriate area in the visualization's Drop Zones panel, so that a green indicator line is displayed in the location in which to place the attribute or metric. The attribute or metric is added to the visualization and displayed. To replace the data displayed in a visualization, click and drag an attribute or metric from the My Data panel onto the report object on the visualization's Drop Zones panel that you want to replace, so that a blue arrow icon is displayed next to the cursor. The data is replaced in the visualization and displayed. To remove data from the visualization, click and drag an attribute or metric from the visualization's Drop Zones panel onto the My Data panel. You can add or remove filters from the dashboard, as follows: To add a filter, from the My Data panel, hover the cursor over the attribute or metric to create the filter based on, click the arrow icon, and select Add to Filters. To remove a filter, click and drag the name of the filter from the Filters panel onto the My Data panel. You can group data into logical subsets based on attribute elements. To do so, in the My Data panel, hover the cursor over the attribute to use to group data. Click the arrow icon and select Add to Page-by. The attribute is added to the Page-by panel. Users can click an element in the Page-by panel to display data only for the selected element. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 257

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Dashboard Editor: Filters The Filters panel displays a list of all filters in a dashboard. When users make selections in the Filters panel, their selections are used to filter the data displayed in every visualization on the layout tab currently displayed in the dashboard. For example, a dashboard contains a Grid visualization and a Heat Map visualization, which both display sales data for a series of regions. Both are placed on separate panels and are located on the Sales layout tab, which is displayed in the dashboard. If a user chooses to only display data for the Northeast and Southeast regions, both the Grid visualization and the Heat Map visualization will be updated to only include data for Northeast and Southeast. To display the Filters panel while viewing a dashboard, from the Show menu, select Filters. You can: Add filters to the dashboard. To add a filter to a dashboard, click and drag the attribute or metric to use to create the filter from the My Data panel onto the Filters panel, so that a green plus (+) icon is displayed next to the cursor. The filter is added to the Filters panel and displayed. For detailed steps to add filters, see Adding and removing filters in a dashboard, page 147. Edit filters in the dashboard. For example, you can determine whether items selected in the filter are included or excluded from the dashboard, or whether to display filters in a horizontal or vertical layout. For steps, see Adding and removing filters in a dashboard, page 147. 258 Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Allow selections in one filter to restrict the options available in another filter. For steps, see Determining whether to allow filters to restrict other filters, page 152. Dashboard Editor: Page-by The Page-by panel displays the attribute elements that can be used to group and display data in a dashboard. To display the Page-by panel while viewing a dashboard, from the Show menu, select Page-By. When you have a very large set of data in a dashboard, it can be easier to work with that data by grouping it into logical subsets, and viewing only one of the subsets at a time. For example, a grid in a dashboard displays salary expenditures by Region, Manager, and Employee. You can place Region in the Page-by panel and view the salary expenditures data by Manager and Employee, one region at a time. All the data from the grid is still present, but it is grouped into smaller, more manageable sections. When you group data in a dashboard, the grouping is applied to all visualizations on the current layout tab. Each layout in a dashboard is grouped separately, without affecting the contents of the other layouts in the dashboard. Once you have added an attribute to the Page-by panel, users can click an attribute element to group data by. Users can also display an animation of the data, to cycle through a display of the data grouped by each attribute element in the Page-by panel. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 259

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To group data in a dashboard, click and drag the attribute to use to group data from the My Data panel onto the Page-by panel, so that a green plus (+) icon is displayed next to the cursor. The elements of the attribute are added to the Page-by panel and displayed. For detailed steps to group data in a dashboard, including steps to determine how elements in the Page-by panel are displayed, see Grouping data in a dashboard, page 21. Select a Visualization dialog box You can select the type of visualization to use to display your data using the Select a Visualization dialog box. If you are creating a new dashboard, you can select a dashboard template to use to display your data. The following options are available: Visualizations, page 260 Advanced Templates, page 262 Visualizations A green icon is displayed next to the visualization Analytics Express recommends based on the data in your dashboard. The icons of visualizations that cannot be created using the attributes and metrics in the dashboard's dataset are displayed in grey. Click the icon of the visualization to use to display your data. Some visualizations can be displayed using different subtypes. For example, if you want to represent your data as a bar graph, you can choose to display it as a vertical bar graph with clustered bars or a horizontal bar graph with stacked bars. Click the icon of the visualization to create, then click the icon for the subtype to use to display your data. 260 Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 The table below contains a list of the visualization types and subtypes that you can use to display your data, as well as a link to detailed steps to create each type of visualization. Visualizatio n Types Visualization Subtypes Description Grid None You can display data in an interactive grid, allowing users to pivot, sort, move, drill, filter, and perform additional manipulations on data displayed in the grid. For steps, see Creating and adding a Grid visualization to a dashboard, page 123. Heat Map None You can display the data as a combination of colored rectangles. Each rectangle represents an attribute element, and is colored and sized according to the value of metrics in the visualization, allowing users to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of variables at one time. For steps, see Creating and adding a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard, page 124. Map None You can display locations as image markers or bubble markers on a map. You can enable map items to be clustered together and displayed as a circle when a large number of map markers must be displayed in the same map area. For steps, see Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106. Network None You can display the data as a network of nodes, with lines between the nodes representing relationships between attribute elements. For steps, see Creating and adding a Network visualization to a dashboard, page 129. Bar Line Vertical Bar - Clustered Vertical Bar - Stacked Vertical Bar - 100% Stacked (Percent) Horizontal Bar - Clustered Horizontal Bar - Stacked Horizontal Bar - 100% Stacked Vertical Line - Absolute Vertical Line - Stacked Vertical Line - 100% Stacked Horizontal Line - Absolute Horizontal Line - Stacked Horizontal Line - 100% Stacked You can display your data using bar graphs and select from a variety of graph styles, including stacked and clustered bar graphs. For steps, see Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106. You can display your data using line graphs and select from a variety of graph styles, including stacked or absolute line graphs. For steps, see Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 261

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Visualizatio n Types Area Scatter Pie Dual-axis Combination of Bar and Area Visualization Subtypes Vertical Area - Absolute Vertical Area - Stacked Vertical Area - 100% Stacked Horizontal Area - Absolute Horizontal Area - Stacked Horizontal Area - 100% Stacked Scatter Scatter Grid Bubble Bubble Grid Pie Ring Vertical Bar - Dual Axis Horizontal Bar - Dual Axis Vertical Line - Dual Axis Horizontal Line - Dual Axis Vertical Area - Dual Axis Horizontal Area - Dual Axis Bar and Area - Dual Axis None Description You can display your data using area graphs and select from a variety of graph styles, including absolute and stacked percent graphs. For steps, see Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106. You can display your data using scatter or bubble graphs with circular markers in a variety of different styles, such as in a grid layout. For steps, see Creating and adding a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 106. You can display the data in a colorful pie chart or ring pie chart. For steps, see Creating a Graph visualization with pie or ring graphs, page 115. You can display your data using a variety of dual axis graphs, using bars, lines, and areas. For steps, see Creating a Graph visualization with a dual-axis or combination graph, page 113. You can display the data in a graph that combines multiple types of graph items, such as a bar and area graph. For steps, see Creating a Graph visualization with a dual-axis or combination graph, page 113. Advanced Templates This section is available when creating a new dashboard. The following options are available: Blank Template: Select this option for a dashboard with one large content section. Tile and Two Contents: Select this option for dashboards that contain two columns of content. Four Contents: Select this option to create a dashboard divided into four content sections. Banded Template: Select this option to create a bill or listing, with address space at the top of the dashboard. The rows of data below the 262 Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 address are displayed using alternating background colors to help users view the data more easily. ipad Template: Select this option to create a dashboard with one content section, sized for display on an ipad. Show All dialog box If your dashboard contains more than one dataset, you can add data to a visualization, create metrics, filter data, group data, and so on using attributes and metrics belonging to different datasets. You can select attributes and metrics from each dataset in the dashboard using the Show All dialog box. For example, when creating a Graph visualization, you can quickly add attributes and metrics from several different datasets to the graph at the same time. The Show All dialog box contains a list of each dataset in the dashboard. You can expand or collapse a list of all available attributes and metrics in a dataset by clicking the arrow displayed to the left of the dataset's name. The attributes and metrics displayed in the list can vary based on the task you are performing. For example, attributes are used to group the rectangles in a Heat Map visualization. If you are selecting the attribute to use to group rectangles in a Heat Map visualization, attributes are displayed in the dialog box. In the Show All dialog box, select an attribute or metric. Depending on the task that you are performing, you may be able to make multiple selections. If you are adding attributes and metrics to a visualization, you can define the main dataset to use to display data in the visualization (called the grid source). By default, the name of the grid source is highlighted, with an icon displayed next to its name. To define the grid source, do one of the following: To define a dataset as the grid source, hover over the name of the dataset to use as the grid source, then click the Use As the Primary Source of Data icon. The name of the dataset is highlighted and an icon is displayed next to its name to signify that it is defined as the grid source. To define the visualization as having no grid source, if a dataset has the This is the Primary Source of Data icon displayed next to its name, click the icon. The icon disappears from the list of datasets and the visualization is defined as having no grid source. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for adding text and data to a dashboard 263

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide For background information, example images, and detailed steps to define the grid source for a visualization, see To define the grid source for a visualization, page 104. When finished, click OK to apply your changes. Interfaces for creating visualizations For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for creating and adding interactive visualizations to dashboards, see the following sections: Dashboard Editor: Graph, page 264 Dashboard Editor: Grid, page 268 Dashboard Editor: Heat Map, page 269 Dashboard Editor: Map, page 270 Dashboard Editor: Network, page 271 Dashboard Editor: Graph The Graph panel contains a list of all the attributes and metrics that are displayed as data in a Graph visualization. To display the Graph panel while viewing a dashboard, click the Graph visualization. From the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. Depending on the type of Graph visualization, you may be presented with different options, as follows: For dual-axis or combination graphs, the Category, Series, and Metrics areas are displayed. You can select options such as the data to display along the graph axes. For a list of options, see For dual-axis or combination graphs, page 265. For all other types of graphs, the Vertical Axis and Horizontal Axis areas are displayed. You can select options to slice and dice your data into multiple graphs, determine how graph items are sized and colored, determine which data is displayed on the graph axes, and so on. For a list of available options, see For all other types of graphs, page 265. 264 Interfaces for creating visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 For detailed steps to create a Graph visualization, see the appropriate link below: For steps to create a dual-axis or combination graph, see Creating a Graph visualization with a dual-axis or combination graph, page 113. For steps to create a pie or ring graph, see Creating a Graph visualization with pie or ring graphs, page 115. For steps to create all other types of graphs, including bar, area, and line graphs, see To create and add a Graph visualization to a dashboard, page 111. For dual-axis or combination graphs To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag an attribute or metric onto the Graph panel, so that a green indicator line is displayed in the location to add the attribute or metric to, as follows: Categories: To add an attribute to the categories, or groups of data usually found along the X-axis of the graph, drag the attribute onto the Categories area. Series: To add an attribute to the series, or groups of data usually found along the Y-axis of the graph, drag the attribute onto the Series area. Metrics: To add a metric to the graph, drag the metric to the Metrics area. The Metric Names attribute is automatically added to the Graph panel. To change whether the metrics are displayed on the categories or series of the graph, drag and drop the Metric Names attribute onto the Categories or Series area of the Graph panel. For all other types of graphs To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag attributes or metrics onto the appropriate area in the Graph panel, as described below. A green line indicates the location where the attributes and metrics will be added. Once you add metrics to the Graph panel, the Metric Names attribute is automatically added to the Graph panel. The Metric Names attribute contains the names of each metric placed on the Horizontal Axis area, Vertical Axis area, or Angle area in the Graph panel. You can determine how to display the names of metrics in the visualization by placing the Metric Names attribute on the areas described below. For steps to determine how 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating visualizations 265

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide metric names are displayed for pie or ring graphs, see To create and add a pie or ring graph to a dashboard, page 116. For general information on displaying data in a graph using the Metric Names attribute, see Displaying metric data in a visualization using the Metric Names attribute, page 108. The options available in the Graph panel can vary depending on the graph's type. Pie: Define options for pie and ring graphs, such as the number of wedges to display in the graph. Slice: To determine the number of wedges in a pie or ring graph, place at least one attribute on the Slice area. A wedge is displayed for each element of the attribute. Angle: To determine the size of wedges in a pie or ring graph, place at least one metric on the Angle area. Wedges that represent larger metric values are displayed as larger than wedges that represent smaller metric values. If you add multiple metrics to the Angle area, each metric in the Angle area is used to display a separate pie or ring graph in the visualization. Graph: Define display options, such as the data to add to the Y-axis and X-axis of the graph. Vertical Axis: To display data on the Y-axis, place attributes or metrics on the Vertical Axis area. If the Vertical Axis area contains at least one attribute and at least one metric, the attribute is automatically used to slice data into rows of graphs, with one row displayed for each element in the attribute. If the Vertical Axis area contains only attributes, each attribute is used either to slice data into rows of graphs, or to display values along the Y-axis. Click and drag the arrow icon in the Vertical Axis area to determine how to display the attributes, according to the following guidelines: Attributes displayed above the arrow icon are used to slice data in the visualization. For example, if the Year attribute contains the 2010, 2011, and 2012 elements and the Year attribute is displayed above the arrow icon, the Graph visualization is split into rows of graphs, with one row of graphs displayed for each year. If an attribute is displayed below the arrow icon, its elements are graphed and displayed on the Y-axis. Horizontal Axis: To display data on the X-axis, place attributes or metrics on the Horizontal Axis area. If the Horizontal Axis area contains at least one attribute and at least one metric, the attribute is 266 Interfaces for creating visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 automatically used to slice data into columns of graphs, with one column displayed for each element in the attribute. If the Horizontal Axis area contains only attributes, each attribute is used either to slice data into columns of graphs, or to display values along the X-axis. Click and drag the arrow icon in the Horizontal Axis area to determine how to display the attributes, according to the following guidelines: Attributes displayed above the arrow icon are used to slice data in the visualization. For example, if the Year attribute contains the 2010, 2011, and 2012 elements and the Year attribute is displayed above the arrow icon, the Graph visualization is split into columns of graphs, with one column of graphs displayed for each year. If an attribute is displayed below the arrow icon, its elements are graphed and displayed on the X-axis. Color By: To color the items in the graph, place attributes and metrics on the Color By area, as follows: To color the graph items based on an attribute, place at least one attribute on the Color By area. Each element in the attribute is displayed using a different color. For example, you can display the sales data for each employee using a different bar riser color. If you add more than one attribute to the Color By area, each combination of the attribute elements is displayed using a different color. To color graph items based on the value of a metric, place one metric on the Color By area. The graph items in the visualization are automatically shaded based on the value of the metric. For example, you can automatically color the bubbles in a bubble graph based on the value of the Profit metric, with larger profit values displayed using darker colors and smaller profit values displayed using lighter colors. Break By: You can display a separate graph item in the visualization for each element of an attribute. For example, you can display the revenue data for each region as a separate line graph, or display a bar riser for each year of data. To do so, place at least one attribute on the Break By area. Options: Define how to size graph items, and the data to display in graph tooltips. Size By: To have the graph items automatically sized based on the value of a metric, place one metric in the Size By area. Graph items corresponding to larger metric values are automatically displayed as larger in size, while graph items for small metric values are displayed 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating visualizations 267

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide as smaller in size. For example, in a line graph, lines representing larger metric values are displayed as thicker than lines representing smaller metric values. Tooltip: To display additional metrics in a tooltip when a user hovers the cursor over a graph item, place the metrics to display on the Tooltip area. To remove a report object from the visualization, hover the cursor over the name of the object, then click X. You can remove all the attributes and metrics in a visualization at once. To do so, from the toolbar, click the Clear Visualization icon. All attributes and metrics in the visualization are removed. Dashboard Editor: Grid The Grid panel contains a list of all the attributes and metrics that are displayed as data in a Grid visualization. For steps to create a Grid visualization, see Creating and adding a Grid visualization to a dashboard, page 123. To display the Grid panel while viewing a dashboard, click the Grid visualization. From the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag an attribute or metric onto the Grid panel, so that a green indicator line is displayed in the location to add the attribute or metric to, as follows: Rows: To add an attribute to the rows of the grid, drag the attribute onto the Rows area. Columns: To add an attribute to the columns of the grid, drag the attribute onto the Columns area. Metrics: To add a metric to the visualization, drag the metric onto the Metrics area. The Metric Names attribute is automatically added to the Grid panel. To change whether the metrics are displayed on the rows or columns of the grid, drag and drop the Metric Names attribute onto the Rows or Columns area of the Grid panel. To remove a report object from the visualization, hover the cursor over the name of the object, then click X. You can remove all the attributes and metrics in a visualization at once. To do so, from the toolbar, click the Clear Visualization icon. All attributes and metrics in the visualization are removed. 268 Interfaces for creating visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Dashboard Editor: Heat Map The Heat Map panel contains a list of all the attributes and metrics that are displayed as data in a Heat Map visualization. For steps to create a Heat Map visualization, see Creating and adding a Heat Map visualization to a dashboard, page 124. To display the Heat Map panel while viewing a dashboard, click the Heat Map visualization. From the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag an attribute or metric onto the Heat Map panel, so that a green indicator line is displayed in the location to add the attribute or metric to, as follows: Grouping: To display rectangles in the Heat Map, click and drag at least one attribute onto the Grouping area. For example, if the attribute is Year, a rectangle for each year is displayed in the visualization. You can drag additional attributes onto the Grouping area to group the rectangles in the visualization into larger areas. For example, the Region attribute contains the element Mid-Atlantic and the State attribute contains the elements New York and New Jersey. If Region is placed above State in the Grouping area, an area called Mid-Atlantic is displayed in the visualization, with the rectangles New York and New Jersey inside. You can add additional attributes to further group the rectangles in the Heat Map. Size By: To size each rectangle based on the value of a metric, click and drag the metric onto the Size By area. This metric is used to determine the size of each rectangle, with rectangles for larger metric values displayed as larger than rectangles for small metric values. Color By: To have the rectangles colored automatically based on the elements in an attribute or on the value of a metric, click and drag the attribute or metric onto the Color By area. Tooltip: To display additional metric values in a tooltip when a user hovers the cursor over a rectangle, click and drag the metrics to display onto the Tooltip area. To remove a report object from the visualization, hover the cursor over the name of the object, then click X. You can remove all the attributes and metrics in a visualization at once. To do so, from the toolbar, click the Clear Visualization icon. All attributes and metrics in the visualization are removed. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating visualizations 269

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Dashboard Editor: Map The Map panel contains a list of all the attributes and metrics that are displayed as data in a Map visualization. To display the Map panel while viewing a dashboard, click the visualization. From the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. To display map markers in the visualization, you must provide an attribute that contains the location of each map marker to display. For details on providing this information and steps to create and display a Map visualization, see Creating and adding a Map visualization to a dashboard, page 126. To add data to the visualization, from the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag an attribute or metric onto the Map panel, so that a green indicator line is displayed in the location to add the attribute or metric to, as follows: To display map markers in the visualization, click and drag the attribute that contains the location of each map marker to display onto the Geo Attribute area. You can display the map markers in the visualization as images or bubble markers. Do one of the following: To display the map markers as images, perform the following steps: a If the Color By area is not displayed, click the Color By icon. The Size By area becomes the Color By area. b From the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag the metric to use to color the map markers to the Color By area. To display the map markers as bubble markers, perform the following steps: a If the Size By area is not displayed, click the Size By icon. The Color By area becomes the Size By area. b From the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag the metric to use to size the map markers to the Size By area. You can include additional attribute or metric information to be displayed in an Information Window when a user clicks a map marker in the visualization. To do so, from the Dataset Objects panel, click and drag the attributes or metrics to display in the tooltip to the Tooltip area. To remove an attribute or metric from the visualization, hover the cursor over the name of the object, then click X. You can remove all the attributes 270 Interfaces for creating visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 and metrics in a visualization at once. To do so, from the toolbar, click the Clear Visualization icon. All attributes and metrics in the visualization are removed. Dashboard Editor: Network The Network panel contains a list of all the attributes and metrics that are displayed as data in a Network visualization. For steps to create a Network visualization, see Creating and adding a Network visualization to a dashboard, page 129. To display the Network panel while viewing a dashboard, click the Network visualization. From the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. To add data to the visualization, from the My Data panel, click and drag an attribute or metric onto the Network panel, so that a green indicator line is displayed in the location to add the attribute or metric to, as follows: Edges are drawn from attribute elements that belong to the From Item area to related attribute elements that belong to the To Item area. Attribute elements are considered related to each other if they are included in the same data row when the data in the visualization is displayed as a grid. Network From Item: To display each node at which an edge in the visualization begins, click and drag the attribute that contains the name of each node onto the From Item area. To Item: To display each node at which an edge in the visualization ends, click and drag the attribute that contains the name of each node onto the To Item area. Color and Size Edge Color: To have each edge colored automatically based on the value of a metric, drag the metric onto the Edge Color area. Edge Size: To size each edge based on the value of a metric, with edges for larger metric values displayed as thicker than edges for smaller metric values, drag the metric onto the Edge Size area. Item Size: To size each node based on the value of a metric, with nodes for larger metric values displayed as larger than nodes for smaller metric values, drag the metric onto the Item Size area. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating visualizations 271

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To remove a report object from the visualization, hover the cursor over the name of the object, then click X. You can remove all the attributes and metrics in a visualization at once. To do so, from the toolbar, click the Clear Visualization icon. All attributes and metrics in the visualization are removed. Interfaces for formatting visualizations For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for formatting the display of visualizations, see the following sections: Dashboard Editor: Graph: Properties, page 272 Dashboard Editor: Grid: Properties, page 277 Dashboard Editor: Heat Map: Properties, page 278 Dashboard Editor: Map: Properties, page 280 Dashboard Editor: Network: Properties, page 280 Axis Scale dialog box, page 281 Threshold Editor, page 282 Dashboard Editor: Graph: Properties You can format a Graph visualization using the options available on the Properties panel. For example, you can determine whether to show a legend for the graph, or define the minimum and maximum values to display on the graph axes. The options available may vary depending on the type of Graph visualization you have created, as described below. For steps to format dual-axis and combination graphs, see To format a dual-axis or combination graph, page 162. For steps to format other types of graphs, including bar, area, and line graphs, see To select formatting options for a Graph visualization, page 162. If the Subtype and Maximum Categories options are displayed, you can choose to display data in the visualization using a specific graph style, or 272 Interfaces for formatting visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 determine the number of items to display on the categories of the graph. The following options are available: Subtype: Select the graph subtype to use to display your data. Maximum Categories: Type the maximum number of items to display in the categories of the graph (data usually found on the X-axis of a graph, which typically contains attribute data). If the General, Max Size, and Min Size sections are displayed, you can determine the shape used to display graph items, whether to have Analytics Express optimize space in the visualization by automatically sizing graph items, and so on. The following options are available: General Fit To: Determine how to size the visualization. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Content: Size the visualization so that all graph items are displayed at once. Panel (default): Size the visualization to take up all available space on the visualization's panel. Axis Scale: Determine how Analytics Express calculates the minimum and maximum values to display on the axes of each graph in the visualization. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Global (default): Each graph is displayed on a horizontal axis that uses the same minimum and maximum X-axis values as every other graph in the visualization. Each graph is displayed on a vertical axis that uses the same minimum and maximum Y-axis values as every other graph in the visualization. Per row/column: Display each graph using the same minimum and maximum Y-axis values across each column of graphs, and the same X-axis minimum and maximum values across each row of graphs. Per Cell: Allow Analytics Express to display each graph using the minimum and maximum axis values best suited to display the data contained in the graph. Custom: Specify custom axis formatting options, such as selecting different minimum and maximum axis values for specific metrics in the visualization. The Axis Scale dialog box opens. Select the appropriate options to define the axis formatting options, then 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting visualizations 273

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide click OK to apply your changes. For details, see Axis Scale dialog box, page 281. Shape: Select the shape to use to display graph items in the visualization, such as line, bar, tick, or pie. The options available may vary depending on the type of graph displayed in the visualization. Subtype: Select the graph subtype to use to display your data, such as Absolute or Clustered. When you provide enough data for a graph visualization to be displayed using more than one graph subtype, this option determines which graph subtype is used to display the data. You can select a specific subtype, or allow Analytics Express to determine how to display the data. For example, a bar graph contains one attribute on the X-axis of the graph, and one metric on the Y-axis. By default, if you add an attribute to the Break By area, a stacked bar graph is displayed. You can choose to display the graph as clustered instead. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: The options available may vary depending on the type of graph displayed in the visualization. Automatic: Allow Analytics Express to determine which type of graph to display. Absolute: Display the elements as absolute. Clustered: Display the elements as clustered. Stacked: Display the elements as stacked. 100% Stacked: Display the elements in a stacked percent graph. Data Labels: Show or hide data labels for graph items in the visualization. For example, if your visualization contains a vertical bar graph, with the number of delayed flights for several airlines each displayed as a separate bar, you can display text showing the number of delayed flights for each airline over the corresponding bar in the visualization. Data labels allow you to display pertinent values or text for each element in the visualization without having to hover the cursor over each element in the visualization to view a tooltip. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Hide (default): Do not display data labels. Show values: Show data labels using the metric values associated with each graph item. In the example above, the number of delayed flights would be displayed over each bar in the visualization. 274 Interfaces for formatting visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Show text: Show data labels using the attribute values associated with each graph item. In the example above, the name of the airline would be displayed over each bar in the visualization. This option is available if you have added an attribute to the Break By area. Banding: Apply color banding to alternating rows in the visualization. Banding rows can make reading multiple rows of data easier for the user. Legend: Display or hide the legend in the visualization. From the drop-down list, select either Show (default) or Hide. Column Alignment: If your visualization displays graphs across multiple columns, you can determine the horizontal alignment of column labels for graphs in the visualization. Select whether to align items to the Left, Center, or Right. Row Alignment: If your visualization displays graphs across multiple rows, you can determine the horizontal and vertical alignment of row labels for graphs in the visualization, as follows: Select whether to align items to the Left, Center, or Right. Select whether to align items to the Top, Center, or Bottom. Max Size Type: Specify how Analytics Express determines the maximum size of graph items in the visualization. By default, Analytics Express attempts to automatically size graph items in the visualization to optimize the graph display. For example, in a bubble graph, Analytics Express attempts to display large bubbles for large metric values and small bubbles for small metric values, without hiding smaller bubbles under large ones if they overlap. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Automatic (default): Allow Analytics Express to automatically size graph items to optimize the graph display. Auto Fit: Automatically size graph items to touch each neighboring graph item. This option is available if graph items are displayed in a grid format. Manual: Manually select the size of graph items. Type the maximum size of the graph items as a ratio between.01 and 1. For example, type 1 to display the largest bubble markers at the maximum size at which the visualization can display graph items. If all graph items in the visualization are the same size (there is no metric in the Size By area), this value determines the size of all elements displayed in the visualization. If the graph items are 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting visualizations 275

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Min Size automatically sized based on the value of a metric (there is a metric in the Size By area), this value is the size of the largest graph item displayed in the visualization. Type: Specify how Analytics Express determines the minimum size of graph items in the visualization. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Automatic (default): Allow Analytics Express to automatically size graph items to optimize the graph display. Proportional: Automatically size graph items as proportional to the largest values displayed in the visualization. Manual: Manually size graph items. In the Value field, type a percentage. The graph item for the smallest metric value in the visualization will be displayed as a percentage of the size of the largest element. For example, to display the smallest value using a graph item 20 percent of the size of the largest graph item in the visualization, type.2. Borders and Lines Outside Border: Display or hide a single border around the entire visualization area (minus the graph legend). From the drop-down list, select either Show (default) or Hide. Axes: Determine whether the X-axis and Y-axis of each graph in the visualization are displayed. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Show Both (default): Display both the X-axis and the Y-axis. Show None: Hide both the X-axis and the Y-axis. Show Only X: Display only the X-axis. Show Only Y: Display only the Y-axis. Matrix Lines: Determine whether the horizontal and vertical boundary lines between each graph in the visualization are displayed. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Show All (default): Display all boundary lines. Show None: Hide all boundary lines. Show Only Horizontal: Display only horizontal boundary lines. 276 Interfaces for formatting visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Show Only Vertical: Display only vertical boundary lines. Grid Lines: Determine whether to show or hide grid lines in each graph in the visualization. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Automatic (default): Allow Analytics Express to determine whether to show grid lines. Show: Show grid lines in the visualization. Hide: Hide grid lines in the visualization. To display the Properties panel for a Graph visualization 1 Click the name of a dashboard to run it, then click the visualization. 2 From the Show menu, select Properties. The Properties panel is displayed. Dashboard Editor: Grid: Properties You can format a Grid visualization, to determine whether to show banding in rows in the grid, whether to merge row and column headers, and so on. For steps to format a Grid visualization, see Formatting a Grid visualization, page 169. The following options are available: Show Banding: Apply color banding to alternating rows in the visualization. Banding rows can make reading multiple rows of data easier for the user. Width: Determine how to size the visualization. The options are: Fit to Contents (default): Size the visualization so that all graph items are displayed. Fit to Window: Size the visualization to take up all available screen space. Fixed: Allow users to manually specify the width of each column in the visualization. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting visualizations 277

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Lock: Determine whether to prevent the row or column headers in the grid from being realigned or shifted. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Columns (default): Lock the display of column headers. Rows: Lock the display of row headers. Rows and Columns: Lock the display of row and column headers. None: Allow users to realign and shift row and column headers. Merge: Determine whether to merge row or column headers that are repeated in the grid. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Columns (default): Merge column headers. Rows: Merge row headers. Rows and Columns: Merge row and column headers. None: Do not merge row or column headers. To display the Properties panel for a Grid visualization 1 Click the name of a dashboard to run it, then click the visualization. 2 From the Show menu, select Properties. The Properties panel is displayed. Dashboard Editor: Heat Map: Properties You can format a Heat Map visualization, to enable deleting rectangles from the visualization, to select the algorithm used to size and position rectangles in the visualization, and so on. For steps to format a Heat Map visualization, see Formatting a Heat Map visualization, page 170. The following options are available: Delete: Select this option to allow rectangles to be deleted from the visualization. A user will be able to delete rectangles from the visualization by hovering the cursor over a rectangle and clicking X. Zoom: Select this option to enable users to zoom in and out of rectangles in the visualization by clicking them. 278 Interfaces for formatting visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Show Legend: Select this option to have a legend displayed in the visualization. Show Labels: You can choose whether to label each rectangle with the name of the attribute element it represents. From the drop-down list, select one of the following options: On (default): Show the rectangle labels. Off: Hide the rectangle labels. Proportional: Display the rectangle labels with the size of each label reflecting the size of the rectangle. Rectangles that contain large values will be displayed with larger labels than rectangles that contain small values. Show metric values: Select this option to display the metric values for each rectangle in the visualization. For example, if you add Region, Profit, and Revenue to the Heat Map visualization, with rectangles displayed for each customer region, you can select the Show metric values check box to display the profit and revenue data for the Mid-Atlantic region in the Mid-Atlantic rectangle, the profit and revenue data for the Northeast region in the Northeast rectangle, and so on. Layout: Determine how rectangles in the visualization are sized and positioned. The options are: Keep readability, not element order (default): Size the rectangles in the Heat Map visualization to make them as easy to read as possible. Balance readability and order: Size and position the rectangles to make them as easy to read as possible, while still attempting to display them in the same order in which they appear in Heat Map panel. Keep element order, not readability: Position the rectangles in the Heat Map visualization in the same order in which they appear in the visualization's Drop Zones panel. To display the Properties panel for a Heat Map visualization 1 Click the name of a dashboard to run it, then click the visualization. 2 From the Show menu, select Properties. The Properties panel is displayed. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting visualizations 279

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Dashboard Editor: Map: Properties You can format a Map visualization to determine whether markers on the map are clustered together and displayed as a circle when a large number of map markers must be displayed in the same area. Users can double-click on a cluster to zoom in on the area and display individual map markers. The following option is available: Clustering: Determine whether to cluster map markers when a large number of map markers must be displayed in the same map area. The options are: Automatic: Allow Analytics Express to determine whether to cluster map markers. On: Display markers on the map as clustered. Off (default): Display markers on the map without clustering. To display the Properties panel for a Map visualization 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization. 2 From the Show menu, select Properties. The Properties panel is displayed. Dashboard Editor: Network: Properties Once you create a Network visualization, you can customize the display of the visualization, such as the size of the font used to show labels for nodes in the visualization, or whether to display an animation when switching between node layout styles. For steps to format a Network visualization, see Formatting a Network visualization, page 174. The following options are available: Show Node Label: Show descriptive labels for nodes in the visualization. Show Edge Direction: Display edges in the visualization as arrows to show the node at which each edge starts and ends. Animate Layout Transition: Show an animation when a user changes the layout style used to display nodes in the visualization. 280 Interfaces for formatting visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Node Size Aggregation: Select the function to use to aggregate the metric values used to determine node size in the visualization. To display the Properties panel for a Network visualization 1 Click the name of a dashboard to run it, then click the visualization. 2 From the Show menu, select Properties. The Properties panel is displayed. Axis Scale dialog box You can format a Graph visualization to determine how the minimum and maximum values are calculated for the axes of each graph in the visualization. To do so, use the options in the Axis Scale dialog box. The following options are available: The options available may vary based on your selections and the number and placement of metrics displayed on the X-axis and Y-axis of your visualization. Scale For: From the drop-down list, select the metrics to specify axis formatting options for, as follows: All Metrics: Format options for all metrics in the visualization. X Axis Metrics: Format options for all metrics on the X-axis. Y Axis Metrics: Format options for all metrics on the Y-axis. Metric Name: Format a specific metric. Set To: To determine how to display the axes for the metrics selected in the Scale For drop-down list above, select one of the following: Global (default): The selected metrics are each displayed on a horizontal axis that uses the same minimum and maximum X-axis values across each graph in the visualization. The selected metrics are each displayed on a vertical axis that uses the same minimum and maximum Y-axis values across each graph in the visualization. Per row/column: Display the selected metrics using the same minimum and maximum Y-axis values across each column of graphs, and the same X-axis values across each row of graphs. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting visualizations 281

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Per Cell: Allow Analytics Express to display the selected metrics using the axis values best suited to display the metric data. Custom: Define specific minimum and maximum values to use to display the selected metrics. In the Min and Max fields, type the minimum and maximum axis values. For example, if you selected Profit in the Scale For drop-down list, and you want to display the Profit metric on an axis that includes values from 0 to 5 million, type 0 in the Min field and 5000000 in the Max field. Click OK when finished to apply your changes. Threshold Editor You can highlight metric data in a visualization by applying formatting to the visualization when data fulfills a specific condition. For example, a Grid visualization displays revenue data for different geographical regions. You can display revenue values less than $500,000 in red, or replace values greater than $5,000,000 with a company logo. To do so, you define a threshold. Once a metric value meets the threshold condition, the formatting is automatically applied to the value. The following are general steps to add a threshold to a visualization. For steps to add a threshold to a specific type of visualization, see the appropriate link below: Formatting a Graph visualization, page 161 Formatting a Grid visualization, page 169 Formatting a Heat Map visualization, page 170 Formatting a Network visualization, page 174 The following options are available: Show: Select the type of formatting to apply to metric values that meet the threshold condition, as follows: To create a threshold to change the color used to display metric values, select a set of colors to apply to the values, such as Green or Red. To create a threshold to replace metric values with an image, select Images. From the second drop-down list, select the set of images to replace values with. 282 Interfaces for formatting visualizations 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Based On: Select the metric to define the threshold condition based on. From the next drop-down list, select one of the following: To create a threshold based on the value of the metric, select Value. For example, you can display metric values greater than 5 million in blue. To create a threshold based on the top x metric values, select Highest. For example, you can display the top 5 metric values in red. To create a threshold based on the bottom x metric values, select Lowest. For example, you can display the bottom 5 metric values in green. To create a threshold based on the top x percent of metric values, select Highest %. For example, you can display the top 10% of metric values with a green arrow. To create a threshold based on the bottom x percent of metric values, select Lowest %. For example, you can display the bottom 50% of metric values with a red arrow. Break By: Select the attribute level at which to restart counting rank or percent values for the metric. To continue counting without restarting, select None. This option is available for thresholds based on rank or percent values. Each band displayed in the dialog box represents a different range of metric values. To modify the range covered by a band, do one of the following: To increase or decrease the range of values covered by the band, click and drag the thumb left or right along the slider. To change the end of a band to a specific value, double-click the thumb at the end of the band, then type the value and press ENTER. The bands are updated. For thresholds that use colors rather than images, you can add or edit bands, as described below: To create a new band, click on the location on the band to add a new thumb to. The band is divided into two separate bands. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting visualizations 283

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To change the color applied to the range of values covered by a band, double-click the band or click the Edit Color icon, then select the new color from the palette. To delete a band, hover the cursor over the band, then click the Delete icon. The band is deleted. Prerequisite If the visualization's Drop Zones panel is not displayed, from the Show menu, select Edit Visualization. The name of the Drop Zones panel for a visualization may vary depending on the type of visualization you are modifying. For example, the Drop Zones panel appears as the Grid panel when modifying a Grid visualization, and appears as the Network panel when modifying a Network visualization. To display the Thresholds Editor 1 In a dashboard, click the visualization to add the threshold to. 2 From the visualization's Drop Zones panel, hover the cursor over the name of the metric to define a threshold on, then click the arrow icon on the right. Select Thresholds. 3 Select the appropriate options to define the threshold, as described above. When finished, click OK to apply your changes. Interfaces for adding interactivity to a dashboard For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for additional ways for users to interact with dashboard content, see the following sections: Filtering Options dialog box, page 285 284 Interfaces for adding interactivity to a dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Filtering Options dialog box You can enable users to filter, drill, or select data in one visualization (the source) to update the data displayed in one or more additional visualizations (the targets) on the panel. For example, when a user chooses to filter data in the source to include only data for the Movies category, the data in the target is automatically updated to display only data for Movies. You can allow users to do the following: Filter the data displayed in the target by filtering or drilling on data in the source. Filter the data displayed in the target by selecting elements in the source. Highlight the data displayed in the target by selecting elements in the source. The following options are available: Apply filtering on VisualizationName to the following targets: Select the check box next to each target visualization to update when users filter or drill on data in the source visualization. Enable filtering on selection: Once you have selected at least one target visualization to apply filtering to, you can allow users to filter or highlight data in the target by selecting elements in the source visualization. Do one of the following: To enable users to filter the data in the target by selecting elements in the source, select the check box. To enable users to highlight the data in the target by selecting elements in the source, clear the check box. If a drop-down list is displayed next to the Enable Filtering on Selection option, the visualization already allows users to update data in the target by filtering or drilling on a single, specific attribute in the source. The options are: For Attribute AttributeName (where AttributeName is the name of the attribute): Continue allowing users to update data in the target by filtering or drilling based on the attribute already defined for the source. For All Data: Allow users to update data in the target by filtering or drilling on any data in the source. Allow users to clear all selections: If you enable users to filter the data in the target by selecting elements in the source, you can enable users to 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for adding interactivity to a dashboard 285

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide undo their filtering selection. Select this option to allow users to clear their selection in the source visualization. For example, if the source is a Grid visualization that allows users to select from elements of Year to filter data in the target, the user can click the Year header to clear his selection and display data for all years at once in the target. To define the filtering options for a visualization 1 Hover the cursor over the visualization to use as the source, then click the arrow icon in the top right and select Use as Filter. The Filtering Options dialog box is displayed. 2 Select the appropriate options to define the filtering options, as described above. 3 Click OK to apply your changes. Interfaces for creating metrics For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for creating metrics in a dashboard, see the following sections: New Metric dialog box, page 286 Select a Function dialog box, page 287 Function Arguments dialog box, page 288 New Metric dialog box You can create and add new metrics to a dashboard using the New Metric dialog box. For example, you can create a new metric by subtracting one metric in the dashboard from another metric, such as Revenue Forecast - Revenue. For steps to create a metric, see Creating a new metric in a dashboard from scratch, page 141. 286 Interfaces for creating metrics 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 The following options are available: Metric Name: Type a name for the metric. Formula: Type the metric's formula in the Formula field. You can type values and arithmetic operators directly. Available Objects: Display a list of attributes and metrics that can be added to the metric. Double-click an object to add it to the metric formula. The name of the object is added and displayed in the Formula field to the right. You can expand or collapse the list of attributes or metrics by clicking the arrow icon next to Attributes or Metrics. Clear : Click this icon to clear the contents of the Formula field. Functions : Click this icon to select a function to add to the metric's formula. Define the function by selecting the appropriate options in the Select a Function dialog box. For details, see Select a Function dialog box, page 287. When finished, click OK to create and add your new metric to the dashboard. Select a Function dialog box You can create a metric based on a function or add a function to the formula of a metric in a dashboard using the Select a Function dialog box. The following options are available: Select a Category: From the drop-down list, select a category to narrow the list of functions available in the Select a Function pane below. See the list below for the names and descriptions of each available function category. Select a Function: Type the name of the function in the field to narrow the list of functions available in the Select a Function pane below. To clear your search, click X in the field. In the pane, select the name of the function. A description of the function is displayed at the bottom of the Select a Function dialog box. You can click Details to see a description of the function, examples, and syntax information. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating metrics 287

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide The available functions are grouped in the following categories: Basic Functions are basic mathematical functions like average, greatest, least, maximum, minimum, first, last, and so on. They are among the most commonly used functions when creating a calculation. Date and Time Functions provide date and time information, such as current date, the day of the week of a particular date, and so on. Financial Functions provide many standard financial calculations. Internal Functions include banding functions, which are used to differentiate the data displayed, and pass-through functions like ApplySimple. Math Functions contains more complex functions than the simple operators found in the Basic functions category. This category includes exponential, logarithmic, and trigonometric functions. Null/Zero Functions determine how nulls and zeros are displayed. OLAP Functions are relative functions, such as rank, running sum, moving average, and so on. Rank and NTile Functions are very similar to OLAP functions in behavior. The primary difference is that rank functions use only metrics, not attributes, for sorting. Statistical Functions include a wide range of functions designed to provide you with the tools to perform statistical analysis on your data. String Functions work on text strings, performing tasks such as trimming and concatenating. Once you have selected your function, click Next and select the appropriate options to define any arguments the function requires to calculate data. Click Finish to apply your changes. Function Arguments dialog box You can select the appropriate arguments to provide data for a function using the Function Arguments dialog box. Select the appropriate options to define each argument required for the function. Select Finish to apply your changes. 288 Interfaces for creating metrics 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed dashboards For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed dashboards, see the following sections: Document Editor, page 289 Document Editor: Layout area, page 290 Document Editor: Dataset Objects, page 290 Document Editor: Document Structure, page 291 Document Editor: Grouping, page 291 Document Editor: Notes, page 292 Document Editor You can create, customize, and save dashboards using the Document Editor. To do so, view the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. The following options are available: Layout Area: The Layout area is where you place text fields, grids and graphs, images, widgets, and so on. These items are then displayed when the dashboard is viewed, printed, exported, emailed, and so on. Dataset Objects: In the Dataset Objects panel on the left, you choose attributes and metrics to include on the dashboard. Document Structure: You can quickly view a list of the dashboard's contents, including dashboard sections, text fields, grids and graphs, images, widgets, and so on. Notes: Use notes and comments to communicate with other users about the dashboard. You can display any notes or comments that have been added to the dashboard or add your own notes using the Notes panel on the left. Grouping panel: If your dashboard contains large amounts of data, you can group the data into smaller, more manageable subsets based on the elements of an attribute using the Grouping panel at the top. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed dashboards 289

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide The following options are displayed at the bottom of the Document Editor: Cancel: Cancel any changes that you made to the dashboard, and exit the dashboard. Refresh Data: Refresh your data. Save: Save the changes that you made to your dashboard. Save & Close: Save the changes that you made to your dashboard, and close the dashboard. To run and view a dashboard in the Document Editor 1 Click the name of the dashboard to run it. If the dashboard is not displayed in the Document Editor, the dashboard was designed as a quick, easy-to-create dashboard and displays in the Dashboard Editor instead. See Interfaces for analyzing data in a quick, easy-to-create dashboard, page 252 for details. Document Editor: Layout area The Layout area is where you place text fields, grid and graphs, images, widgets, and so on. These items are then displayed when the dashboard is viewed, printed, exported, emailed, and so on. To add data to the dashboard, drag objects from the Dataset Objects and drop them into this area. The Layout area provides an alignment grid to help you control the placement and alignment of objects. If your layout expands past the width of a single page, a dotted line is displayed to show the page break. Document Editor: Dataset Objects In the Dataset Objects panel, you choose attributes and metrics to include on the dashboard. To display the Dataset Objects panel, from the Tools menu, select Dataset Objects. 290 Interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 To add data to the dashboard, drag and drop objects from the Dataset Objects panel onto the Layout area at the center of the interface. Document Editor: Document Structure You can quickly view a list of the dashboard's contents, including dashboard sections, text fields, grids and graphs, images, widgets, and so on. You can select an object in the Layout area by selecting the name of the object in the Document Structure panel. Expanding an item in the Document Structure panel displays the names of each object included in the corresponding dashboard section or panel stack. For example, in the dashboard represented in the image below, the dashboard contains four panel stacks. Panel Stack 1 contains text fields and a rectangle. To display the Document Structure panel, from the Tools menu, select Document Structure. Document Editor: Grouping If your dashboard contains large amounts of data, you can group the data into smaller, more manageable subsets based on the elements of an attribute 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed dashboards 291

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide using the Grouping panel. Grouping records together helps users who read the dashboard to understand the data better. Grouping the data sets up a type of hierarchy within the dashboard, and an inherent or implied sort order for the data. The data is first sorted by the leftmost field in the Grouping panel, then by the next field, and so on. To reorder the grouping, you can rearrange the items in the Grouping panel. To display the Grouping panel, from the Tools menu, select Grouping. To add a group, drag and drop any attribute from the Dataset Objects panel onto the Grouping panel. This adds a corresponding pair of header and footer sections to the Layout area. For example, if you group your dashboard by Category, a Category header section and a Category footer section are added to the dashboard. Document Editor: Notes Use notes and comments to communicate with other users about the dashboard. You can display any notes or comments that have been added to the dashboard or add your own notes using the Notes panel on the left. The notes can include details about the dashboard, information on how it was created, reasons to use it, queries about the data displayed, a back-and-forth conversation about designing the dashboard, or anything useful to you and other users. To display the Notes panel, from the Tools menu, select Notes. The Notes panel contains: A display of all the notes that have been added to the dashboard. A text field to type new notes. Prerequisites You must have the View Notes privilege to see any notes that have been added to the dashboard. You must have the Add Notes privilege to add new notes, but you do not need write access control on the dashboard. You must have the Edit Notes privilege to change existing notes. 292 Interfaces for creating and editing customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 To add a note to a dashboard 1 Click the name of the dashboard to run it. 2 In the bottom text field in the Notes panel, type the text of the note to add. You can type up to 1024 characters in each separate note, to a maximum of 65,535 characters for all the notes in the dashboard. 3 Click Submit. The new note appears in the top pane of the Notes panel. To edit notes in a dashboard 1 Click the name of the dashboard to run it. 2 In the Notes panel, click Edit. 3 In the top pane, type over the existing text or add new text. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for defining the look and feel of a dashboard, including margins, layout, and page set up options, see the following sections: About the Properties dialog box, page 294 Properties dialog box, Page Setup, Page, page 295 Properties dialog box, Page Setup, Margins, page 296 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Layout, page 297 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Color and Borders, page 297 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Sections, page 298 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Mobile, page 298 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 293

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Advanced, page 299 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Document, page 300 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Export, page 301 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Table of Contents, page 302 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Watermark, page 304 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Mobile, page 306 Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Advanced, page 306 About the Properties dialog box The Properties dialog box contains options allowing you to modify the look and feel of a dashboard. You can modify the dashboard pages in the Page Setup section, the layout in the Layout Properties section, and the overall properties in the Document Properties section. The Properties dialog box contains the following groups of options: Page Setup Page: Specify the size, scaling, width, and height of the dashboard pages. Margins: Specify the margin sizes of the dashboard. Layout Properties Layout: Specify general layout options, such as the tab name of the layout and whether to automatically maintain targets for selectors in the layout. Colors and Borders: Specify the fill color and borders. Sections: Specify which sections to display in the dashboard. Mobile: Specify layout options for a dashboard displayed on a mobile device, such as whether the layout can be displayed in a portrait or landscape orientation on the mobile device. Advanced: Specify additional options, such as whether to enable incremental fetch and the level at which incremental fetch is applied to data in a layout. 294 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Document Properties Document: Specify general properties, such as the default grid autostyle and the dashboard width mode. You can also choose the display and export modes. Export: Specify exporting preferences, such as whether to export all layouts in the dashboard. Table of Contents: Specify table of contents preferences, such as font formatting for the table of contents topics. Watermark: Specify whether to display no watermark on this dashboard, the project watermark, or a dashboard watermark that you create. Mobile: Specify display options for a dashboard viewed on a mobile device, such as whether tabs are used to select a layout in a multi-layout dashboard. Advanced: Specify additional dashboard settings, such as whether to display one layout tab at a time on the dashboard. Properties dialog box, Page Setup, Page The Page section in the Properties dialog box lets you modify the page properties of a dashboard. All the above settings affect the dashboard end result in PDF format. The following options are available: Paper Size: Specify the size of the paper, such as Letter (the default) or Legal. Changing this property alters the values for both Width and Height. Width and Height take priority over Paper Size. Therefore, if you increase one of them beyond the Paper Size, the Paper Size setting changes accordingly. Width: Specify the width of the page. Height: Specify the height of the page. Orientation: Specify either Portrait (8.5" wide by 11" high for letter-sized paper) or Landscape (11" wide by 8.5" high). The default is Portrait. Changing the Orientation alters the values for both Width and Height. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 295

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Scaling: Sets how to scale the dashboard: Adjust to: Scale the dashboard by the selected percent. Use it to increase or decrease the scale of the dashboard. The default setting is 100%. Fit to page: Scale the dashboard to the selected number of pages. You can set both the number of pages wide, for horizontal scaling, and tall, for vertical scaling. This setting ensures that the dashboard fits within the parameters of the page, but does not increase the size of the dashboard. If the dashboard is already smaller than the set width and height, it does expand. Scale Page Header/Footer: Determine whether the scaling is applied to the page header and footer. If the check box is cleared, the contents of the page header and footer are printed at the size specified in the Property List, regardless of the scaling percentage applied to the rest of the dashboard. Horizontal fit: If the objects on a dashboard extend beyond the width of a single page, the objects that overflow are printed on the next page. You can change this default setting by selecting an Overflow setting from the drop-down list: Next page: Horizontal overflow is printed on the next page. Below: Horizontal overflow is printed on the same page, directly below the other objects. Properties dialog box, Page Setup, Margins The Margins section of the Properties dialog box allows you to adjust the size of margins. The following options are available: Left: The distance between the left side of the page and the left side of the dashboard or the left edge of the border. Right: The distance between the right side of the page and the right side of the dashboard or the right edge of the border. Top: The distance between the top of the page and the top of the dashboard or the top of the border. Bottom: The distance between the bottom of the page and the bottom of the dashboard or the bottom of the border. 296 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Layout The Layout section in the Properties dialog box lets you define options for a dashboard layout, as described below: Tab name: Specify the name of the layout to be displayed on the layout tabs. Use shared Page Header/Footer: Determine whether to display the page header and footer for the layout. Automatically maintain targets for all selectors in this layout: Determine whether selectors in the layout automatically target all grids, graphs, and panel stacks in their dashboard section. Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Color and Borders You can use the Color and Borders options to modify colors and borders in a dashboard, as described below: Fill: Specify the following to determine how the object is formatted. Color: Specify a color with which to fill the selected object by clicking the arrow on the color menu and selecting a color. You can: Access additional colors by clicking More Colors. Apply a color gradient, which is a combination of two colors, to the object. To do so, select Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box that opens, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style in which to display the gradient to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Borders: Select the type of border to draw around the object. None: No borders appear around the selected object. This is the default setting. All: Borders surround the selected object on all sides. From the drop-down list, select a line style for the border. From the color palette, select a color for the border. Custom: Determine whether the left, right, top, and bottom borders are displayed, and if so, the type of line and color used for each border. You can also define the fill color or border color by typing the hex code of the required color in the Hex field. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 297

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Sections The Sections category in the Properties dialog box allows you to choose whether to display or hide various sections of the dashboard. All the sections of the dashboard are listed in the Sections area. Select the check boxes of each section to display in the dashboard and clear the check boxes for any sections to hide in the dashboard. To display all the sections in the dashboard, click Display All Sections. In addition, the following options are available: Sections Docked (Mobile Only): Determine whether to dock the Page Header or Page Footer sections to the top or bottom of the dashboard. Page Header: Select this option to dock the page header to the top of the screen. When the dashboard is displayed on a mobile device, the docked page header is always displayed at the top of the screen, remaining in place as the user scrolls up or down in the dashboard. Page Footer: Select this option to dock the page footer to the bottom of the screen. When the dashboard is displayed on a mobile device, the docked page footer is always displayed at the bottom of the screen, remaining in place as the user scrolls up or down in the dashboard. Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Mobile You can define layout options for a dashboard displayed on an ipad device with MicroStrategy Mobile, such as whether the layout can be displayed in a portrait or landscape orientation on the mobile device. The options are described below: Mobile Supported Orientations: Specify the orientations in which the layout can be displayed on a mobile device. The options are: Portrait and Landscape: The layout can be displayed in a portrait or landscape view. Portrait Only: The layout can only be displayed in a portrait view (height is greater than width). Landscape Only: The layout can only be displayed in a landscape view (width is greater than height). 298 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Optimize layout for micro application: Determine whether to optimize the layout for display in a micro application. Optimizing the dashboard layout prevents users from performing actions such as attempting to scroll the dashboard, which allows you to better control the user s experience and interaction with the dashboard. Display page-by interface: Determine whether to allow users to group data based on an element using the page-by interface on the mobile device. Display filter interface: Determine whether to allow users to change their prompt answers using the filter interface on the mobile device. Properties dialog box, Layout Properties, Advanced You can enable and select options for dividing large dashboards or layouts into pages of data (incremental fetch). Data is loaded in batches (or blocks) rather than all at the same time. This reduces the load and overall memory usage on the web server, and improves the usability and performance of a large dashboard or layout. For example, each row in the Details section of a dashboard contains the Item attribute and several metrics. Incremental fetch is applied, with a block size of ten. In Editable Mode or Express Mode, only ten rows of items are displayed on a single page. You can navigate to another page to display more information. To enable incremental fetch for a different layout, select that layout by clicking its tab at the top of the Layout area, then navigating to the Layout Properties. Incremental Fetch Enable incremental fetch: Determine whether to enable incremental fetch. Once you select the Enable incremental fetch check box, the following properties become available: Fetch Level: Determine the level at which to apply incremental fetch. If the dashboard or layout is grouped, you can select any group from the drop-down list. For example, a dashboard is grouped by Call Center. You can select Call Center from the Fetch Level drop-down list and define the Block Size as five to display data for five Call Centers on a single page. Groups that are displayed as single element only are not shown on this list, since "All" needs to be the selected grouping option. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 299

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide If the dashboard or layout is not grouped or all the groups are displayed as single elements only, the only option is the Detail section. Block Size: Determine the number of objects, specified in the Fetch Level option above, that are returned in each block. The incremental fetch properties are applied to the selected layout of a multiple layout dashboard or for the dashboard as a whole, if it does not contain multiple layouts. Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Document You can define document settings, such as the default grid autostyle and the dashboard width mode. The following options are available: Default Grid Autostyle: Determine which predefined set of formats (called an Autostyle) is applied to the grids in the dashboard. When a grids is added to the dashboard, it is formatted with this Autostyle. Always open this document in full screen mode: Determine whether the dashboard initially opens in Full Screen Mode. Full Screen Mode displays the dashboard without the Analytics Express banners at the top and bottom of the interface. Full Screen Mode allows the user to view more of the dashboard at once, which is helpful when analyzing data, as in a dashboard that contains multiple grids, graphs, sections, and images. Enable sorting and pivoting on grids in Express Mode: Determine whether users can sort and pivot data on grids in Express Mode. Whether this option is enabled or disabled by default depends on the dashboard template that the dashboard was created with. Automatically apply selector changes: Determine whether changes are automatically applied when users select items in a selector, or whether users must click Apply to apply their changes. By default, this check box is selected. To define this behavior for selectors on filter panels displayed in Express Mode, see Properties and Formatting dialog box: General, page 309. Document Width Mode: This option can affect the width of the dashboard and how quickly the dashboard is executed, as described below: When the Document Width Mode option is set to Fixed and the Document Width Mode Calculation preference is set to Automatic (the default), the width of the dashboard will not grow to accommodate additional content. This may cause parts of the 300 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 dashboard to be cut off in some cases. Setting Document Width Mode to Fixed can improve dashboard performance. When the Document Width Mode Calculation preference is set to Off, the Document Width Mode option has no effect on the dashboard. This may cause parts of the dashboard to be cut off in some cases. Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Export You can define options to determine how the dashboard is exported, as follows: General: Export: For a multi-layout dashboard, choose from the following: All layouts: Exports all layouts in the dashboard. Current layout: Exports only the layout being viewed. Expand page-by: Exports only data for the element selected in the Page-by panel. To export the entire dashboard, clear this check box. Prompt user on export: Determine whether to prompt users to choose what parts of the dashboard to export. Excel: Define options for exporting the dashboard to an Excel spreadsheet, as follows: Embed images: Determine whether graphs and images from the dashboard are included in the exported Excel spreadsheet as images. If this check box is selected, the images and graphs can be accessed offline from the spreadsheet. Graph format: Select whether to Use Live Excel Charts or Use embedded bitmaps as the format for exported graphs. PDF: Define options for exporting the dashboard to a PDF file, as follows: Include bookmarks in PDF: Specify whether bookmarks are generated for each element of each attribute used to group data in the dashboard. Bookmarks create a table of contents for the PDF. If the dashboard is not grouped, no bookmarks are generated. By default, this option is selected. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 301

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Show bookmarks in PDF: Determine whether the bookmark panel is displayed when the PDF is viewed. If the check box is not selected, the bookmarks can still be generated but they are not displayed automatically when the PDF opens. By default, this option is selected. If you clear the Include bookmarks in PDF check box, this check box becomes unavailable. Embed fonts in PDF: Define whether the original fonts chosen in the Document Editor are used to display and print the PDF, even on machines that do not have those fonts installed. This ensures the portability of the PDF. Use bitmaps for graphs: By default, graphs are generated using vector graphs, which are much smaller and reduce the size of the PDF. They also improve the quality of printed graphs. Select this check box to generate graphs using bitmaps instead. Use bitmaps if you want to use any of the following, which are not supported by vector graphs: Background pattern (only the background color of the pattern is used) Rectangular gradient (linear and circular gradients are supported; rectangular gradients are converted to circular gradients) Texture and picture background (a solid white background is applied) Use draft quality for graphs: Determine whether bitmap graphs are generated using a lower resolution, thus reducing the size of the PDF. The quality of the graph images on screen is generally not affected, but the quality of the printed graphs is impacted. This option is available for bitmaps, not for vector graphs. Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Table of Contents You can include and format a table of contents in an exported PDF. A table of contents allows a user to quickly access specific areas of the PDF. In the exported PDF, users can click on a label or page number in the table of contents to jump to that area. An entry is automatically created in the table of contents for each element of each attribute used to group data in the dashboard, as well as each layout (if the dashboard contains multiple layouts). For example, if the Region attribute is used to group data, elements include North and South. 302 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 You can create a table of contents only if a dashboard has multiple layouts or is grouped. If the PDF has bookmarks, the table of contents is listed in the bookmark panel. If a PDF includes a table of contents, the bookmarks may be redundant. The following options are available: Include Table of Contents: Select this check box to include a table of contents in the exported PDF. This check box is cleared by default. Title: To display a title for the table of contents, type the text of the title in the field. If the Title field is blank, the title will be displayed as Table of Contents. Align: Specify the text alignment to use to display the title. The options are Left (default), Center, and Right. Font: To format the font used to display the title, click the Format icon. The Font Formatting dialog box opens. Select the appropriate font formatting options such as the font type, font size, color, and so on. A preview of your selected font formatting is shown in the Sample area. Click OK when you have made your selections. This option is available if the Inherit Formatting From Body option is selected. Fill Color: From the color palette, select a color to apply to the background of the title. To access additional colors, click More Colors. This option is available if the Inherit Formatting From Body option is selected. Inherit Formatting From Body: Select this check box to format the title of the table of contents using the formatting options selected in the Body section below. Body: Specify formatting options to apply to the entries in the table of contents. Font: To format the font used to display the entries in the table of contents, click the Format icon. The Font Formatting dialog box opens. Select the appropriate font formatting options such as the font type, font size, color, and so on. A preview of your selected font formatting is shown in the Sample area. Click OK when you have made your selections. Fill Color: From the color palette, select a color to apply to the background of the entries. To access additional colors, click More Colors. Indentation: Specify the amount of indentation to apply to entries in the table of contents. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 303

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Left: Type the amount of space to display between the left border of the table of contents and the entries. Right: Type the amount of space to display between the right border of the table of contents and the entries. Borders: Format the border displayed around the table of contents. Style: Select the line style to use to display the border. Color: Select the line color to use to display the border. Weight: Type the line thickness to use to display the border. Show tab leader: Determine whether to include tab leaders in the table of contents. A tab leader is a series of dots connecting a table of contents entry with its page number. Tab leaders can help users accurately select the correct entry or page number. This check box is selected by default. Include Page Header/Footer: Determine whether to include the page header and footer on the table of contents page in the exported PDF. This check box is cleared by default. Before layout: If the dashboard contains multiple layouts, you can determine where in the dashboard to display the table of contents. By default, the table of contents is displayed before the first layout. However, you can select a different layout from the drop-down list. The table of contents will be displayed before the selected layout when the dashboard is exported. Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Watermark You can define watermark options for the dashboard. A watermark is a faint design appearing in the background of a page. Watermarks typically identify or decorate pages. Examples include the word Confidential stamped on every page or a business logo appearing in the background of every page. Watermark properties Select one of the following Watermark options: To display no watermark on the dashboard, select No watermark. To create and display a text watermark on the dashboard, select Text watermark (PDF Only). 304 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 To create and display an image watermark on the dashboard, select Image watermark. If you select either Text watermark or Image watermark, additional properties are displayed to allow you to create the watermark, as described below. Text watermarks When you select Text Watermark from the Watermark drop-down list, the following properties are displayed: Text: Type the text to display as the watermark, up to 255 characters. Format: To change the appearance of the text, click the Format icon. In the Font Formatting dialog box select the appropriate font, style, size, color, and effects options. Click OK to apply your changes. Size font automatically: Determine whether the watermark is displayed using the font size defined in the Font Formatting dialog box, or if the font size is automatically adjusted to fill the layout. Washout: Determine whether the watermark is faded to ensure that the dashboard information is legible through the watermark. Orientation: Determine whether the text is printed diagonally or horizontally across the page. Image watermarks When you select Image Watermark from the Watermark drop-down list, the following properties are displayed: Source: Type the path and file name of the image. A preview is displayed below the Source field. Scale: Determine whether the image is automatically resized to fit within the dashboard margins while retaining its aspect ratio. You can also scale the image manually, by selecting a percentage from the drop-down list. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 305

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Mobile You can define display options for a dashboard displayed in MicroStrategy Mobile, such as whether tabs are used to select a layout in a multi-layout dashboard. The following options are available: iphone Layout Bar Style: Determine the style of the layout bar that is displayed when the dashboard is viewed on an iphone. Tabs: Display the layout bar as a row of selectable tabs. Swipe: Display the layout bar in the location set in the Layout bar position drop-down list. Users can swipe between pages or select an option in the layout bar to display a layout on the mobile device. Layout Bar Position: Determine where the layout bar is displayed on the mobile device. This option is available if the Layout bar style is set to Swipe. Top: Display the layout bar at the top of the mobile device. Bottom: Display the layout bar at the bottom of the mobile device. Enable Graph Tooltips: Determine whether tooltips are displayed on the mobile device. Tooltips provide additional information about a graph, such as the value of a specific data point. iphone and ipad Enable zoom (pinch and double-tap): Determine whether users can zoom in and out in the dashboard using the pinch and double tap gestures. Enable copy for text: Determine whether a user can select and copy text fields on the dashboard, when the dashboard is displayed on an iphone or ipad. You can override this setting for a specific text field. Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Advanced You can modify layouts, formatting, and dashboard performance using the following options: These properties affect the entire dashboard, including all layouts of a multi-layout dashboard. 306 Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Layout Show single layout tab: Select this check box to display one layout tab at a time in the dashboard. This option is for multi-layout dashboards only. Apply grouping selection to all layouts: Select this check box to apply grouping selections to all layouts that contain the same grouping attribute. If the check box is cleared, when a user changes the grouping in one layout, the change is not retained when the user switches layouts. Panel Stacks (DHTML Only) Pre-load: Determine how the panels in panel stacks are loaded. Data All Panels of All Panel Stacks: Loads all panels of all the panel stacks in the dashboard when the dashboard is executed. This makes switching between panel stacks very fast, but increases dashboard execution time. Current Panel Only of All Panel Stacks: Loads only the first panel (the current panel) of all the panel stacks in the dashboard when the dashboard is executed; other panels are loaded when the user requests them. This reduces the dashboard execution time, but requires a user to wait while other panel stacks load. Trim sections for which no metric value data is available: (This applies only to metric values) Select this check box to remove the dashboard sections that do not contain metric data. Remove groups that contain null elements: By default, this check box is selected. To display any grouping elements that contain null values, clear this check box. Remove missing units: Determine whether the names of attributes and metrics that are not included in any datasets in the dashboard are displayed. For example, if you add attributes and metrics to a Grid visualization from a specific dataset, then remove the dataset from the dashboard, the names of the attributes and metrics are still displayed in the grid. This can alert you to missing data in a dashboard. Refresh (Express Mode and Mobile Clients only) Automatically refresh every seconds: You can have the dashboard periodically refresh itself as it is being displayed in Express Mode or on a mobile device. To do so, select this check box. In the 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for defining the look and feel of a customizable, detailed dashboard 307

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide field, type the amount of time, in seconds, to wait before each refresh. This check box is cleared by default. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard You can format your entire dashboard to perform a wide variety of tasks with your dashboard, including the following: Modify the look and feel of individual objects, including font properties and background color. Modify properties specific to the type of object, such as the target of a selector or the length of a line. Adjust the position of objects. Select the type of widget to display in a dashboard. Properties and Formatting dialog box contents For detailed information on the options available in each section of the Properties and Formatting dialog box, see the appropriate link below: The options available in the Properties and Formatting dialog box depend on the type of object selected, including text fields, selectors, widgets, and panel stacks. For example, the Widget option is only displayed if you select a grid, graph, or widget. Properties and Formatting dialog box: General, page 309 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Layout, page 313 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Image, page 319 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Grid, page 319 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Line, page 321 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Selector, page 322 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Button, page 326 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Widget, page 325 308 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Advanced, page 327 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Format options, page 328 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Color and Lines, page 329 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Font, page 330 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Number, page 331 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Alignment, page 333 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Effects, page 333 To access the Properties and Formatting dialog box 1 In a dashboard, right-click the item or area of the dashboard to format and select Properties and Formatting. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens. Properties and Formatting dialog box: General You can define the following properties for an object using the General options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box: General Name: Type the name of the object. You cannot change the name of sections. Type: Contains the type of object you have selected. This option cannot be changed; it is automatically set when the object is created. Display Text: The text to display on the button of an action condition selector. This option is available for action condition selectors. Tooltip: Type the text to display when a user hovers the cursor over the object. Visible: Determine whether the object is visible when a user views the dashboard. This check box is selected by default. Navigation: The following options are available for text fields and images. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 309

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Is hyperlink: Determine whether the text field or image is a hyperlink to the location specified in the Hyperlink setting. Hyperlink: Available only when the Is hyperlink check box is selected. This is the destination of the hyperlink. Open in new window: Available when the Is hyperlink check box is selected. Determine whether the hyperlink opens in the same window as the current document or in a new window. By default, this option is selected. Information Windows: The following option is available for text fields, images, and buttons. Panel Stack: Determine the panel stack that is displayed as an Information Window when a user clicks the object in Express Mode, or taps the object on an iphone or ipad. You can use an Information Window to provide additional information about the selected object. For steps, see Adding Information Windows to dashboards, page 202. Portal Window: The following options are available for grids and graphs. Show Title Bar: Determine whether the title bar of the grid and graph is displayed when a user views the dashboard. Title: Type the text to display in the title bar of the grid and graph. Display State: (Available if Show Title Bar is selected) To change the initial display height and width of the grid and graph, select one of the following options from the drop-down list: Normal (default): The grid or graph is displayed with the title bar, and can be moved or resized. Minimized: Only the title bar is initially displayed. A user can move the grid or graph but cannot resize it. Maximized: The size of the grid or graph is initially displayed at the size of the dashboard section in which it is located. A user can move the grid or graph, but cannot resize it. Show export options on title bar: Determine whether to display options for exporting the grid or graph on the grid or graph's title bar. Automatic (default): Select this option to allow Analytics Express to determine whether to show exporting options in the title bar. Yes: Select this option to display exporting options in the title bar. 310 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 No: Select this option to display the title bar without exporting options. Copy (ios only): The following options are available for text fields. If copying is enabled, a user can copy the data from the text field, when the document is displayed on an iphone or ipad. The options are: Disable copy for this text Enable copy for this text Use the document-level behavior: The document-level behavior is set in the Mobile category of the Document Properties dialog box. For details, see Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Mobile, page 306. Selector: The following options are available for selectors. Show Title Bar: Determine whether the title bar of the selector is displayed when a user views the dashboard. This check box is selected by default. Title: Specify the name displayed in the title bar by typing it in the Title field. If you do not specify the name, the source of the selector is displayed as the title. Show Element Count: Determine whether the number of selector items (the elements) is displayed in the title bar of the selector. Panel Stack: The following options are available for panel stacks, including filter panels. Show Title Bar: Determine whether the title bar of the panel stack is displayed when a user views the dashboard. Allow current panel to be changed without selector: Determine whether to allow users to change the current panel displayed in a panel stack. For Express Mode, select this check box to display the Previous and Next icons in the panel stack's title bar, to allow users to select and display different panels without using a selector. For a dashboard displayed on an ipad with MicroStrategy Mobile, select this option to allow users to switch between panels in a panel stack using a horizontal swipe gesture. Use as Information Window: Determine whether the panel stack is displayed as a pop-up Information Window when displayed on the ipad or in Express Mode. You can use Information Windows to 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 311

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide provide additional information about an item in a selector. For steps, see Adding Information Windows to dashboards, page 202. Placement: Determines the location of the Information Window in Analytics Express, and, if the Window mode is set to Appear, on an ipad with MicroStrategy Mobile. Your options are: Automatic: The Information Window is displayed in the best position. Fixed: The Information Window is displayed at the position of the panel stack. Above: The Information Window is displayed above the selected object (for example, the item in the selector or the attribute in the grid). Below: The Information Window is displayed below the selected object. Left: The Information Window is displayed to the left of the selected object. Right: The Information Window is displayed to the right of the selected object. Window mode: Specifies how to open the Information Window on an ipad with MicroStrategy Mobile. Your options are: Appear: The Information Window pops up. (This is the default.) Flip Up: The Information Window flips open, like a card turning over. Scale Up: The Information Window gradually increases in size. Slide: The Information Window slides from an edge of the screen. Position: Specifies which edge to slide the Information Window from, if Slide is selected as the Window Mode. Applies to ipads with MicroStrategy Mobile. Dismiss only when 'Close' button is tapped: Determines how the Information Window closes on an ipad with MicroStrategy Mobile: If the check box is cleared, a user taps outside of the Information Window to close it. (This is the default.) If the check box is selected, a user taps the Close button to close the Information Window. 312 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Reset to first panel when targeted (Mobile only): Determine whether the panel stack resets to the first panel when an attribute selector that targets the panel stack is changed. Resetting the panel stack helps reduce the number of taps for users. Applies to dashboards displayed on an ipad with MicroStrategy Mobile. Automatically apply selector changes: (Available for filter panels) Determine whether changes are automatically applied when a user selects an item on the filter panel in Express Mode. If changes are not made automatically, users must click the Apply button on the filter panel to apply changes. This check box is selected by default. To determine whether changes in a filter panel are automatically applied in display modes other than Express Mode, see Properties dialog box, Document Properties, Document, page 300. Title: Specify whether the title bar displays the name of the current panel, or a custom title. Current Panel Name (default): Display the name of the current panel in the panel stack. Custom Title: Specify a custom title. Custom Title: Specify a title to be displayed in the title bar. This option is available if the Title drop-down list is set to Custom Title. Pre-load (DHTML only) settings: Determine which panels in a panel stack to pre-load when the dashboard is executed. Inherit from Document (default): Use the dashboard-level setting to determine whether to pre-load panels. All Panels: Pre-load all panels when the dashboard is executed. This makes switching between panel stacks very fast, but increases dashboard execution time. Current Panel Only: Pre-load only the current panel when the dashboard is executed. This reduces the dashboard execution time, but requires a user to wait while other panel stacks load. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Layout You can format the layout of objects in your dashboard. For example, you can specify the width and height of an object, or how to display content that overflows the boundaries of a dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 313

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide The options available may vary depending on the type of object you are formatting. The following options are available: Position: Determine the positioning of the objects in the dashboard. Left: Determine the distance between the left edge of the object and the left border of its dashboard section. Top: Determine the distance between the top edge of the object and the top of its dashboard section. Locked: Determine whether the object is locked in its current position in the dashboard. If this option is selected, the object cannot be moved or resized. Size: Determine the width, height, and other size options for the object. Width: Determine the width of the object by selecting one of the following options. This option is not available for dashboard sections or lines. Fixed at: Specify the width of the object when it is displayed in the dashboard. Fit to contents: Automatically size the object to fit its contents. Available for text fields, reports, and widgets. 100%: Automatically size the object to the width of its dashboard section. Available for rectangles. Height: Determine the height of the object by selecting one of the options below. For dashboard sections, type the height in the Height field. Fixed at: Specify the height of the object when it is displayed in the dashboard. Fit to contents: Automatically size the object to fit its contents. Available for text fields, reports, and widgets. 100%: Automatically size the object to the height of its dashboard section. Available for rectangles. Height Can Shrink: Determine whether the section height can shrink to fit its contents. Affects all display modes and PDF export. Clear this check box to decrease the time it takes to execute the dashboard. Available for dashboard sections. Height Can Grow: Determine whether the section height can expand to fit its contents. Affects all display modes and PDF export. Clear this 314 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 check box to decrease the time it takes to execute the dashboard. Available for dashboard sections. Max Height: The maximum height for the section. Zero (0) indicates there is no height limit. Available for dashboard sections. Hide if Empty: Determine whether the section displays if it has no content, regardless of how the Height Can Shrink property is set. By default, this option is set to True. Length: Determine the length of a line by selecting one of the following options. Available for lines. Fixed at: Specify the length of the line when it is displayed in the dashboard. 100%: Automatically expands the line to fit the width of the dashboard section. If the line is vertical, the line height is set to the height of the section. Content Overflow: Determine how to display the content in a panel stack when the content is larger than the dimensions of the panel stack. This option is available for panel stacks, including filter panels. Clip: Display only the contents that can fit within the size of the panel stack. Scroll (default): Display a scroll bar to allow the user to view all of the contents. The scroll bar is displayed for Express Mode and when the dashboard is exported to Flash. When the dashboard is exported to Excel, the full panel stack is always displayed. Text overflow (HTML): Determine how to display the text when it is larger than the dimensions of the text field. This option is available for text fields. The options are: Clip (default): Display only the text that can fit within the size of the text field. Scroll: Display a scroll bar to allow a user to view all of the text. The scroll bar is displayed for Express Mode and when the dashboard is exported to HTML. The text field is clipped in other display modes or export formats. The scroll bar is most useful when the height of a text field is set to a fixed value. Lock Aspect Ratio: Determine whether the image retains its original width-to-height ratio. Available for images. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 315

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Title Height: Determine the height of the object's title bar. Enter a number of inches in the Fixed at Inches field. Available for panel stacks, grids and graphs, widgets, and selectors. Grid: The options in the Grid category are available for reports. Data source: Determine the data source to use to populate the selected grid and graph. Shortcut: Determine whether to link the grid and graph to the data source as a shortcut. If this check box is selected, any changes made to the original data source are automatically passed to the grid and graph in the dashboard. This check box is cleared by default. View: Determine the mode in which the grid and graph is displayed once the dashboard is executed. You can select Grid View, Graph View, Grid and Graph View, or Widget. Grid Overflow (HTML) (available for Grid View, and Grid and Graph View): Determine how to display the selected grid in Express Mode if the report overflows beyond the boundaries of the dashboard. The options are: Clip: Crops the grid to fit the dashboard's size. Scroll (default): Display a scroll bar that enables the user to see the entire grid even if the grid is larger than the dashboard. Grid Overflow (PDF & Excel) (available for Grid View, and Grid and Graph View): Determine how to display the selected grid if it overflows beyond the boundaries of the dashboard, when the dashboard is printed or exported to PDF or Excel. The options are: Clip (default): Crops the grid to fit the dashboard's size. Fit to grid contents: Automatically resizes the grid so that all data is visible. Graph Overflow (PDF) (available for Graph View): Determine the behavior of the selected graph if it overflows beyond the boundaries of the dashboard, when the dashboard is printed or exported to PDF or Excel. The options are: None (default): Crops the graph to fit the dashboard's size. Vertical: Display overflowed content, including other grids or graphs, below the selected graph. Horizontal: Display overflowed content, including other grids or graphs, to the right of the selected graph. 316 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Spacing (available for Graph View): Determine the space inserted between the graph and overflowed content. This option is available if the Graph Overflow option is set to Vertical or Horizontal. Quick Switch (available for Grid View and Graph View): Determine whether a user can switch between viewing the data in a report as a grid or a graph by clicking a button in Editable and Express Mode. This check box is cleared by default. Grid Position (available for Grid and Graph View): Determine where the grid and graph are displayed in relation to each other in Grid and Graph View. The options are: Top: Display the grid above the graph. Bottom (default): Display the grid below the graph. Left: Display the grid to the left of the graph. Right: Display the grid to the right of the graph. Grid Area (available for Grid and Graph View): Determine the percentage of the report covered by the grid; the remaining area is used by the graph. The default value is 50%. Selector: The options in the Selector category are available for selectors. DHTML Style: Determine which style to use to display the selector in Editable and Express Mode. For example images of each selector style, see Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182. The options are: Drop-down Slider Listbox Button Bar Radio Button Link Bar Check Boxes Search Box Orientation: Determine whether the items in the selector are displayed in a horizontal or vertical layout. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 317

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Allow multiple selections: Determine whether users can select multiple items in the selector. This allows users to display data for several items in the selector at once, and specify which items are displayed in the target of the selector. Make all items the same width: Determine whether all items in the selector are displayed using equal widths. Export selector to PDF as shown on screen: (Available when DHTML Style is Button Bar, Check Boxes, Link Bar, or Radio Button) Determine whether the selector is exported to a PDF file as shown on the screen or whether it is exported with only the selected items displayed. Search on server: (Available when DHTML Style is Search Box) Determine whether the search is performed on the server or the client. When the check box is selected, elements are fetched directly from the data as the user performs the search. Excel: The Excel property is available for sections. Automatically Fit Rows: Determine whether Excel automatically resizes the row heights when the dashboard is exported. By default, the height of all rows is the same in a dashboard exported to Excel. This conserves the same layout that you created in the dashboard. However, a grid or graph can contain data that is too long to fit inside an Excel cell and is therefore cut off. You can allow Excel to dynamically and automatically resize the row heights in a specific dashboard section so that the rows are tall enough to display the full text. PDF: The options in the PDF category are available for dashboard, group, and detail headers and footers. They apply in Express Mode and when the dashboard is exported to a PDF. Keep together: Specify whether a page break is allowed within the section. By default, the check box is cleared, meaning that as much of the section as possible is printed on the current page, with the remainder on the following pages. If the property is selected and the entire section does not fit on the page, the section starts on the top of the next page and continues on subsequent pages. Repeat on each page: Specify whether the contents of the selected section are repeated on each page of the PDF. Available for header and footer sections, except for the Page Header and Page Footer. To create repeated sections with objects that do not display on the last page, you can use this property with the Show only in repeated sections property (defined for objects, not dashboard sections). 318 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Repeat horizontally: Specify whether the entire contents of the selected section are repeated on the next horizontal page when the section spans multiple pages. Available for dashboard, group, and detail headers. Force new page: Specifies whether a page break is inserted. The options are: None: No page break is inserted. Before section: The current section is always printed at the top of a new page. After section: The section immediately following the current section is printed at the top of a new page. Before and after section: The current section is printed at the top of a new page and the next section is printed at the top of a new page. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Image You can provide the location of an image using the Image option in the Properties and Formatting dialog box: Source: Type the location of the image in the field, such as http://www.website.com/imagename.png. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Grid The Grid section in the Properties and Formatting dialog box lets you choose how to format grids in your dashboards, or change how users drill on a grid or graph. The Grid options are displayed if a grid or graph is selected. The following options are available: Headers: Specify options for displaying row and column headers in a grid. Rows: Determine display options for row headers in the grid. Show: Determine whether to display the row headers in the grid. This check box is selected by default. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 319

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Merge: Determine whether to merge row headers that are repeated in the grid. This check box is selected by default. Lock: Determine whether to prevent the row headers in the grid from being realigned or shifted when the dashboard is run. This check box is cleared by default. Columns: Determine display options for column headers in the grid. Show: Determine whether to display the column headers in the grid. This check box is selected by default. Merge: Determine whether to merge the column headers that are repeated in the grid. This check box is selected by default. Lock: Determine whether to prevent the column headers in the grid from being realigned or shifted when the dashboard is run. This check box is cleared by default. View: Specify general display options for displaying grids in a dashboard, such as whether to apply banding to rows in the grid. Outline: Determine whether to display the selected grid in outline mode. This check box is cleared by default. Show Banding: Determine whether to apply color banding to alternating rows in the grid. Banding rows can make reading multiple rows of data easier for the user. This check box is cleared by default. Show attribute form names: Specify whether attribute form names appear on the selected grid once the dashboard is run. An attribute form is one of several columns that contain information about different aspects of the attribute. For example, ID, Name, Last Name, Long Description, and Abbreviation could all be forms of the attribute Customer. Remove extra column: Determine whether the word Metrics appears as a column or row header on the grid. This check box is selected by default. Hide Null/Zero toggle behavior: Select this option to determine how Express hides null and zero metric values in the grid. From the drop-down list, select one of the following: Hide Nulls or Zeros (default): Select this option to hide rows and columns that consist only of null or zero metric values. Hide Nulls Only: Select this option to hide rows and columns that consist only of null metric values. 320 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Hide Zeros Only: Select this option to hide rows and columns that consist only of zero metric values. Show thresholds: Determine whether to display thresholds in the selected grid. This option is available if thresholds have been defined in the grid. This check box is selected by default. Drilling: Specify drilling options for a grid or graph. Drill Options: Specify whether users can drill on the selected grid or graph. The drill options are: No drilling: Users cannot drill on the grid or graph. Drill within: Users can drill on attributes that are available in the dataset that provides data for the grid or graph. Drill anywhere (default): Users can drill on attributes other than those available in the dataset that provides data for the grid or graph. Synchronize the following templates with this object: You can enable users to automatically drill on another grid or graph (the target) when they drill on the grid or graph that is currently selected (the source). For example, a grid containing profit data across several product categories targets a graph displaying inventory data. If a user drills to Subcategory in the grid, the graph will automatically be updated to display inventory data drilled to the Subcategory level. Select grids or graphs from the Available list and click > to add them to the Selected list. When users drill on the source grid or graph, each of the grids or graphs added to the Selected list will also be updated. The Drill Options setting must be set to Drill Within. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Line You can change the orientation of a line using the Line option in the Properties and Formatting dialog box. Orientation: Define how the line will be displayed. The options are: Horizontal Vertical 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 321

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Properties and Formatting dialog box: Selector You can format a selector in the dashboard. Selectors allow users to flip through the panels in a panel stack or display different metrics or attribute elements in a report. For background information on selectors, see Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182. The following options are available: Selector Action Type: Define the type of items that users can choose from in the selector: Select Attribute Element: When the dashboard is run, the selector displays a list of elements from the attribute selected in the Source option. Select Metric: When the dashboard is run, the selector displays a list of the metrics available in the objects selected as the Target (below). Metrics in text fields within the target are not listed. For example, a panel stack is selected as a Target and contains a metric in a text field. That metric is not displayed in the Select Metric list. Select Panel: When the dashboard is run, the selector displays a list of the panels available in the panel stack selected as the Target (below). If the Action Type is set to Select Panel, the Checkboxes style is unavailable, since you cannot display multiple panels simultaneously. Also, the Apply selections as a filter check box is unavailable, as panels are not used to filter or slice data. Select Metric Condition: Users can create a metric qualification or select metric values on a slider to qualify data based on the value of a metric. For metric qualification and metric slider selectors, the Action Type is set to Select Metric Condition by default, and cannot be changed. Source: (Available if Action Type is set to Select Attribute Element) From the drop-down list, select an attribute. The elements of the attribute are displayed as items in the selector. Displayed Forms: (Available if Action Type is defined as Select Attribute Element and a Source is selected) Determine which attribute forms are displayed in the selector. By default, Automatic is selected, which means that the default forms are displayed. Choose Custom to select from the list of available forms. If you select multiple forms, you can change the order in which the forms are displayed (for example, whether Last Name is displayed before First Name). 322 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Sort: (Available if Action Type is defined as Select Attribute Element and a Source is selected) Determine how the form is sorted. Click the button to open the Sort dialog box, then select a form and whether to sort it in ascending or descending order. Form Separator: (Available if Action Type is defined as Select Attribute Element and a Source is selected) Define the character that separates different forms displayed in the selector. Select a separator from the list, or choose Other and type the character in the box. You can use up to three characters for the separator. Targets Panel Stack: (Available if Action Type is defined as Select Panel) From the drop-down list, select the panel stack to use as the target of the selector. Available: (Available if the Action Type is not set to Select Panel) Lists all grids, graphs, and panel stacks on the dashboard. Select the objects to use as the selector s targets and click > to add them to the Selected targets list. Selected: (Available if the Action Type is not set to Select Panel) Lists the targets of the selector. Apply selections as a filter: Determine whether the selector filters or slices the data. The selections made in a filtering selector are used to filter the underlying dataset before the metric values are displayed at the level of data that is displayed in the dashboard. The selections made in a slicing selector are used to determine which slices of data are combined and shown in the report. If targets are automatically maintained, the Available and Selected target lists are unavailable. If a dashboard contains multiple datasets and a selector, which items are displayed in the selector depends on whether the selector filters or slices the data. A slicing selector shows only the items available on the selector s target. A filtering selector shows all the items available in all the datasets in the dashboard. For an example, see Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182. Mobile - ipad Display selector docked to its panel stack: (Available if the Action Type is set to Select Panel) Determine whether the selector is 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 323

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide displayed docked to its target panel stack when displayed on the ipad. This check box is cleared by default. Advanced: Automatically update when there is no data for the current selection: Determine how the target displays when no data exists. The selector that will update the first selector must target the panel stack. To display a message that no data is returned, clear the check box. To display an item, select the check box. Show option for Total: Determine whether the selector shows the Total option, which displays the total for all attribute elements or metrics in the Target. Show option for All: Determine whether the selector shows the All option, which displays all the attribute elements or metrics in the Target. By default, this check box is selected. Alias: (Available if Show option for All is selected) Replaces the All option in the selector with the entered text. If no text is entered, (All) is displayed. Current State: Determine how the target of the selector is displayed when the dashboard is executed. When a user chooses items in the selector and saves the dashboard, those selections update the Current State setting. If the dashboard is not saved, those selections are not saved and therefore the Current State setting remains unchanged. The options are: Set to specific elements: (Available once a user has chosen items in the selector) The target displays the elements that the user has chosen in the selector. Use first: (Available if Apply selections as a filter is cleared) The target displays data for the first specified number of items in the selector, as defined in the Number of Elements field. For example, if the selector source is Region and Number of Elements is defined as two, the first two regions (Central and Mid-Atlantic) are displayed. Use last: (Available if Apply selections as a filter is cleared) The target displays data for the last specified number of items in the selector, as defined in the Number of Elements field. For example, if the selector source is Region and Number of Elements is defined as one, the last region (Web) is displayed. 324 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 All: (Available if Apply selections as a filter is cleared) The target displays data for all the items in the selector. Unset (no filter): (Available if Apply selections as a filter is selected) The target is not filtered and therefore displays data for all items in the selector. None of the selector items is selected. Number of Elements: (Available if Apply selections as a filter is cleared and either Use first or Use last is selected) Define the number of selector items to be displayed. For example, if the selector source is Region, Use Last is selected, and Number of Elements is defined as one, the last region (Web) is displayed. Selection Type: Determine whether to include or exclude data in the target for the items selected in the selector. For example, a selector contains a list of regions, and Central and South are selected. You can choose to display data only for the Central and South regions, or display data for all regions except Central and South. The options are: Include (default): Display data for the items selected in the selector. Exclude: Display all data except the data for items selected in the selector. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Widget You can select a widget from the drop-down list to display a grid, or graph as a specific type of widget. For example, if you have a grid and want to convert it into a Heat Map widget, select Heat Map from the Widget drop-down list. The grid is converted into a Heat Map widget. Select None to display the grid normally. The following options are available: Widget: Select the widget to display, as follows: Data Cloud: A Data Cloud widget displays the names of business concepts in various sizes to depict the differences in business measures between each item. A Data Cloud widget can help you quickly identify the most significant positive or negative contributions to a business measure. Heat Map: The Heat Map widget is a combination of colored rectangles, each representing a business concept, that allow you to quickly grasp the state and impact of a large number of business measures at once. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 325

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Microcharts: The Microcharts widget conveys information in such a way that the user can, at a glance, determine the trend of a business measure over time or how a measure is performing compared to forecasted figures. The grid or graph that you turn into a widget must contain the attribute and metric data required to display the widget. For details on the requirements to add and display each widget, see Adding widgets to dashboards, page 185. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Button You can specify display options for a button using the Button options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box. The following options are available: Arrangement Style: The different button styles determine whether a caption, icon, or both are displayed on the button. A caption is the text that describes the button s action. An icon is a small image that represents the button s action. Select from the available styles: Caption only Icon only Icon to the left of caption Icon to the right of caption Icon on top of caption Custom: Uses an image that fills the button as its background Image: If the selected button style displays an icon or a custom image, specify the source of the image. Normal state source: Type the location of the image to display before the user taps the button. Highlight state source: Type the location of the image to display after the user taps the button. Actions Configure Actions on this Button: Click the gear icon, then select the appropriate options to define the action to perform when the user taps button. For details, see Links Editor, page 357. 326 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Advanced The following options are available for grids, graphs, widgets, or panel stacks (including filter panels): Selector The following property is available for reports, widgets, and panel stacks (including filter panels): Selector: Lists the attributes that target the selected object. The list of attributes targeting the object is not automatically updated. To update the list, click the Apply icon on the toolbar. Export The following properties are available for panel stacks, including filter panels. These properties determine how the panel stack is exported to Excel and PDF. Exporting to Flash is controlled by the Content Overflow property. For details, see Properties and Formatting dialog box: Layout, page 313 Clip contents of panel stack when exporting: Determine whether to clip the contents displayed in a panel stack when the dashboard is exported. By default, the check box is selected. If the contents of a panel stack are bigger than the panel stack itself (for example, a wide report), the object is clipped and not fully displayed when the dashboard is exported, since panel stacks cannot grow in size. If you clear the check box, the contents of the panel stack are not clipped. If the contents are bigger than the panel stack, the panel stack is essentially not exported, allowing the contents to be fully displayed. If the Clip contents check box is cleared, the remaining Export properties are unavailable. Expand panels: Determine whether all panels are exported (expanded) or only the current panel is exported. The options are: None: Only the currently displayed panel is exported. Vertical: All panels in the panel stack are exported. They are displayed vertically, from top to bottom. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 327

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Horizontal: All panels in the panel stack are exported. They are displayed horizontally, from left to right. Spacing: Type the amount of spacing, in inches, between the panels. This setting is available when Expand Panels is set to Vertical or Horizontal. Allow panels to split across pages: Determine whether an individual panel can display across multiple pages or must display on a single page. Applies to vertically expanded panels. Incremental Fetch The Incremental Fetch options are available for grids and graphs. Incremental fetch divides a large grid or graph into pages, thereby loading the data in batches (or blocks) rather than all at the same time. Incremental fetch is applied only when the dashboard is displayed in Editable Mode or Express Mode. Enable incremental fetch on grid: Determine whether to allow incremental fetch. Maximum number of rows per page: Type the maximum number of data rows to include on each page. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Format options You can format the font, alignment, number format, border, and color options of an object in a dashboard. For example: You can set the font color and background fill. You can use gradient colors (a two-color combination) for the background. You can choose whether to display the text field with 3D effects, as either a raised or lowered button, and with a drop shadow, which "floats" the text field above the background. The name of the Format dialog box changes depending on the object you are formatting. For example, if you select a panel stack and select Control from the Format menu, the Format: Panel dialog box opens. However, when you choose a selector and select Control from the Format menu, the Format: Selector dialog box opens. 328 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 To format objects using the Format options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box 1 Open the dashboard to be formatted. 2 Right-click the object to format and select Properties. The Properties and Formatting dialog box opens. 3 On the left, under Format, select the appropriate options to format the object. For information on the options available, see the following: Properties and Formatting dialog box: Color and Lines, page 329 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Font, page 330 (available for HTML containers, panel stacks including filter panels, selectors, and text fields) Properties and Formatting dialog box: Number, page 331 (available for text fields) Properties and Formatting dialog box: Alignment, page 333 (available for HTML containers, selectors except for Search Box selectors, and text fields) Properties and Formatting dialog box: Effects, page 333 (not available for Search Box selectors) 4 When finished, click OK to apply your changes. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Color and Lines You can format the color and borders of your object, shape, or line using the following Color and Lines options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box: Fill: Specify the following to determine how the object is formatted. Color: Specify a color with which to fill the selected object by clicking the arrow on the color menu and selecting a color. To access additional colors, clicking More Colors. To apply a color gradient (a combination of two colors) to the object, click Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box that opens, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 329

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide style to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Selection Color: (Available for selectors and reports enabled as selectors) Specify a background color for selected items in a selector. Click the arrow on the color menu and select a color. Click the Automatic button to apply the default selection color. Access additional colors by clicking the More Colors button. Borders: Define the type of border to draw around the object. None: No borders appear around the selected object. This is the default setting. All: Borders surround the selected object on all sides. From the drop-down list, select a line style for the border. From the color palette, select a color for the border. Custom: Determine whether the left, right, top, and bottom borders are displayed, and if so, the type of line and color used for each border. You can also define the fill color or border color by typing the hex code of the required color in the Hex field. The Fill option is available in the Color and Lines section of the Properties and Formatting dialog box when formatting a shape or line. Color: Specify a color with which to fill the selected object by clicking the arrow on the color menu and selecting a color. To access additional colors, clicking More Colors. To apply a color gradient (a combination of two colors) to the object, click Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box that opens, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Font Use the Font options to format the text that appears in: HTML containers Panel stacks, including filter panels Selectors, except for Search Box selectors 330 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Text fields The following options are available: Font: Select any font that is installed and available on your machine. When you select a font name from the list, the font is applied to the currently selected text. Style: Apply italic and bold effects to the text. Size: Select any font size that is installed and available on your machine. Choices in this list vary depending on the selected font type. Effects: Apply an underline or strikeout effects to the text. Color: Specify a color in which to display the selected text by clicking the arrow on the color menu and selecting a color. To access additional colors, clicking More Colors. To apply a color gradient (a combination of two colors) to the object, click Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box that opens, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Sample: A preview of the text with the selected formatting options applied. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Number You can select a number format to apply to text in a text field, as follows: Default: Allow Analytics Express to determine how to display the data values. General: Display numbers without any punctuation or other formatting symbols or syntax. Fixed: Select Fixed to determine the number of decimal places to be displayed, whether you want numbers to be separated every three decimal places, and whether negative numbers are allowed. Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal places to display. Negative numbers: Specify the format in which to display negative numbers. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 331

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Use 1000 separator: Determine whether to display numbers with a separator symbol every three digits (for example 1,000,000). Currency: Display numbers formatted as currency. Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal places to display. Currency symbol: Specify the currency symbol used to display the number. Currency position: Determine the position in which the currency symbol is displayed. Negative numbers: Specify the format in which to display negative numbers. Date: Display numbers in date format. Type: Select the date format to use to display data, such as 4/12/07, April 12, 2007, 4/12/2007, and so on. Time: Display numbers in time format. Type: Select the time format to use to display data, such as 9:00, 9:00 AM, and so on. Percentage: Display numbers as percentages. Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal places to display. Negative numbers: Specify the format in which to display negative numbers. Fraction: Display numbers as fractions. Type: Select the format in which to display fractions. Scientific: Display numbers in scientific format. Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal places to display. Custom: Define your own custom number format if none of the existing formats meet your needs. To do so, enter the number formatting symbols, such as 123,456.789. Once you create a custom format, you can use it in other metrics as well by clicking Custom in the Category list and selecting the format from the Custom drop-down list. From Grid: Display numbers using the number formatting options inherited from the grid. 332 Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Properties and Formatting dialog box: Alignment Use the Alignment options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box to specify how the text in the following objects is aligned: HTML container Text field Selector (except for Search Box selectors) The following options are available: Text Alignment Horizontal: Change the horizontal alignment of text within the text field. Select left, center, right, or justified alignment. Text control Wrap text: Define whether to wrap the text in the text field. Text direction: Define the direction in which the text is displayed, as follows: Horizontally (across the page) 90 degrees (vertically from bottom to top) -90 degrees (vertically from top to bottom) Vertical text is displayed in all display modes and when the dashboard is exported to Excel. Padding: Adds space between the text and the border of the object. You can add padding to the Left, Right, Top, and/or Bottom of the object. Padding is not available for selectors. Properties and Formatting dialog box: Effects You can apply effects to any object, except Search Box selectors, by using the Effects options in the Properties and Formatting dialog box. The following options are available: 3D Borders: Enable 3D Borders: Add a three-dimensional border around the selected object. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting a customizable, detailed dashboard 333

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Effect: Determine whether the 3D borders appear raised or sunken. Weight: Determine the extent to which the 3D effect is applied to the borders. Enter larger numbers to apply a more visible 3D effect to the object's borders. Drop shadows: Enable Drop Shadows: Determine whether a drop shadow effect is applied to the object. Use the slider to determine the depth of the drop shadow. Interfaces for thresholds For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for applying formatting to data in a grid based on the value of a metric, see the following sections: Visual Threshold Editor, page 334 Advanced Thresholds Editor, page 337 Format Threshold dialog box, page 339 Gradients dialog box, page 342 For interfaces for applying formatting based on the value of a metric to text fields, images, sections, and so on, see Interfaces for conditional formatting, page 342. Visual Threshold Editor Special formatting can automatically be applied to data in a grid in a dashboard based on the value of a metric. For example, you can define all revenue values over $40,000 in a grid to be formatted in a red, Arial font. On the same grid, you can define all revenue values below $10,000 to appear as an image of an arrow pointing down. To do so, you create simple thresholds (referred to as conditional formatting in dashboards) in the Visual Threshold Editor, as shown in the image below. To have special formatting applied to the data in a grid in a dashboard, you must define a threshold condition. When the dashboard is displayed, the 334 Interfaces for thresholds 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 formatting is automatically applied to the data that meets the condition. Simple thresholds consist of one condition; for example, one threshold can calculate a revenue that is greater than $10,000. The horizontal threshold bar in the Visual Threshold Editor is where you specify the condition by defining different ranges of values and specifying the formatting to automatically apply to data that falls into these ranges. You add and move sliders to create different ranges of values, with each slider on the bar representing a different threshold. For example, suppose you want to create two different thresholds for the Daily Revenue metric: one threshold to highlight revenue data above $40,000 and another threshold to highlight revenue data less than $10,000. You can create one slider for 10,000 and one for 40,000, then specify the formatting to apply to values that fall into each range. Steps are below to create or delete a threshold. To create a simple threshold 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Right-click the name of the metric whose values you want to format, point to Thresholds, then select Visual. The Visual Threshold Editor opens. To define the condition to use to format data 3 From the Threshold For drop-down list, select the metric that contains the values to format. For example, to highlight Daily Revenue values over $40,000, select Daily Revenue from the drop-down list. 4 Click Type. From the Type drop-down list, select one of the following: To format the top x% of metric values, select Highest %. For example, you can display the top 25% of metric values in green. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for thresholds 335

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To format the bottom x% of metric values, select Lowest %. For example, you can display the bottom 25% of metric values in red. To format the bottom x metric values, select Lowest. For example, you can display data for the ten stores with the lowest costs using a green flag. To format the top x metric values, select Highest. For example, you can display data for the ten employees with the longest tenure in years using a diamond symbol. To format the metric based on the metric's values, select Value. For example, you can replace data for stores with profit data greater than or equal to $1,000,000 with a corporate logo. 5 Once you have chosen the metric whose values you want to be automatically formatted in the Threshold For drop-down list, you can choose to have the metric formatted based on itself, or on the value of another metric. For example, you can highlight Daily Revenue values when the Daily Revenue is over $40,000, or you can highlight Profit values for stores with a Cost of less than $10,000. From the Based on drop-down list, select the metric to base your condition on, as follows: To format the metric based on itself, select Itself. To format the metric based on another metric, select the metric on which to base the condition. 6 Click the Apply icon to apply your changes. 7 In the Enter value field, type the number for which you want to define the threshold, then click the Apply icon. For example, in the scenario described above, you can type 10000 to create a thumb for $10,000. To specify the formatting to apply to your data 8 After you define the condition, you must specify the formatting that should be automatically applied when the condition is met. The area between two thumbs on the horizontal slider bar represents the range between two values. Hover the cursor over the section of the horizontal slider bar to format. In the pop-up menu that opens, click the Format icon. The Format dialog box opens. 9 To format the threshold values by adjusting the font, color, alignment, and other options, make the appropriate selections within the Font, Number, Alignment, and Color and Lines tabs. See Format Threshold dialog box, page 339 for more information on the options available. The 336 Interfaces for thresholds 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 text sample on the left of the threshold pop-up menu presents an example of the formatting you specified for the threshold. 10 To add additional conditions, in the pop-up menu, click the Add Threshold icon. A new thumb is added to the horizontal slider bar. Repeat the appropriate steps above to define the additional conditions. 11 To delete a threshold, hover the cursor over the area of the horizontal slider bar that represents the threshold's range, then click the Delete Threshold icon. 12 To return any formatting options specified for a threshold to their default values, hover the cursor over the area of the horizontal slider bar that represents the threshold's range, then click the Clear Format icon. 13 Click OK to apply changes and return to the dashboard. If the Auto-Apply changes check box is selected, your formatted thresholds are already visible on your dashboard. To delete a simple threshold 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Right-click the name of a metric in the grid, point to Thresholds, then select Visual. The Visual Threshold Editor opens. 3 Hover the cursor over the area of the horizontal slider bar that represents the threshold's range, then click the Delete Threshold icon. 4 Click OK to apply changes and return to the dashboard. If the Auto-Apply changes check box is selected, your changes are already visible on your dashboard. Advanced Thresholds Editor You can format data in a grid in a dashboard using the Advanced Thresholds Editor. This provides the flexibility to personalize your dashboards based on an attribute or metric qualification. For example, if you want all revenue values over $40,000 in a grid displayed in a red, Arial font, you can create and format a threshold for that range. On the same grid, you can have all 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for thresholds 337

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide revenue values below $10,000 appear as an image of an arrow pointing down. The toolbar The toolbar at the top of the Advanced Thresholds Editor contains: A drop-down list (at the far left) containing the names of all the metrics in the dashboard. To view the thresholds defined for a specific metric, select the name of the metric from the drop-down list. Any thresholds that are already defined for the metric are listed below the toolbar. To create a threshold, click Click here to add a new threshold, then define the attribute or metric qualification to use to format data. New : Create a new threshold. The new threshold is added to the list below the toolbar. Copy : Copy the selected threshold. Paste : Paste a copied threshold to the bottom of the list displayed below the toolbar. You can then edit the threshold to suit your needs. Delete Threshold : Delete the selected threshold. Delete All Thresholds : Delete all the thresholds for the metric currently selected in the toolbar. Move Up and Move Down : Re-order the thresholds in the list below the toolbar. Add Condition : Add another qualification to the selected threshold. Clear Conditions : Remove all qualifications from the selected threshold. Cell Formatting : Change the formatting that is applied when the threshold condition is met. To format the threshold values by adjusting the font, color, alignment, and other options, make the appropriate selections within the Font, Number, Alignment, and Color and Lines tabs. See Format Threshold dialog box, page 339 for more information on the options available. Enable Thresholds on Graph : Determine whether to apply a selected background color to graphs in which thresholds are met. Format Metric Only : Select this option to apply formatting only to the metric values that meet the threshold conditions. This option is selected by default. 338 Interfaces for thresholds 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Format Subtotals Only : Select this option to apply formatting only to metric subtotal values that meet the threshold conditions. Format Metric and Subtotals : Select this option to apply formatting to both metric values and subtotals that meet the threshold conditions. List of thresholds The middle area of the Advanced Thresholds Editor lists all the thresholds applied to the metric selected in the toolbar, as well as any qualifications defined for them. Each threshold is displayed in a box that contains: A link that displays a description of the threshold. You can click the link to edit the threshold. A preview pane to the right of the threshold. The text displayed in this pane provides a preview of the formatting that will be applied to data that meets the threshold's qualification. In addition, the following option is available: Allow user to toggle GridGraph thresholds on and off: Determine whether to allow users to toggle threshold formatting on and off using the Toggle Threshold icon in the toolbar of the dashboard. Format Threshold dialog box You can specify the formatting to apply to data that meets a threshold condition using the Format Threshold dialog box. The following options are available: Name: Type a name for the threshold. Replace Data: Determine whether to replace the threshold values with text, an image, or a quick symbol. This option is cleared by default. Replace Text: Select this option to replace the values that meet your threshold condition with text. Type the replacement text in the field. The text should be limited to 255 characters. For example, for sales opportunities that have been lost, you might display the word LOST in red. A common use of this option is to display the word EMPTY when a data value is null. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for thresholds 339

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Quick Symbol: Select this option to replace the values that meet your threshold condition with a symbol. From the drop-down list, select a replacement symbol. For example, in a grid showing the financial contribution of sales groups to overall sales, you can display a green plus + or a red minus symbol to represent positive or negative contributions. Image: Select this option to replace the values that meet your threshold condition with an image file. Type the location in which the image is stored. Font: Define font formatting to apply to values that meet the threshold condition, as follows: Font: Select any font that is installed and available on your machine. When you select a font name from the list, the font is applied to the selected text. Style: Apply italic or bold effects to the text. Size: Select any font size that is installed and available on your machine. Options in this list depend on the font type you choose. When you select a font size, it is applied to the selected text. Effects: Apply an underline or a strikeout to the text. Color: Specify a color in which to display the text by selecting a color from the color palette. You can apply a color gradient, which is a shading between two colors, by selecting Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended. Sample: Shows a sample of how the text looks when various options are selected. To change the cell background (fill) color, use the Fill Color option on the Color and Lines tab. Number: Select a number format in which to display the values. For example, you can display numbers as a percentage or with a currency symbol. You can display numbers as currency and also determine the number of decimal places for the values. Alignment: Format text alignment options by choosing from the following options: Text Alignment: Specify the horizontal and vertical alignment of text within grid cells. 340 Interfaces for thresholds 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Horizontal: Change the horizontal alignment of text within the cell. Select left, center, right, or justified alignment. Vertical: Change the vertical alignment of text within the cell. Select top, center, or bottom. Text Control: Specify wrapping and text direction options. Wrap text: Determine whether long text is wrapped within the cells. Text Direction: Determine whether text is aligned within the grid cells horizontally or vertically. Padding: Adjust the space around the text in a cell, between the text and the left, top, right, and bottom edges of the cell. Color and Lines: Format your selection by choosing from the following options: Fill: Specify a background color for the cell. Color: Specify a color with which to fill the selected object by clicking the arrow on the color menu and selecting a color. To access additional colors, click More Colors. To apply a color gradient (a combination of two colors) to the object, click Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box that opens, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Borders: Select the type of border to display around the selected cells. None: No borders appear around the selected cells. This is the default setting. All: Borders surround the selected cells on all sides. After selecting this option, select a line style from the drop-down list and select a color. Custom: Determine whether the left, right, top, and bottom borders are displayed, and if so, the type of line and color used for each border. Click OK to apply your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for thresholds 341

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Gradients dialog box Gradient colors blend two colors to create a gradual color change. You can select the two colors, as well as the direction of the blending to use when displaying gradients in a dashboard. The direction is called the Gradient Variant, and you can choose from the following directions: Left to right Right to left Top to bottom Bottom to top The Gradients dialog box allows you to format the gradient using the following options: Color 1: Select the first color from this drop-down menu. Color 2: Select the second color from this drop-down menu. Shading styles: Select the direction in which to shade. Horizontal: Select this option to use a horizontally centered gradient. Vertical: Select this option to use a vertically centered gradient. Variants: This option displays the different color blending variants that can be applied to the gradient. Click on a variant to apply it. Interfaces for conditional formatting For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for applying formatting to text fields, images, sections, and so on in a dashboard based on the value of a metric, see the following sections: Visual Conditional Formatting Editor, page 343 Conditional Formatting Editor, page 345 Format dialog box, page 346 For interfaces for applying formatting to data in a grid, see Interfaces for thresholds, page 334. 342 Interfaces for conditional formatting 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Visual Conditional Formatting Editor You can apply formatting to an object in your dashboard (text fields, images, sections, and so on) based on the value of a metric. For example, you can display a dashboard section with a red background if the costs for a store are over $40,000. To do so, you create simple conditional formats using the Visual Conditional Formatting Editor, as shown in the image below. Simple conditional formats consist of one expression; for example, one conditional format can calculate a revenue that is greater than $10,000. Notice the horizontal slider bar in the Visual Conditional Formatting Editor. This is the conditional format bar in which you define different ranges of values and specify the formatting to apply to the object when data values fall into these ranges. You add and move thumbs to create different ranges of values, with the area between thumbs representing a different conditional format. For example, suppose you want to create two different conditional formats for the Daily Revenue metric: one conditional format to highlight revenue data above $40,000 and another conditional format to highlight revenue data less than $10,000. You can create one thumb for 10,000 and one for 40,000, then specify the formatting to apply to values that fall into each range. To create a simple conditional format 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Right-click the object to format in the dashboard layout area, point to Conditional Formatting, then select Visual. The Visual Conditional Formatting Editor opens. 3 From the Based on drop-down list, select the metric on which to base the qualification. For example, to ensure that the conditional format highlights Daily Revenue values over $40,000, select Daily Revenue from the drop-down list. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for conditional formatting 343

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 4 In the Enter value field, type the number for which you want to define the conditional format, then click the Apply icon. For example, in the scenario described above, you can type 40000 to create a thumb for $40,000. 5 After you define the qualification, you must specify the formatting to apply when the qualification is met. The area between two thumbs on the horizontal slider bar represents the range between two values. Hover the cursor over the section of the horizontal slider bar to format. In the pop-up menu that is displayed, select the Format icon. 6 Do one of the following: To format the conditional format values in a text field by adjusting the font, color, alignment, and other options, make the appropriate selections within the Font, Number, Alignment, and Color and Lines tabs. See Format Threshold dialog box, page 339 for more information on the options available. To format a line, shape, or other type of dashboard object, make the appropriate selections using the Fill, Border, and Line and Shape options. See Format dialog box, page 346 for more information on the options available. The text sample on the left of the pop-up menu provides an example of the formatting you specified. 7 To add additional qualifications, in the pop-up menu, click the Add Threshold icon. A new thumb is added to the horizontal bar. Repeat the appropriate steps above to define the additional qualifications. 8 To delete a conditional format, hover the cursor over the area of the horizontal slider bar that represents the conditional format's range, then click the Delete Threshold icon. 9 To return any formatting options specified for a conditional format to their default values, hover the cursor over the area of the horizontal slider bar that represents the conditional format's range, then click the Clear Format icon. 10 Click OK to apply changes and return to the dashboard. If the Auto-Apply changes check box is selected, your changes are already visible on your dashboard. 344 Interfaces for conditional formatting 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Conditional Formatting Editor You can apply formatting to text fields, images, sections, and so on based on the value of a metric. For example, you can display a dashboard section with a red background if the costs for a store are over $40,000. To do so, you create conditional formats using the Conditional Formatting Editor. The following options are available: The toolbar The toolbar at the top of the Conditional Formatting Editor contains the following options: New : Create a new conditional format. The new conditional format is added to the list below the toolbar. Copy : Copy the selected conditional format. Paste : Paste a copied conditional format to the bottom of the list displayed below the toolbar. You can then edit the conditional format to suit your needs. Delete Threshold : Delete the selected conditional format. Delete All Thresholds : Delete all the conditional formats in the Conditional Formatting Editor. Move Up and Move Down : Re-order the conditional formats in the list below the toolbar. Add Condition : Add another qualification to the selected conditional format. Clear Conditions : Remove all qualifications from the selected conditional format. Cell Formatting : Specify the formatting to apply to the dashboard object for which you want to define the conditional format, by doing one of the following: To format the text in a text field by adjusting the font, color, alignment, and other options, make the appropriate selections within the Font, Number, Alignment, and Color and Lines tabs in the Format Threshold dialog box, page 339. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for conditional formatting 345

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To format a line, shape, or other type of dashboard object, make the appropriate selections using the Fill, Border, and Line and Shape options in the Format dialog box, page 346. List of conditional formats The middle area of the Conditional Formatting Editor lists all the conditional formats you have defined. Each conditional format is displayed in a box that contains: A link that displays a description of the conditional format. You can click the link to edit the conditional format's qualification. A preview pane to the right of the conditional format. This pane displays an example of the formatting that will be applied to the object if the data meets the qualification of the conditional format. In addition, the following option is available: Allow user to toggle conditional formatting on and off: Determine whether to allow users to toggle conditional formatting on and off using the Toggle Conditional Formatting icon in the dashboard toolbar. Format dialog box You can determine how to apply conditional formatting to objects in your dashboard using the Format dialog box. The settings available may change depending on the type of object you select. The options are: Name: Type a name for the conditional format, if desired. Hide: Determine whether to hide the object. This check box is cleared by default. Fill: Specify the following to determine how the object is formatted: Color: Specify a color in which to display the selected object by clicking the arrow on the color menu and selecting a color. You can: Access additional colors by clicking More Colors. Apply a color gradient, which is a combination of two colors, to the object. To do so, click Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box that 346 Interfaces for conditional formatting 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 opens, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style in which to display the gradient to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Borders: Select the type of border to draw around the object. None: No borders appear around the selected object. This is the default setting. All: Borders surround the selected object on all sides. From the drop-down list, select a line style for the border. From the color palette, select a color for the border. Custom: Determine whether the left, right, top, and bottom borders are displayed, and if so, the type of line and color used for each border. Line and Shape Settings: Define line and fill color options for the object. Style: Specify the style of line. Color: Specify a color in which to display the selected object by clicking the arrow on the color menu and selecting a color. You can: Access additional colors by clicking More Colors. Apply a color gradient, which is a combination of two colors, to the object. To do so, click Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box that opens, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Weight: Specify the thickness of the lines. Interfaces for derived elements For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for grouping attribute data in a dashboard into derived elements, see the following sections: Derived Elements Editor, page 348 Format: Derived Elements dialog box, page 353 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for derived elements 347

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Derived Elements Editor You can group dashboard data on-the-fly by combining multiple data rows into a single row and renaming the new group you have created. For example, if a grid on your dashboard displays profit data from 2005, 2006, 2007, and 2008 on separate rows, you might want to group the 2005, 2006, and 2007 rows together into a single row on the grid, and name that new row Profits Through 2007. This new group of data rows is called a derived element. You can use the following types of derived elements to group your data: A Group derived element combines attribute elements that have been selected from a list into a single derived element. The Profits Through 2007 derived element described in the example above is a Group derived element, containing the attribute elements 2005, 2006, and 2007. A Filter derived element uses a filter qualification to determine which combination of attribute elements to include in the derived element. For example, if you want to filter the regions in a grid into geographical groups based on the region names, you can create a Filter derived element called Southern Regions, which groups together attribute elements whose names begin with South. A Calculation derived element uses operators and functions to combine attribute elements and derived elements into calculations that define a single derived element. For example, you can combine the Southern Regions derived element described above with the Web attribute element to form a single derived element. This derived element would contain the Web region as well as any regions whose names begin with South. The All Other derived element, by default, collects all attribute elements that are not included in any other derived elements, and displays them as individual items on the grid. This derived element is created automatically when the first derived element is created for an attribute. The All Other derived element can only be deleted by deleting all derived elements for the attribute. Steps are below to: Add a derived element to a dashboard Format a derived element Rename a derived element Delete a derived element 348 Interfaces for derived elements 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Rearrange the display order of derived elements in a dashboard Prerequisites The procedures below assume you have already created the dashboard to which you want to add, modify, or delete derived elements. The dashboard must contain a grid. To add a derived element to a report or dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 Right-click the header of the attribute whose elements you want to use to create the derived element, then select Derived Elements. The Derived Elements Editor opens. 3 From the New drop-down list, select one of the following, depending on the type of group you want to create. See the introduction above for details on each type. To create a derived element from attribute elements selected from a list, select List. a By default, each attribute element contained in the attribute you selected is displayed in the Available list and can be added to the new derived element. You can have the Available list only display the attribute elements that have not yet been added to any derived elements. Do one of the following: To display only the attribute elements that have not yet been added to any derived elements, select the Unused Attribute Elements check box. To display all attribute elements, regardless of whether they have been added to a derived element, clear the Unused Attribute Elements check box. b Select the attribute elements to add to the derived element, then click > to add the elements to the Selected list. To select more than one attribute element, press CTRL and click each element to select it. You can search for elements by typing the name of an element into the Search for field and clicking the Find icon. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for derived elements 349

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To create a derived element by using a calculation to group attribute elements and derived elements into a set of data, select Calculation. a Add attribute elements, derived elements, and numbers to the calculation by selecting one of the following: To add attribute elements to the calculation, click Elements. A list of attribute elements is displayed. Select the element to add and click > to add it to the calculation. To select more than one attribute element, press CTRL as you select elements. To add derived elements to the calculation, click Derived Elements. A list of derived elements is displayed. Select the element to add and click > to add it to the calculation. To select more than one derived element, press CTRL as you select elements. To add numbers to the calculation, click Numbers. Type a number in the field and click > to add it to the calculation. b From the Function drop-down list, select the function or operator to use to create the calculation. A preview of the calculation is automatically displayed in the Preview pane. To define a filter qualification to determine which attribute elements to include in the derived element, select Filter. Do one of the following: a b c a To filter elements by creating a qualification based on an attribute form, click Qualify. From the first drop-down list, select the attribute form to filter data based on. From the next drop-down list, select the operator to use to filter data, such as Begins With or Less Than. In the last field, type the value to use to qualify on the attribute form. Depending on the operator you selected from the previous drop-down list, you may need to type multiple values. For example, the operator Between requires two values. To filter elements by determining whether they are in a list, click Select. From the first drop-down list, select one of the following: To specify attribute elements to include in the derived element by adding them to a list, select In List. 350 Interfaces for derived elements 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 To include all attribute elements in the derived element except those in the list, select Not In List. b Select the attribute elements to include or exclude from the derived element, then click > to add the elements to the Selected list. To select more than one attribute element, press CTRL as you select elements. You can search for elements by typing the name of an element into the Search for field and clicking the Find icon. 4 Type a name for the new derived element in the field, then press ENTER. 5 Click the Properties tab. 6 You can display a derived element as a single, consolidated element with aggregated data, or as the separate attribute elements that are items within the derived element. Under Derived element behavior, select one of the following: To display the derived element as a single item, containing the data of all the attribute elements that make up the derived element, select Consolidate items into one element. This option is selected by default. To display data for each individual attribute element, select Keep individual items separate. 7 You can define how metric values for the derived element are applied to all subtotals included in a grid. From the Subtotal behavior drop-down list, select one of the following: To apply the derived element's aggregated data, rather than the values for the individual items in the derived element, to all subtotals in the grid, select Use this element when calculating subtotals. This option is selected by default. To apply the values of the separate items that make up the derived element to all subtotals, select Use the individual items that comprise this element when calculating subtotals. For Group and Filter derived elements, only attribute elements can be included as items of derived elements. Calculation derived elements can include attribute elements as well as other derived elements. To exclude both the derived element values and separate item values from all subtotals, select Do not use this element when calculating subtotal. You can use this option to avoid double counting when an attribute element is included in more than one derived element. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for derived elements 351

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 8 By default, the All Other derived element collects attribute elements that are not included in any other derived elements, and displays them as individual attribute elements on the report or dashboard. You can determine whether the attribute elements that make up your new derived element are also included in the All Other derived element. Under All Other behavior, select one of the following: To prevent the attribute elements from being included in the All Other derived element, select Do not include individual items in the All Other element. This option is selected by default. To include the attribute elements in the All Other derived element, select Include individual items in the All Other element. 9 Repeat the appropriate steps above to create and add each derived element. 10 Click OK to apply your changes. Your new derived elements are displayed in the grid. To format a derived element 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 Right-click the header of the attribute used to create the derived element, then select Derived Elements. The Derived Elements Editor opens. 3 Select the name of the derived element to format, then click the Format icon. The Format: Derived Element dialog box opens. 4 Select the appropriate options to format the derived element, then click OK. For details, see Format: Derived Elements dialog box, page 353. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. To rename a derived element 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 Right-click the header of the attribute used to create the derived element, then select Derived Elements. The Derived Elements Editor opens. 352 Interfaces for derived elements 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 3 Select the name of the derived element to rename, then click the Rename icon. 4 Type a new name for the derived element in the field, then press ENTER. 5 Click OK to apply your changes. To delete a derived element 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 Right-click the header of the attribute used to create the derived element, then select Derived Elements. The Derived Elements Editor opens. 3 Do one of the following: To delete a single derived element, select the name of the derived element to delete, then click the Delete icon. To delete all the derived elements that have been defined for the attribute, click the Delete All icon. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. To rearrange the display order of derived elements in a grid on a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. 2 Right-click the header of the attribute used to create the derived element, then select Derived Elements. The Derived Elements Editor opens. 3 Select the name of the derived element to move, then use the Move Up and Move Down arrows to move it to its new location. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. Format: Derived Elements dialog box You can format derived elements using the Format: Derived Elements dialog box. Formatting derived elements lets you highlight important or unique 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for derived elements 353

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide data as well as correctly reflect value and character formats for your derived elements. You can: Format the derived element name by applying formatting to the header of a derived element. You can use this to highlight or visually distinguish the various derived elements displayed in a grid on a dashboard. To do so, select Header from the first drop-down list. Format all metric values associated with the derived element by applying formatting to the values of a derived element. You can use this to display metric values as percentages, fractions, or unique formats. To do so, select Values from the first drop-down list. For a brief overview of derived elements, see Derived Elements Editor, page 348. The following formatting options are available: Font: Specify font options, such as font type and font style. Font: Select any font that is installed and available on your machine. Style: Apply italic and bold effects to the text. Size: Select any font size that is installed and available on your machine. Choices in this list vary depending on the selected font type. Effects: Apply an underline or strikeout effects to the text. Color: Specify a color in which to display the text by selecting a color from the color palette. You can access additional colors by clicking More Colors. Number: Specify formatting options for numeric values. Default: Numbers are shown using the default number formatting for the attribute or metric value being displayed. General: Numbers have no specific formatting. Fixed: Numbers are displayed using a fixed number of decimal places. Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed as well as how to display negative numbers. Currency: Numbers are displayed as currency. Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed, the currency symbol to be used, where to display the currency symbol, and how to display negative numbers. Date: Numbers are displayed as dates. Specify the format to display dates in by selecting one of the examples in the Type field. 354 Interfaces for derived elements 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Time: Numbers are displayed in time format. Specify the format to display time in by selecting one of the examples in the Type field. Percentage: Numbers are displayed as percentages. Specify the number of decimal places to be displayed and how to display negative numbers. Fraction: Display decimals as fractions. Specify the format to display fractions in by selecting one of the examples in the Type field. Scientific: Display numbers in scientific notation. Specify the number of decimals to be displayed. Custom: Specify a custom notation to display numbers in. Alignment: Specify text alignment options, such as whether to center text or display text vertically. Text alignment: Specify the horizontal and vertical alignment of text in a cell. Horizontal: Specify the horizontal alignment as Use Default, Left, Center, Right, or Justify. Vertical: Specify the vertical alignment as Use Default, Top, Center, or Bottom. Text control: Specify text display and text wrapping options. Wrap text: To display the text on multiple lines within the cell, select this check box. To display the text on a single line, clear the check box. This check box is cleared by default. Text direction: Specify whether the text is displayed Horizontally (across the page), or -90 degrees (vertically from top to bottom), as shown below: Padding: Specify the amount of space to display between the text and the border of the cell. Left: Enter the amount of padding to display between the text and the left border of the cell. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for derived elements 355

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Right: Enter the amount of padding to display between the text and the right border of the cell. Top: Enter the amount of padding to display between the text and the top of the cell. Bottom: Enter the amount of padding to display between the text and the bottom of the cell. Color and Lines: Specify cell formatting options such as border color and background color. Fill: Select a color from the color palette to use to display the background of the cells containing derived element values. You can access additional colors by clicking More Colors. Borders: Select the line style and borders for each cell. None: No border applied. All (default): The same line style and color is applied to the left, right, top, and bottom of the cell. Specify the line style and color for the borders. Custom: A different line style and color can be applied to the left, right, top, or bottom of the cell. Specify the line style and color for each border. Line and Shape Settings: Select border options as follows: Style: Select the line style for the border from the drop-down list. Color: Select the color for the border from the drop-down list. Weight: Select the thickness for the lines that make up the border. Interfaces for adding links For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for adding links to dashboards, see the following sections: Links Editor, page 357 Select Target dialog box, page 358 356 Interfaces for adding links 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Links Editor You can create a link in a dashboard to another dashboard or web page. You can link an object: In a grid or a widget to a dashboard. On a dashboard (such as a text field or image) to either a dashboard or a web page. The Links Editor contains a list of links defined for the selected object. The following options are available: New: Create a new link. Remove: Delete the selected link. Move Up and Move Down: Set the order in which the links are displayed to the user. Click Set as Default to define a link as the default link to open when the user clicks the object. Click Clear Default to define another link as the default link. The remaining options on the Link Editor define the link: URL display text: Type the name of the selected link. By default, the first link is named Hyperlink1, the second Hyperlink2, and so on. You can change the names. The name of the link should be descriptive and informative to help users identify the target of the link. When this link is clicked: Determine whether to open a website or display a dashboard when the link is clicked, as follows: Navigate to this URL: The target website that is executed when the link is clicked. Type the URL in the field. (This option is available for text fields and images.) Run this dashboard: Click... (the browse button) to navigate to and select the dashboard to run when the link is clicked. Open in a new window: Determine whether the target opens in the same window as the dashboard that contains the link (default). Opening the link navigates away from the dashboard. To have the target open in a new window, which allows both the dashboard and the link to be displayed simultaneously, select this check box. This setting applies to all the links on the object. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for adding links 357

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To access the Links Editor 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Right-click the object to link from (an object on a grid, graph, or widget, or a text field or image on the dashboard) and select Edit Links. The Links Editor opens. Select Target dialog box You can select a dashboard to run when a link is clicked. To search for the name of a specific dashboard, enter text in the Find field and press ENTER. The results of the search are displayed in the lower pane. Select the dashboard in the lower pane. Click OK to confirm your selection. Interfaces for totals For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for defining and displaying subtotals in dashboards, see the following sections: Subtotals Editor, page 358 Subtotals Editor: Definitions tab, page 359 Subtotals Editor: Advanced tab, page 359 Subtotals Editor: Display tab, page 360 Subtotals Editor You can display specific subtotals and grand totals in a grid in a dashboard. You can also determine how the subtotals are calculated and displayed on the grid. For a description of the options available, see the following links below: 358 Interfaces for totals 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 To add simple subtotals calculated at all levels or insert grand totals, see Subtotals Editor: Definitions tab, page 359. To define more complex subtotals by position or across level, see Subtotals Editor: Advanced tab, page 359. To define the position of subtotals at the top or the bottom of each level for each axis in the grid, see Subtotals Editor: Display tab, page 360. To access the Subtotals Editor 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. Click the grid. 2 From the Data menu, select Edit Totals. The Subtotals Editor opens. Subtotals Editor: Definitions tab Use the Definitions tab of the Subtotals Editor to insert simple subtotal(s) in a grid on a dashboard. Select check boxes under All Subtotals and Grand Totals to calculate this subtotal at all levels or to insert a grand total on the grid. To clear the subtotals from the grid, clear the check boxes. The list of subtotal functions available for a metric is determined when the metric is created. If no subtotals are listed, totals are not enabled for the metric. Subtotals Editor: Advanced tab You can specify whether each metric subtotal is calculated by position on the grid's rows, columns, and page-by fields, or across specific levels in a grid. You can also specify the level at which you want the subtotal to be calculated. From the drop-down list at the top of the dialog box, define the subtotal to be calculated by position or across level: By position: Under the Rows, Columns, or Pages (page-by fields) drop-down lists, select the subtotal to apply to that part of the grid. Each 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for totals 359

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide of these is considered an axis of the grid. For each drop-down list, select one of the following: Rows and Columns: All Subtotals: Apply the subtotal across all levels on the axis. Grand Total: Apply only the subtotal across the whole axis. None: Do not apply the subtotal. Pages: Selected Subtotals: Apply only selected subtotals across the axis. Grand Total: Apply only the subtotal across the whole axis. None: Apply the subtotal to no level of the axis. All Subtotals: Apply the subtotal across all levels on the axis. Across level: Select Levels: Apply the subtotal to all attributes available on the grid. When you select this, all attributes available in the grid are listed for you to choose from. Select the attributes to calculate the subtotal for. Subtotals Editor: Display tab Use the Display tab of the Subtotals Editor to define how subtotals are positioned in a grid on a dashboard. Subtotal positions by row: Top of each level: Display the row subtotal at the top of each level at which the metric is calculated. Bottom of each level: Display the row subtotal at the bottom of each level at which the metric is calculated. Subtotal positions by column: Left of each level: Display the column subtotal at the left of each level at which the metric is calculated. Right of each level: Display the column subtotal at the right of each level at which the metric is calculated. 360 Interfaces for totals 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Subtotal positions by page: Top of each level: Display the page subtotal at the top of each level at which the metric is calculated. Bottom of each level: Display the page subtotal at the bottom of each level at which the metric is calculated. Interfaces for formatting graphs For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for formatting graphs, see the following sections: Format: Graph dialog box, page 361 Format: Graph dialog box: General tab, page 362 Format: Graph dialog box: Format tab, page 363 Format: Graph dialog box: Number tab, page 367 Format: Graph dialog box: Axes tab, page 369 Format: Graph dialog box: Advanced tab, page 370 Format: Graph dialog box: Options tab, page 370 Format: Graph dialog box You can format several aspects of a graph in a dashboard using the Format: Graph dialog box. You can: Format the look and feel of the graph's series. For example, you can change the color and transparency of bars in a bar graph or pie slices in a pie graph. Format the graph's titles, axis labels, and legend. Apply a graph style and sub-style. Format the display of number values on the graph. Create tooltip labels for specific data points. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting graphs 361

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Adjust the scaling of the graph. For example, you can determine how many bars of a bar graph are displayed at a time. Steps are below to format a graph in a dashboard. Prerequisite This procedure assumes that you have already created the graph to format. To format a graph in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Editable Mode icon. Click the graph to format. 2 From the Format menu, select Graph. The Format: Graph dialog box is displayed. Select the appropriate formatting options. For detailed information on each of the formatting options available, see the appropriate link below: Format: Graph dialog box: General tab, page 362 Format: Graph dialog box: Format tab, page 363 Format: Graph dialog box: Number tab, page 367 Format: Graph dialog box: Axes tab, page 369 Format: Graph dialog box: Advanced tab, page 370 Format: Graph dialog box: Options tab, page 370 3 Click OK to apply your changes. Format: Graph dialog box: General tab You can determine the graph style, number of categories and series, and additional formatting options for graphs in a dashboard using the General tab in the Format: Graph dialog box. The following options are available: Graph Styles: Graph Type: Select the graph style to apply to the graph, such as Vertical Bar or Horizontal Area. You must have a certain number of attributes and metrics placed on your graph for most graph styles. 362 Interfaces for formatting graphs 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Graph Sub-type: From the drop-down list, select the style sub-type to apply to the graph, such as Clustered or Absolute. Maximum: Categories: Type the maximum number of categories to display on the graph. (The category is usually the Y-axis on a graph.) For example, in a vertical bar graph with separate bars displayed for the cost, revenue, and profit across several stores, type 3 to limit the graph to displaying bars for the first three stores. Series: Type the maximum number of series to display on the graph. (The series is usually the X-axis on a graph.) For example, in a vertical bar graph with separate bars displayed for the cost, revenue, and profit across several stores, type 2 to display bars for cost and revenue only. Use font anti-aliasing: Define whether to improve the text on graphs. This setting will sharpen zoomed images so that they are more readable. Format: Graph dialog box: Format tab You can select formatting options for the background, legend, text, and additional items in a graph using the Format tab in the Format: Graph dialog box. From the first drop-down list, select the general area of the graph to format, such as Titles or Axes. From the second drop-down list, select the specific item in the graph to format, such as Subtitle or Y1 Axis Title. The following options are available: Format: Select this option to format the text, background, frame, or legend of the graph. All Texts: Select this option to format the style, size, color, font, and effects of all the text in the graph. Background: Select this option to format the fill color and line color of the graph's background. Frame: Select this option to format the fill color and line color of the graph's frame, which is the area within the X-axis and Y-axis in which data is displayed. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting graphs 363

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Legend: Select this option to format the graph's legend. You can also format the legend text, as well as the fill color and line color of the text in the legend. Legend Area: Select this option to format the fill color and line color of the area around the text in the legend. Titles: Select this option to format titles in the graph, such as the title of the category axis. You can use a shortcut variable to have information automatically added to titles in the graph. To use a shortcut in a title, you must type the shortcut in the text field next to the Show check box. You can use shortcuts in the Subtitle, Footnote, Category Axis Title, Y1 Axis Title, and Y2 Axis Title. If you are using Internet Explorer, you can hover the cursor over the Details icon next to the text field to see the available shortcuts. All Titles: Select this option to format all titles in the graph. Titles include the main title of the graph, subtitles, footnotes, and names for each axis. Title: Select this option to display and format the main title of the graph. Type the title in the text field next to the Show check box. Subtitle: Select this option to display and format a subtitle. Type the subtitle in the text field next to the Show check box. Footnote: Select this option to display and format a footnote. The graph's creation date and time is displayed in a footnote by default. You can type a different footnote in the text field next to the Show check box. Category Axis Title: Select this option to display and format the title of the category axis (usually the Y-axis). Type the category axis title in the text field next to the Show check box. Y1 Axis Title: Select this option to display and format the title for the Y1-axis. Type the Y1-axis title in the text field next to the Show check box. Y2 Axis Title: (This setting is available if the graph contains a Y2-axis.) Select this option to display and format the title for the Y2-axis. Type the Y2-axis title in the text field next to the Show check box. Axes: Select this option to format the style, size, color, and font displayed on the axes of the graph. 364 Interfaces for formatting graphs 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 All Axes: Select this option to format all the axes in the graph at once. Category Axis Values: Select this option to display and format the values displayed along the category axis of the graph. Y1 Axis Values: Select this option to display and format the values displayed along the Y1-axis of the graph. Y2 Axis Values: (This setting is available if the graph contains a Y2-axis.) Select this option to display and format the values displayed along the Y2-axis of the graph. Series Colors: Select this option to format the graphical components that represent metrics in the graph. For example, you can format the fill color and line color of bars in bar graphs, lines in line graphs, and so on. From the drop-down list, select the metric to format and make changes to the fill and line colors. Series Values: Select this option to format metric values in the graph. All Data Values: Select this option to display and format data values for all metrics represented in the graph. You can format data values for a specific metric. Select a metric from the drop-down list, then format the data values for that specific metric, then select the appropriate formatting options for the metric, as described below. Once you have selected the graph item to format, you can format the item using the following options: The options available may vary depending on the item you choose to format. Format: Select formatting options such as font size, font size, and whether to show tooltips in the graph. Show: Select this check box to show the item in the graph that you chose to format in the drop-down lists above. This option is selected by default. If you chose to format titles in the graph, a text field is displayed next to the check box. Type the text to use as the title. Tooltip: Select the check box to show tooltips when a user hovers the cursor over data in the graph. Type the tooltip text in the field. You can have an automatically generated tooltip displayed by typing {&TOOLTIP} (the default value of the field), type static text, or type a shortcut variable to have your text automatically replaced by a value when the graph is displayed. For a list of available shortcut text, hover the cursor over the information icon. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting graphs 365

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Position: Select the position in which to display the item. For example, you can choose to display a legend to the left or right of a graph. Font: Select a font type for the selected text. Style: Determine whether the selected text appears in bold, italics, bold italics, and so on. Size: Determine the size of the selected text. Effects: Specify whether the selected text is underlined and/or appears crossed out (strikeout). Color: Select a color for the selected text from the drop-down list. You can access additional colors by clicking More Colors. Fill: Specify the following to determine how the selected graph component, for example, the graph legend or background, is displayed on the graph. Color: Specify a color for the background of the selected graph item by selecting the color from the drop-down list. To apply a transparent background color, click No Fill. You can access additional colors by clicking More Colors. You can apply a color gradient, which is a combination of two colors, by selecting Gradients. In the Gradients dialog box, select the two colors to use for the gradient. Then select a shading style to determine the direction in which the two colors are blended together. Transparency: Adjust the transparency of the color using the Transparency slider. As you click and drag the thumb of the slider, the percentage of transparency is displayed in a tooltip. A low percentage causes colors to appear brighter and more solid (opaque). A high percentage causes colors to appear more faded. Effect: Select a bevel effect, such as Chiseled Edge or Sphere. The Donut and Sphere effects work with circular graph styles (such as a Pie graph), polygonl styles (such as a Radar graph), and rectangular styles (such as a Bar graph). The Smooth and Chiseled Edge effects are not applied to any circular types of graphs. Line: Select formatting options for displaying lines in the graph. Color: Choose the color in which to display the selected line from the drop-down list. To apply a transparent background color, click No Fill. You can access additional colors by clicking More Colors. 366 Interfaces for formatting graphs 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Format: Graph dialog box: Number tab You can select formatting options for numeric values in a graph using the Number tab in the Format: Graph dialog box. The following options are available: Target: Specify the data values to format, such as data values displayed on the Y-axis. The options available may vary depending on the graph style applied to the graph. All Data Values: Select this option to display and format data values for all metrics represented in the graph. Data Values for a specific metric: You can format the data values for a specific metric. To do so, select the Data Values for Metric option in which Metric is replaced by the metric that you want to format. For example, to format the data values for the Profit Margin metric, select the Data Values for Profit Margin option. All Axes: Select this option to format data values displayed in any of the axes in the graph. Y Axis Values: Select this option to format data values displayed on the Y-axis in the graph. Y1 Axis Values: Select this option to format data values displayed on the Y1-axis in the graph. Y2 Axis Values: Select this option to format data values displayed on the Y2-axis in the graph. Number: Select formatting options to apply to the numeric values you selected above. From the Category drop-down list, select a format to apply to the values, such as Percentage or Currency. Default: Allow Analytics Express to determine how to display the data values. General: Display numbers without any punctuation or other formatting symbols or syntax. Fixed: Select Fixed to determine the number of decimal places to be displayed, whether you want numbers to be separated every three decimal places, and whether negative numbers are allowed. Decimal places: Define the number of decimal places to display. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting graphs 367

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Negative numbers: Define the format in which to display negative numbers. Use 1000 separator: Determine whether to display numbers with a separator symbol every three digits (for example 1,000,000). Currency: Display numbers formatted as currency. Decimal places: Define the number of decimal places to display. Currency symbol: Define the currency symbol used to display the number. Currency position: Determine the position in which the currency symbol is displayed. Negative numbers: Define the format in which to display negative numbers. Date: Display numbers in date format. Type: Select the date format to use to display data, such as 4/12/07, April 12, 2007, 4/7/2007, and so on. Time: Display numbers in time format. Type: Select the time format to use to display data, such as 9:00, 9:00 AM, and so on. Percentage: Display numbers as percentages. Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal places to display. Negative numbers: Specify the format in which to display negative numbers. Fraction: Display numbers as fractions. Type: Select the format in which to display fractions. Scientific: Display numbers in scientific format. Decimal places: Specify the number of decimal places to display. From Grid: Display numbers using the default number formatting options inherited from the graph. 368 Interfaces for formatting graphs 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Format: Graph dialog box: Axes tab You can format the axes on a graph using the Axes tab in the Format: Graph dialog box. The following options are available: Axes Values and Scales: Determine formatting options for each axis in the graph, as follows: Y1 Axis Values - Use Manual Setting for: By default, options such as the maximum and minimum values displayed on the scale of the Y1-axis are automatically determined. You can override this formatting using the following options: Maximum Value: Select the check box and type the maximum value to use on the scale. Minimum Value: Select the check box and type the minimum value to use on the scale. Grid Interval: Select the check box and type the interval to use between values on the scale. When you export a graph to Excel, type maximum and minimum Y1-axis values as described above to ensure that the exported graph looks exactly the same as it does in MicroStrategy Analytics Express. Y2 Axis Values - Use Manual Setting for: By default, options such as the maximum and minimum values displayed on the scale of the Y2-axis are automatically determined. You can override this formatting using the following options: Maximum Value: Select the check box and type the maximum value to use on the scale. Minimum Value: Select the check box and type the minimum value to use on the scale. Grid Interval: Select the check box and type the interval to use between values on the scale. Dual Y Options: Determine how series in the graph are assigned to the Y1-axis and Y2-axis, as follows: Assign odd series to Y1 axis and even series to Y2 axis: Select this option to have the odd series on the graph automatically assigned to the Y1-axis, while the even series on the graph are automatically assigned to the Y2-axis. For example, if the 2008 Q1 Revenue Forecast, 2008 Q1 Revenue, 2008 Q2 Revenue Forecast, and 2008 Q2 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for formatting graphs 369

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Revenue series appear on your graph, 2008 Q1 Revenue Forecast and 2008 Q2 Revenue Forecast are assigned to the Y1-axis, while 2008 Q1 Revenue and 2008 Q2 Revenue are assigned to the Y2-axis. Manually assign series to each axis: Choose this option to manually select the axis on which to display each series. For each series you want to display on a specific axis, select the series and click the Add icon to add it to the Y2-axis or click the Remove icon to add it to the Y-axis. Format: Graph dialog box: Advanced tab Define various graph visuals, such as how text and lines are resized, subtotal display, and series display, using the Advanced tab in the Format: Graph dialog box. The following options are available: Set Series: Determine whether graph series are displayed by row or column. Font and line resizing: Specify how text and lines adjust to the size of your graph. Choose Absolute if you do not want text and lines to automatically adjust according to the size of the graph. Choose Relative if you want text and lines to automatically adjust to the size of the graph. Show subtotals: Determine whether to show subtotals on your graph. Format: Graph dialog box: Options tab Format a Gauge graph using the Options tab in the Format: Graph dialog box. This tab is displayed only if you are formatting a Gauge graph. The following formatting options are available: Gauge Settings: Select formatting options such as the display style of the needle on the Gauge graph and the thickness of the border to display around the gauge. Gauge Style: Determine whether the Gauge graph is presented in the Old graph style or the New graph style. The New graph style has more vibrant colors and effects. 370 Interfaces for formatting graphs 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Needle Style: Determine the style of the needle in the gauge. This option is available if the Gauge Style option is set to New. Border Style: Determine the style of the border around the gauge. This option is available if the Gauge Style option is set to New. Border Thickness: Determine the thickness of the border around the gauge. This option is available if the Gauge Style option is set to New. Range Thickness: Determine the size of the gauge's border for the Old style gauge graph. Start Angle: Determine the location on the gauge where the range labels begin. Stop Angle: Determine the location on the gauge where the range labels end. Interfaces for creating metrics for customizable, detailed dashboards For descriptions of the dialog boxes and interfaces for creating metrics, see the following sections: Insert Function dialog box, page 371 Insert New Metrics dialog box: Derived metrics, page 372 Insert Function dialog box You can add a derived metric that is based on a function directly to a dashboard using the Insert Function dialog box. For example, you can create a derived metric on-the-fly to calculate the absolute value of another metric. When the dashboard is run, the value of the metric is automatically calculated and displayed. To add a derived metric directly to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating metrics for customizable, detailed dashboards 371

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 2 From the Insert menu, select Text. The cursor becomes crosshairs. Move the cursor over the area in which to display the derived metric, then click and drag the cursor to draw a rectangular shape. A text field is displayed. Click an empty area of the Layout area to finish adding the text field to the dashboard. 3 Right-click the text field and select Insert Function. The Insert Function dialog box opens, with a list of functions from which you can choose to create the derived metric. 4 You can narrow down the list of functions displayed as choices in the Insert Function dialog box. To do so, from the Select a category dialog box, select the group of functions to display, such as Financial Functions or Math Functions. 5 From the Select a function list, select the function to use to create the derived metric and click OK. The Function Arguments dialog box is displayed, with a description of the function, a description of the arguments required for the function, and a preview of the function's formula. Select the appropriate options to define each argument required for the function. 6 Select OK to apply your changes. The derived metric is automatically created and displayed as a text placeholder in the text field you created in the steps above. 7 To preview your changes, from the toolbar, click the Express Mode icon. Insert New Metrics dialog box: Derived metrics You can create and add a metric to a dashboard using metrics already added to the dashboard (called a derived metric). For example, you can subtract the values of one metric from the values of another metric, such as Revenue Forecast - Revenue. You can calculate a monthly average, for example, Yearly Profit / 12. If the report shows the sales for a particular region, you can create a derived metric to view the same data in millions, defined as Sales/1,000,000. When you create a derived metric, it is added to the Dataset Objects panel but is not placed on the dashboard. You can add it to the dashboard just as you would any other metric. If you select a grid or graph before creating the derived metric, the metric is also added to the grid or graph. 372 Interfaces for creating metrics for customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 To create a derived metric 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Do one of the following: To create a derived metric in a grid: Right-click a grid in the dashboard s Layout area and select Insert New Metric. The Insert New Metric dialog box opens. To create a derived metric directly from a metric in the dashboard: From the Dataset Objects panel, right-click the metric on which to base the derived metric, and select Insert New Metric. The Insert New Metric dialog box opens. If the Dataset Objects panel is not open, select Dataset Objects from the Tools menu. To create a derived metric directly from a metric in the dashboard and base the derived metric on a function: Right-click the metric in the Layout area and select Insert Function. The Insert Function dialog box opens. 3 The Available pane on the left displays objects in the selected dataset. Select the first object to use to define the derived metric and click the > (right arrow) icon. The object moves to the Definition pane on the right. 4 Add a function or operator in one of the following ways: Type an operator such as + or - next to the object name in the Definition pane. Click the Function Wizard icon to be guided through the process of creating a function. 5 Select additional objects to define the derived metric and add them to the Definition pane, or enter a constant. 6 Click Apply. The system assesses whether your derived metric s definition is valid. If necessary, modify the expression until it is valid. 7 In the Name field, type a name for the new metric. 8 Click OK to apply the new metric to your dashboard. The new metric is added to the Dataset Objects panel. If you selected a report before creating the metric, the new metric is also added to that report. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Interfaces for creating metrics for customizable, detailed dashboards 373

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 9 You can now use the derived metric as you would any other metric. You can drag and drop it from the Dataset Objects panel to the dashboard s Layout area to place it into the dashboard. To edit a derived metric 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 If the Dataset Objects panel is not open, select Dataset Objects from the Tools menu. 3 Right-click the derived metric in the Dataset Objects pane and select Edit. The Rename/Edit Objects dialog box opens. 4 Make any desired changes to the metric. See the steps above for creating a derived metric, for details to make changes to the metric. To delete a derived metric 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 If the Dataset Objects pane is not open, select Dataset Objects from the Tools menu. 3 Right-click the derived metric in the Dataset Objects pane and select Delete from Document. Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards For descriptions of dialog boxes and interfaces to define additional options for customizable, detailed dashboards, such as how to sort data in a dashboard or export a dashboard, see the following sections: Attribute Forms dialog box, page 375 Configure Selector dialog box, page 376 Export dialog box, page 377 374 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Grouping Properties dialog box, page 377 Manage Views Editor, page 379 Sort Document dialog box, page 382 Insert Layout dialog box, page 383 View Filter dialog box, page 384 Attribute Forms dialog box You can choose which attribute forms to display in a grid using the Attribute Forms dialog box. For example, a grid contains inventory data for a series of stores. You can choose to display the telephone number and address next to the name of each store in the grid. To determine which attribute forms to display in a grid on a dashboard 1 In a grid, right-click the name of the attribute whose forms you want to display, point to Attribute Forms, then click More. The Attribute Forms dialog box opens. To allow users to quickly show or hide an attribute form in the grid, select the attribute form and click the Add form to selections arrow to add it to the Selected Forms list. The attribute form will be displayed as an option when a user right-clicks the attribute and points to Attribute Forms. To automatically show an attribute form in the grid when the report is run, click the Show on Grid check box next to the attribute form to display. 2 To change the order in which the attribute forms are displayed in the grid, select the attribute form and use the Move Form Up and Move Form Down arrows to move the attribute form up or down in the Selected Forms list. 3 Click OK to save your changes. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 375

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Configure Selector dialog box The Configure Selector dialog box allows you to define a grid or graph as a selector, so that changes in one grid or graph affect the data displayed in a grid, graph, widget, or panel stack. The grid or graph does not become a selector, but performs in a manner similar to a selector. For background information on selectors, see Adding selectors to dashboards, page 182. The Configure Selector dialog box contains two lists. The list on the left contains the grids, graphs, widgets, panel stacks in the dashboard. Select each object to update when users choose items in the grid or graph used as a selector and click > to add them to the list on the right. If targets are automatically maintained, the Available and Selected Target lists are unavailable. The Configure Selector dialog box also contains the following properties: Apply selections as a filter: Determine whether to filter or slice data based on user selections. Select this option to filter data based on user selections before metric data is aggregated and displayed in the dashboard. Clear this option to have user selections determine which slices of data are combined and shown in the report. This option is unavailable and cleared if you selected the Metrics column as the selector. Show option for All: Determine whether to allow users to display data for all items in the selector at once by selecting the All option. Show option Total: Determine whether to allow users to display totals by selecting the Total option. This check box is available when the Apply selections as a filter check box is cleared. Automatically update when there is no data for the current selection: Determine what to display when a user selects an item for which no data exists. The selector that you want to be automatically updated must be on a panel. The selector that will update the first selector must target the panel stack. This check box is available when the selector slices data (the Apply selections as a filter check box is cleared). To display a message that no data is returned, clear the check box. To display an item, select the check box. Accessing the Configure Selector dialog box 1 Open a dashboard in the Document Editor. 376 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 2 Click the grid to use as the selector. 3 Do one of the following: If an object has already been enabled as a selector, right-click that object in the grid, and choose Edit Selector. The Configure Selector dialog box opens. If an object has not been enabled as a selector, right-click the attribute name (not an element) in the grid to use as the selector, and choose Use as Selector. The Selector dialog box opens. Export dialog box When you export a dashboard that is grouped by an attribute or contains multiple layouts to a PDF or Excel spreadsheet, the Export dialog box opens. You can define exporting options such as which layouts to export or whether to export all pages in the dashboard. The Export dialog box contains the following options: Export: Define which layouts to export. This option is only displayed when exporting a multi-layout dashboard. To export all layouts in the dashboard, select All layouts. To export only the layout that is currently displayed, select Current layout. Expand Page-by: Define whether to export only the currently displayed page, or all of the pages of the dashboard. This option is only displayed when exporting a dashboard whose data is grouped by an attribute. To export only the currently displayed page, clear the Expand page-by check box. To export all of the pages, select the Expand page-by check box. Grouping Properties dialog box The Grouping Properties dialog box allows you to select display options for a group of data in a dashboard. Each of these attributes will have their own header and footer section in the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 377

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide The options below affect dashboard display in Express Mode as well as the printed PDF of a dashboard (unless otherwise noted); they do not change the display in Design Mode. The options in the dialog box are described below: Page By Mode: This mode allows users to view data one group at a time. Groups of data are displayed on separate pages of the dashboard when the dashboard is exported to PDF. The options are: No Page-By (All Only): Disables grouping, so that you cannot group data by the elements of this group. When you view the dashboard, all elements of this group are displayed. This mode is useful for the groups on the right in the Grouping panel, for which it may not be useful to show data for one element at a time. If you disable page-by for a particular grouping attribute, all attributes to the right of it in the Grouping panel are also disabled. Page-By (Single Element Only): Enables grouping by this attribute, but users cannot choose to display all the elements of the group simultaneously when viewing the dashboard. This is useful for groups with many elements, in which it would not be useful to display all the elements at one time. When a dashboard contains multiple groups, this option is unavailable for the group farthest to the right in the Grouping panel. Page-By (Single Element or All): Enables grouping by this attribute and allows all elements of the group to be displayed simultaneously. By default, this mode is selected. Show Header: Determine whether the dashboard's header section for this attribute is displayed. Show Footer: Determine whether the dashboard's footer section for this attribute is displayed. Render horizontally: Determine whether the group is displayed horizontally, with the detail sections displayed next to the group header, horizontally across the page. Show Totals: Determine whether to add a group-by option for Total, so that you can select it when you view the dashboard. The Total option displays the total for all the group elements in the dashboard. The Keep group together, Page break between groups, and Restart page numbering options apply to PDF only. Keep group together: When selected, page breaks are not allowed within the selected group, from its group header to its footer and all the content between them. By default, page breaks are allowed. 378 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Page break between groups: When selected, each group begins on a new page. By default, groups are printed on the same page. Restart page numbering: When selected, page numbering restarts for each group. By default, page numbering does not restart. Restart page numbering is available when Page break between groups is selected. Sheet break between groups: When selected, a separate worksheet, in the same Excel workbook, is created for each page when you export the dashboard to Excel. This property applies only when you export the dashboard to Excel. To access the Grouping Properties dialog box 1 Open a dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Right-click a field in the Grouping panel and select Grouping Properties. Manage Views Editor You can specify how to display dashboards on mobile devices by using Mobile Views. Mobile Views allow you to quickly and easily determine how the elements of a dashboard are displayed when the user rotates the mobile device. Mobile Views also allow you to design dashboards to accommodate mobile devices with different screen sizes. Steps are below to: Add a Mobile View to a dashboard and specify options to help determine which Mobile View is displayed when the dashboard is shown on a mobile device, including the height, width, and orientation for which the Mobile View is designed to be displayed. Delete a Mobile View from a dashboard. Hide or delete an object in a dashboard with Mobile Views Determine which Mobile View to use to display a dashboard in Design and Editable Mode. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 379

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To define a Mobile View in a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 From the Tools menu, select Manage Views. The Manage Views Editor opens. A default Mobile View is automatically displayed in the list of Mobile Views, and cannot be deleted. 3 Click the Duplicate icon next to an existing Mobile View. A new Mobile View is automatically created. 4 In the Name field, type a name for the new Mobile View. 5 Under the Resolution column, specify the height and width of the mobile device screen on which to display the Mobile View, as follows: a b In the first field, type the width, in pixels, of the device screen. In the second field, type the height, in pixels, of the device screen. 6 You can specify whether the Mobile View is designed to be displayed on a mobile device when the device is held vertically or horizontally. From the Orientation drop-down list, select one of the following: To display the Mobile View when the device is held vertically, select Portrait Only. To display the Mobile View when the device is held horizontally, select Landscape Only. To display the same Mobile View when the device is held vertically or horizontally, select Portrait and Landscape. This option is selected by default. 7 Repeat the appropriate steps above to define each Mobile View. 8 You can determine which Mobile View to display in Design Mode and Editable Mode. Under the Current column, select the Mobile View to display. 9 To delete an existing Mobile View, click the Delete icon next to the Mobile View to delete. 10 You can choose to show all dashboard objects in Design Mode, regardless of whether they are marked as hidden. For example, you design a Mobile View to be displayed on the mobile device. The Mobile View contains 380 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 several objects that will be displayed on the mobile device, as well as a grid that is marked as hidden and will not be displayed. You can choose to display all the objects in Design Mode, including the grid. Do one of the following: To display all objects in Design Mode, regardless of whether they are hidden, select the Show hidden objects in Design Mode check box. To display in Design Mode only the objects that are specified as not hidden, clear the Show hidden objects in Design Mode check box. 11 Click OK to save your changes and return to the dashboard. 12 Add objects to the dashboard, such as text fields, images, graphs, and so on. For more information on adding content to a dashboard, see Adding and formatting content in a customizable, detailed dashboard, page 176. When you add a new object to the dashboard, a message is displayed asking if you would like to make the object visible in all Mobile Views. Do one of the following: To make the object visible in all views, select Yes. To make the object visible in only the current Mobile View, select No. To determine which Mobile View to display in Analytics Express You can determine which Mobile View to display in Design Mode and Editable Mode when the dashboard is displayed in Analytics Express, as described below. 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 From the Tools menu, select Manage Views. The Manage Views Editor opens. 3 Under the Current column, select the Mobile View to display. 4 Click OK to save your changes. To delete a Mobile View from a dashboard 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 381

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 2 From the Tools menu, select Manage Views. The Manage Views Editor opens. 3 To delete an existing Mobile View, click the Delete icon next to the Mobile View to delete. 4 Click OK to save your changes. To hide or delete an object in a dashboard with Mobile Views Once you have added a Mobile View to the dashboard, you can choose to delete individual objects entirely from the dashboard, or hide them from display in a specific Mobile View, as described below. 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Select the object to hide or delete. 3 Press DELETE. A message is displayed asking you if you want to delete the object from the dashboard. Select one of the following: To delete the object, select Yes. To hide the object in the Mobile View currently displayed in Analytics Express, but keep the object visible in all other Mobile Views, select No. Sort Document dialog box The Sorting dialog box allows you to sort the data for the Grouping and Detail sections of a dashboard. You can select what objects to sort, the sorting criteria (for example, the attribute form on which to sort), and the sorting order (ascending or descending). The following options are available: Grouping: When data in the document is grouped, each attribute used to group data is displayed here. You cannot add an additional sort for the grouping section. Grouping items are sorted in the order they appear in the Grouping panel. To change that order, rearrange the objects in the Grouping panel. From the drop-down list, specify the attribute form to sort on. 382 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 Detail: You can sort by any object that is included in the primary dataset used to provide data for the dashboard, as follows: From the Sort By drop-down list, specify the object on which to sort first. From the Then By drop-down lists, choose additional objects on which to sort. These objects are sorted after the Sort by object. You can define the sorting order by using up to three objects, if you have multiple objects listed. Select Ascending or Descending to determine whether to sort data in ascending (A to Z) or descending (Z to A) order. To access the Sort Document dialog box 1 From the Data menu, select Sort Document. Insert Layout dialog box You can add layouts to a dashboard using the Insert Layout dialog box. Once you have added multiple layouts to the dashboard, users can easily switch between layouts by clicking the tabs at the top of the dashboard, making it easy to display related data. Analytics Express provides templates for dashboard layouts. Steps are below to add a layout to a dashboard. To add a layout to a dashboard 1 In a dashboard, from the toolbar, click the Design Mode icon. 2 From the Insert menu, select Layout. The Insert Layout dialog box opens. 3 Select the template to use to create the new layout. 4 Click OK. The new layout is added to the dashboard. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 383

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide View Filter dialog box You can add a view filter to a grid or graph in a dashboard to restrict the amount of data displayed on the grid or graph. To filter data in a grid or graph in a dashboard using a view filter 1 Open the dashboard in Design or Editable Mode. 2 Right-click the grid or graph whose contents you want to filter, then select Edit View Filter. The View Filter dialog box opens. 3 To create a new filtering condition, click Add Condition. 4 From the Filter On drop-down list, select the report object (attribute or metric) on which to base your filter. 5 You can choose to create the filtering condition based on an attribute or metric. Do one of the following: To filter based on an attribute, choose whether to filter based on a comparison between values, or choose attribute elements from a list, as follows: a To filter based on a comparison between values, choose the Qualify option, then perform the following steps: From the first drop-down list, select the attribute form to qualify on, such as DESC or ID. b If From the second drop-down list, select a comparison operator such as Greater than, then specify the value to compare the attribute to, as follows: you choose Qualify and are qualifying on a date-related attribute, you can either type the day in or select it from a calendar (if DHTML is enabled). Click the calendar icon next to the date field, then click on a date to select it. To compare the attribute to a static value, enter the value in the field on the right. To compare the attribute to another attribute, click the Select Attribute icon. From the third drop-down list, select the attribute to use as a comparison. 384 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Interfaces for Working with Dashboards 6 a To filter by choosing attribute elements from a list, choose the Select option, then perform the following steps: Determine whether to include or exclude data in the grid or graph for items in the list, as follows: To include data for items that appear in the list, select In List. To exclude data for items that appear in the list, select Not In List. b From the Available list on the left, select items and click the Add to Selections icon to add them to the Selected list on the right. You can select multiple items at once by pressing CTRL and clicking each item to select it. You can use the Search for field to search for a particular attribute element. Type the name of the attribute element in the field. To filter data based on a metric, from the first drop-down list, choose a comparison operator such as Greater than, then do one of the following: To compare the metric to a static value, type the value in the field. To compare the metric to another metric, click the Select Metric icon. From the drop-down list, select the metric to use as a comparison. 6 Click Apply next to the condition to create and add the condition to the view filter. 7 Repeat the appropriate steps above to create any additional conditions as desired. 8 Click OK to apply your view filter to the grid or graph. Rename/Edit Objects dialog box You can rename an object on a grid to make it easier for users to identify the object and its role on the grid. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 385

6 Interfaces for Working with Dashboards MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide To rename an object on a report 1 Click the name of the report to execute it. 2 On the grid, right-click the object to rename and select Rename. The Rename/Edit Objects dialog box opens. 3 Type a new name for the object in the Name field. 4 Click OK to apply your changes. 386 Additional interfaces for creating customizable, detailed dashboards 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

7 7.ADDITIONAL RESOURCES Resources Documentation MicroStrategy provides both manuals and online help; these two information sources provide different types of information, as described below: Manuals: In general, MicroStrategy manuals provide: Introductory information and concepts Examples and images Checklists and high-level procedures to get started The steps to access the manuals are described in Accessing manuals and other documentation sources, page 394. Most of these manuals are also available printed in a bound, soft cover format. To purchase printed manuals, contact your MicroStrategy Account Executive with a purchase order number. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Resources 387

7 Additional Resources MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Help: In general, MicroStrategy help provides: Detailed steps to perform procedures Descriptions of each option on every software screen Translations For the most up-to-date translations of MicroStrategy documentation, refer to the MicroStrategy Knowledge Base. Due to translation time, manuals in languages other than English may contain information that is one or more releases behind. You can see the version number on the title page of each manual. Finding information You can search all MicroStrategy books and Help for a word or phrase, with a simple Google search at www.google.com. For example, type MicroStrategy derived metric or MicroStrategy logical table into a Google search. As described above, books typically describe general concepts and examples; Help typically provides detailed steps and screen options. To limit your search to MicroStrategy books, on Google s main page you can click More, then select Books. Manuals for MicroStrategy overview and evaluation Introduction to MicroStrategy: Evaluation Guide Instructions for installing, configuring, and using the MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition of the software. This guide also includes a detailed, step-by-step evaluation process of MicroStrategy features, where you perform reporting with the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and its sample business data. MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition Quick Start Guide Overview of the installation and evaluation process, and additional resources. MicroStrategy Suite: Quick Start Guide Evaluate MicroStrategy as a departmental solution. Provides detailed information to download, install, configure, and use the MicroStrategy Suite. 388 Resources 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Additional Resources 7 Resources for Identity and Loyalty Alert Commerce Management System (CMS) Guide and Alert API Reference Content resources providing steps to deliver and manage marketing and commerce content through the Alert mobile applications. Usher Administration Guide Steps to perform mobile identity validation using the Usher mobile identity network to issue electronic badges for identifying users. Manuals for query, reporting, and analysis MicroStrategy Installation and Configuration Guide Information to install and configure MicroStrategy products on Windows, UNIX, Linux, and HP platforms, as well as basic maintenance guidelines. MicroStrategy Upgrade Guide Instructions to upgrade existing MicroStrategy products. MicroStrategy Project Design Guide Information to create and modify MicroStrategy projects, and understand facts, attributes, hierarchies, transformations, advanced schemas, and project optimization. MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide Instructions to get started with MicroStrategy Developer and MicroStrategy Web, and how to analyze data in a report. Includes the basics for creating reports, metrics, filters, and prompts. MicroStrategy Advanced Reporting Guide: Enhancing Your Business Intelligence Application Instructions for advanced topics in the MicroStrategy system, building on information in the Basic Reporting Guide. Topics include reports, Freeform SQL reports, Query Builder reports, filters, metrics, Data Mining Services, custom groups, consolidations, and prompts. Document and Dashboard Analysis Guide Instructions for a business analyst to execute and analyze a document in MicroStrategy Developer and MicroStrategy Web, building on basic 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Resources 389

7 Additional Resources MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide concepts about projects and reports presented in the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation Guide: Creating Boardroom Quality Documents Instructions to design and create Report Services documents, building on information in the Document and Dashboard Analysis Guide. It is organized to help guide you through creating a new document, from creating the document itself, to adding objects to the new document, and formatting the document and its objects. MicroStrategy Dashboards and Widgets Creation Guide: Creating Interactive Dashboards for your Data Instructions for designing and creating MicroStrategy Report Services dashboards, a type of document that is optimized for viewing online and for user interactivity. It builds on the basic concepts about documents presented in the MicroStrategy Report Services Document Creation Guide. MicroStrategy OLAP Services Guide Information on MicroStrategy OLAP Services, which is an extension of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. OLAP Services features include Intelligent Cubes, derived metrics, derived elements, dynamic aggregation, view filters, and dynamic sourcing. MicroStrategy Office User Guide Instructions for using MicroStrategy Office to work with MicroStrategy reports and documents in Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint, and Word, to analyze, format, and distribute business data. MicroStrategy Mobile Analysis Guide: Analyzing Data with MicroStrategy Mobile Information and instructions for using MicroStrategy Mobile to view and analyze data, and perform other business tasks with MicroStrategy reports and documents on a mobile device. MicroStrategy Mobile Design and Administration Guide: A Platform for Mobile Intelligence Information and instructions to install and configure MicroStrategy Mobile, as well as instructions for a designer working in MicroStrategy Developer or MicroStrategy Web to create effective reports and documents for use with MicroStrategy Mobile. 390 Resources 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Additional Resources 7 MicroStrategy System Administration Guide: Tuning, Monitoring, and Troubleshooting your MicroStrategy Business Intelligence System Concepts and high-level steps to implement, deploy, maintain, tune, and troubleshoot a MicroStrategy business intelligence system. MicroStrategy Supplemental Reference for System Administration: VLDB Properties, Internationalization, User Privileges, and other Supplemental Information for Administrators Information and instructions for MicroStrategy administrative tasks such as configuring VLDB properties and defining data and metadata internationalization, and reference material for other administrative tasks. MicroStrategy Functions Reference Function syntax and formula components; instructions to use functions in metrics, filters, attribute forms; examples of functions in business scenarios. MicroStrategy MDX Cube Reporting Guide Information to integrate MicroStrategy with MDX cube sources. You can integrate data from MDX cube sources into your MicroStrategy projects and applications. Manuals for Analytics Modules Analytics Modules Installation and Porting Guide Customer Analysis Module Reference Sales Force Analysis Module Reference Financial Reporting Analysis Module Reference Sales and Distribution Analysis Module Reference Human Resources Analysis Module Reference Manuals for Narrowcast Services products MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Getting Started Guide Instructions to work with the tutorial to learn Narrowcast Server interfaces and features. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Resources 391

7 Additional Resources MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Installation and Configuration Guide Information to install and configure Narrowcast Server. MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Application Designer Guide Fundamentals of designing Narrowcast Server applications. MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server System Administrator Guide Concepts and high-level steps to implement, maintain, tune, and troubleshoot Narrowcast Server. MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server Upgrade Guide Instructions to upgrade an existing Narrowcast Server. Software Development Kits MicroStrategy Developer Library (MSDL) Information to understand the MicroStrategy SDK, including details about architecture, object models, customization scenarios, code samples, and so on. MicroStrategy Web SDK The Web SDK is available in the MicroStrategy Developer Library, which is part of the MicroStrategy SDK. Narrowcast Server SDK Guide Instructions to customize Narrowcast Server functionality, integrate Narrowcast Server with other systems, and embed Narrowcast Server functionality within other applications. Documents the Narrowcast Server Delivery Engine and Subscription Portal APIs, and the Narrowcast Server SPI. Documentation for MicroStrategy Portlets Enterprise Portal Integration Help Information to help you implement and deploy MicroStrategy BI within your enterprise portal, including instructions for installing and configuring out-of-the-box MicroStrategy Portlets for several major enterprise portal servers. 392 Resources 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Additional Resources 7 This resource can be accessed from the MicroStrategy Product Manuals page, as described in Accessing manuals and other documentation sources, page 394. Documentation for MicroStrategy GIS Connectors GIS Integration Help Information to help you integrate MicroStrategy with Geospatial Information Systems (GIS), including specific examples for integrating with various third-party mapping services. This resource can be accessed from the MicroStrategy Product Manuals page, as described in Accessing manuals and other documentation sources, page 394. Help Each MicroStrategy product includes an integrated help system to complement the various interfaces of the product as well as the tasks that can be accomplished using the product. Some of the MicroStrategy help systems require a web browser to be viewed. For supported web browsers, see the MicroStrategy Readme. MicroStrategy provides several ways to access help: Help button: Use the Help button or? (question mark) icon on most software windows to see help for that window. Help menu: From the Help menu or link at the top of any screen, select MicroStrategy Help to see the table of contents, the Search field, and the index for the help system. F1 key: Press F1 to see context-sensitive help that describes each option in the software window you are currently viewing. For MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web Administrator, and MicroStrategy Mobile Server, pressing the F1 key opens the context-sensitive help for the web browser you are using to access these MicroStrategy interfaces. Use the Help menu or? (question mark) icon to access help for these MicroStrategy interfaces. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Resources 393

7 Additional Resources MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Accessing manuals and other documentation sources The manuals are available from http://www.microstrategy.com/producthelp. Adobe Acrobat Reader is required to view these manuals. If you do not have Acrobat Reader installed on your computer, you can download it from http://get.adobe.com/reader/. The best place for all users to begin is with the MicroStrategy Basic Reporting Guide. To access the manuals and other documentation sources, visit http://www.microstrategy.com/producthelp. Documentation standards MicroStrategy online help and PDF manuals (available both online and in printed format) use standards to help you identify certain types of content. The following table lists these standards. These standards may differ depending on the language of this manual; some languages have rules that supersede the table below. Type bold italic Courier font Indicates Button names, check boxes, options, lists, and menus that are the focus of actions or part of a list of such GUI elements and their definitions Example: Click Select Warehouse. Names of other product manuals and documentation resources When part of a command syntax, indicates variable information to be replaced by the user Example: The aggregation level is the level of calculation for the metric. Example: Type copy c:\filename d:\foldername\filename Calculations Code samples Registry keys Path and file names URLs Messages displayed in the screen Text to be entered by the user Example: Sum(revenue)/number of months. Example: Type cmdmgr -f scriptfile.scp and press Enter. + A keyboard command that calls for the use of more than one key (for example, SHIFT+F1). 394 Resources 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Additional Resources 7 Type Indicates A note icon indicates helpful information for specific situations. A warning icon alerts you to important information such as potential security risks; these should be read before continuing. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. Resources 395

7 Additional Resources MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 396 Resources 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

LEGAL NOTICES Document number: 09770040 Copyright 2013 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved. If you have not executed a written or electronic agreement with MicroStrategy or any authorized MicroStrategy distributor, the following terms apply: This software and documentation are the proprietary and confidential information of MicroStrategy Incorporated and may not be provided to any other person. Copyright 2001-2013 by MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved. THIS SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR LIMITED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER MICROSTRATEGY INCORPORATED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE AND NONINFRINGMENT, QUALITY OR ACCURACY. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT MICROSTRATEGY, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED WITH THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR CORRECTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event will MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved with the creation, production, or distribution of the Software be liable to you on account of any claim for damage, including any lost profits, lost savings, or other special, incidental, consequential, or exemplary damages, including but not limited to any damages assessed against or paid by you to any third party, arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, even if MicroStrategy, Inc. or any such other person or entity has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for the claim by any other party. In addition, MicroStrategy, Inc. or any other person involved in the creation, production, or distribution of the Software shall not be liable for any claim by you or any other party for damages arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Software and Documentation, based upon principles of contract warranty, negligence, strict liability for the negligence of indemnity or contribution, the failure of any remedy to achieve its essential purpose, or otherwise. The entire liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. and your exclusive remedy shall not exceed, at the option of MicroStrategy, Inc., either a full refund of the price paid, or replacement of the Software. No oral or written information given out expands the liability of MicroStrategy, Inc. beyond that specified in the above limitation of liability. Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability for incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. The information contained in this manual (the Documentation) and the Software are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by MicroStrategy, Inc. MicroStrategy, Inc. reserves the right to make periodic modifications to the Software or the Documentation without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revision. Copying, duplicating, selling, or otherwise distributing any part of the Software or Documentation without prior written consent of an authorized representative of MicroStrategy, Inc. are prohibited. U.S. Government Restricted Rights. It is acknowledged that the Software and Documentation were developed at private expense, that no part is public domain, and that the Software and Documentation are Commercial Computer Software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency supplements to them. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAR 252.227-7013 et. seq. or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. Contractor is MicroStrategy, Inc., 1850 Towers Crescent Plaza, Tysons Corner, VA 22182. Rights are reserved under copyright laws of the United States with respect to unpublished portions of the Software. 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 397

Legal Notices MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide The following are either trademarks or registered trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated in the United States and certain other countries: MicroStrategy, MicroStrategy 6, MicroStrategy 7, MicroStrategy 7i, MicroStrategy 7i Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy 7i Olap Services, MicroStrategy 8, MicroStrategy 9, MicroStrategy Distribution Services, MicroStrategy MultiSource Option, MicroStrategy Command Manager, MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager, MicroStrategy Object Manager, MicroStrategy Reporting Suite, MicroStrategy Power User, MicroStrategy Analyst, MicroStrategy Consumer, MicroStrategy Email Delivery, MicroStrategy BI Author, MicroStrategy BI Modeler, MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy Administrator, MicroStrategy Agent, MicroStrategy Architect, MicroStrategy BI Developer Kit, MicroStrategy Broadcast Server, MicroStrategy Broadcaster, MicroStrategy Broadcaster Server, MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Platform, MicroStrategy Consulting, MicroStrategy CRM Applications, MicroStrategy Customer Analyzer, MicroStrategy Desktop, MicroStrategy Desktop Analyst, MicroStrategy Desktop Designer, MicroStrategy ecrm 7, MicroStrategy Education, MicroStrategy etrainer, MicroStrategy Executive, MicroStrategy Infocenter, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal Edition, MicroStrategy MDX Adapter, MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, MicroStrategy Objects, MicroStrategy OLAP Provider, MicroStrategy SDK, MicroStrategy Support, MicroStrategy Telecaster, MicroStrategy Transactor, MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web Business Analyzer, MicroStrategy World, Application Development and Sophisticated Analysis, Best In Business Intelligence, Centralized Application Management, Information Like Water, Intelligence Through Every Phone, Intelligence To Every Decision Maker, Intelligent E-Business, Personalized Intelligence Portal, Query Tone, Rapid Application Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Enterprise, The Platform For Intelligent E-Business, The Scalable Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Internet, Office Intelligence, MicroStrategy Office, MicroStrategy Report Services, MicroStrategy Web MMT, MicroStrategy Web Services, Pixel Perfect, Pixel-Perfect, MicroStrategy Mobile, MicroStrategy Integrity Manager and MicroStrategy Data Mining Services are all registered trademarks or trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated. All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated. Specifications subject to change without notice. MicroStrategy is not responsible for errors or omissions. MicroStrategy makes no warranties or commitments concerning the availability of future products or versions that may be planned or under development. Patent Information This product is patented. One or more of the following patents may apply to the product sold herein: U.S. Patent Nos. 6,154,766, 6,173,310, 6,260,050, 6,263,051, 6,269,393, 6,279,033, 6,400,265, 6,567,796, 6,587,547, 6,606,596, 6,658,093, 6,658,432, 6,661,340, 6,662,195, 6,671,715, 6,691,100, 6,694,316, 6,697,808, 6,704,723, 6,741,980, 6,765,997, 6,768,788, 6,772,137, 6,788,768, 6,798,867, 6,801,910, 6,820,073, 6,829,334, 6,836,537, 6,850,603, 6,859,798, 6,873,693, 6,885,734, 6,940,953, 6,964,012, 6,977,992, 6,996,568, 6,996,569, 7,003,512, 7,010,518, 7,016,480, 7,020,251, 7,039,165, 7,082,422, 7,113,993, 7,127,403, 7,174,349, 7,181,417, 7,194,457, 7,197,461, 7,228,303, 7,260,577, 7,266,181, 7,272,212, 7,302,639, 7,324,942, 7,330,847, 7,340,040, 7,356,758, 7,356,840, 7,415,438, 7,428,302, 7,430,562, 7,440,898, 7,486,780, 7,509,671, 7,516,181, 7,559,048, 7,574,376, 7,617,201, 7,725,811, 7,801,967, 7,836,178, 7,861,161, 7,861,253, 7,881,443, 7,925,616, 7,945,584, 7,970,782, 8,005,870, 8,051,168, 8,051,369, 8,094,788, 8,130,918, 8,296,287, 8,321,411, 8,452,755, 8,521,733, and 8,522,192. Other patent applications are pending. Various MicroStrategy products contain the copyrighted technology of third parties. This product may contain one or more of the following copyrighted technologies: Graph Generation Engine Copyright 1998-2013. Three D Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. Actuate Formula One. Copyright 1993-2013 Actuate Corporation. All rights reserved. XML parser Copyright 2003-2013 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Xalan XSLT processor. Copyright 1999-2013. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Xerces XML parser. Copyright 1999-2013. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. FOP XSL formatting objects. Copyright 2004-2013. The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved. Portions of Intelligence Server memory management Copyright 1991-2013 Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved. ASIHTTPRequest library. Copyright 2007-2013, All-Seeing Interactive. All rights reserved. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) International Components for Unicode Copyright 1999-2013 Compaq Computer Corporation Copyright 1999-2013 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright 1999-2013 IBM Corporation Copyright 1999-2013 Hummingbird Communications Ltd. Copyright 1999-2013 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright 1999-2013 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright 1999-2013 The Open Group All rights reserved. Real Player and RealJukebox are included under license from Real Networks, Inc. Copyright 1999-2013. All rights reserved. 398 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

INDEX A account, MicroStrategy Express 2 analyzing a dashboard 12 detailed dashboard 45 quick dashboard 14 assigning permissions to a user 238 attribute 70 B best practices for dashboard creation 71 C comment discussion. See also discussion. 247 copying a dashboard 249 creating a dashboard 68, 73 best practices 71 detailed. See also creating a detailed dashboard. 176 from a database connection 83 creating a database connection 92 deleting a database connection 93 editing a database connection 92 expression-based data 88 filtering data 89 table join 91 from a file 73 from a Salesforce.com report 79 high-level steps 70 quick. See also creating a quick dashboard. 95 creating a detailed dashboard 176 Data Cloud widget 186 graph 179 grid 179 Heat Map widget 188 Microcharts widget 191 object 178 selector 182 widget 185 creating a quick dashboard 95 filter 147 Graph visualization 106 Grid visualization 123 Heat Map visualization 124 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 399

Index MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide layout 143 metric 135 Network visualization 129 panel 145 text 97 visualization 98 CSV file as a data source 73 best practices 71 customizable dashboard. See detailed dashboard. D dashboard tasks. See dashboard - tasks. customizable. See detailed dashboard. detailed. See also detailed dashboard. 13 discussion 247 example 5 ipad. See dashboard on an ipad. quick. See also quick dashboard. 12 status 238 dashboard - tasks analyzing 12 detailed dashboard 45 quick dashboard 14 commenting on 248 copying 249 creating 68, 73 creating a snapshot 7 deleting 250 exporting 8 filtering (quick dashboard) 147 formatting detailed dashboard 206 quick dashboard 155 grouping (quick dashboard) 21 managing 237 opening 5 printing 10 refreshing 244 renaming 249 saving 6 viewing 4 dashboard on an ipad 57 emailing 64 example 58 Graph Matrix visualization 59 interacting with 58 Network visualization 60 printing 66 sharing 64 viewing 57 Data Cloud widget (detailed dashboard) 46 creating 186 data source 73 CSV file 73 database 83 Excel workbook 73 Google spreadsheet 73 Salesforce.com report 79 suggesting new 10 database as a data source 83 database connection creating 92 deleting 93 editing 92 deleting a dashboard 250 delivering a dashboard 241 detailed dashboard 13 adding graph 179 grid 179 objects 178 selector 182 widget 185 400 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Index analyzing data in 45 Data Cloud widget 46 Heat Map widget 46 Microcharts widget 55 formatting 206 widgets available in 14 discussion 247 comment adding 248 deleting 248 deleting 249 E emailing a dashboard 241 on an ipad 64 Everyone group 228 example 13 dashboard 5 dashboard on an ipad 59 Data Cloud widget (detailed dashboard) 46 detailed dashboard 13 discussion 247 Graph Matrix visualization ipad 60 quick dashboard 108 Graph visualization (quick dashboard) 23 Grid visualization (quick dashboard) 123 grouping a quick dashboard 21 Heat Map visualization (quick dashboard) 35, 125 Heat Map widget detailed dashboard 47 ipad 62 Microcharts widget detailed dashboard 55 ipad 64 Network visualization ipad 61 quick dashboard 39 quick dashboard 12, 14, 68 Teams panel 220 visualization (quick dashboard) 11 Excel, exporting to dashboard 8 visualization 8, 9 exporting dashboard 8 visualization 8 Express Delivery Dashboard 83 Express. See MicroStrategy Express. F filtering a layout (quick dashboard) 16 attribute element search 19 attribute element selection 18 clearing a filter 20 clearing all filters 20 metric comparison 20 metric value slider 19 undoing 41 filtering a quick dashboard 147 automatically applying selections 151 filtering a visualization with another visualization 153 layout. See also filtering a layout. 16 metric filter 148 removing 41 removing a filter 151 restricting other filters 152 Top N qualification 150 Filters panel (quick dashboard) automatically applying selections 151 displaying filter headers only 156 expanding filters 156 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 401

Index MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide moving 157 formatting 207 formatting a detailed dashboard 206 graph 207 grid 207 Microcharts widget 207 formatting a quick dashboard 155 Filters panel 156 Graph visualization 161 Grid visualization 169 Heat Map visualization 170 maximizing visualization size 156 Network visualization 174 rearranging visualizations 155 sizing an object 156 visualization 157 numeric values 159 renaming an object in 158 title bar 158 G Google spreadsheet as a data source 73 graph (detailed dashboard) 207 adding 180 Graph Matrix visualization (ipad) 59 Graph Matrix visualization (quick dashboard) Bar 121 Bubble 122 graph styles and requirements 121 Grid 122 Line 121 Scatter 122 Graph visualization (quick dashboard) 23 creating 106 formatting 161 grid (detailed dashboard) adding 179 formatting 207 Grid visualization (quick dashboard) 31 creating 123 formatting 169 group 228 adding a user to 230 adding a user to multiple 231 adding to a team 228 animation 23 creating 228 deleting 230 duplicating 229 Everyone 228 removing a user 231 renaming 229 grouping a layout (quick dashboard) 21 H Heat Map visualization (quick dashboard) 34 creating 124 formatting 170 Heat Map widget (detailed dashboard) 46 creating 188 Heat Map widget (ipad) 62 home page for a team 232 I ipad. See dashboard on an ipad. L layering data (quick dashboard) 143 layout (quick dashboard) 143 adding 144 deleting 145 filtering data 16 402 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Index grouping data (quick dashboard) 21 rearranging order 144 renaming 144 tab 14, 143 logging into MicroStrategy Express 2 on an ipad 4 M managing a dashboard 237 metric 70 creating 135 attribute-based 140 by changing aggregation 137 by combining multiple metrics 139 calculation-based 136 complex 141 cumulative total percentage 138 from scratch 141 function-based 140 moving total 137 ranking another metric 138 running total 137 deleting 143 editing 142 Microcharts widget (detailed dashboard) 55 creating 191 formatting 207 KPI List mode 195 Ticker mode 199 Vertical Scroll mode 199 Microcharts widget (ipad) 64 Microsoft Excel workbook as a data source 73 best practices 71 MicroStrategy Express 1 logging in 2 on an ipad 57 logging in 4 signing up for an account 2 MicroStrategy Mobile and MicroStrategy Express on an ipad 56 N Network visualization (ipad) 60 Network visualization (quick dashboard) 39 creating 129 formatting 174 O opening a dashboard 5 P panel (quick dashboard) 145 adding 145 deleting 146 duplicating 146 rearranging 146 removing 146 PDF, exporting to dashboard 8 visualization 8 permissions for a dashboard 238 personalizing a dashboard 240 printing a dashboard 10 on an ipad 66 Q quick dashboard 12 analyzing data in 14 animated group 22 example 12, 14 filtering data 16 grouping 21 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 403

Index MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide R grouping animation 22 layer 143 layout 143 panel 145 visualizations available in 13 refreshing a dashboard 244 canceling a scheduled refresh 246 immediately 245 scheduling 246 viewing refresh history 247 renaming a dashboard 249 S Salesforce.com report as a data source 79 saving a dashboard 6 scheduling email delivery of a dashboard 241 selector (detailed dashboard) 182 types 182 sharing a dashboard 238 delivering 241 discussion 247 emailing 241 on an ipad 64 permissions 238 personalization 240 status 238 signing up for a MicroStrategy Express account 2 snapshot of a dashboard 7 status of a dashboard 238 T team 220 adding a user group 228 creating 220 deleting 221 displaying in the Teams panel 221 duplicating users across multiple 227 Launchpad. See also Team Launchpad. 232 renaming 220 user 221 adding 222 adding multiple 223 importing 223 inviting 225 removing 227 Team Launchpad 232 creating 232 deleting 236 Teams panel 220 display 221 text (quick dashboard) adding 97 editing 97 removing 98 sizing 156 U user 221 adding multiple users to a team 223 to a group 230 to a team 222 to multiple groups 231 duplicating a list of 227 importing a list of 223 inviting to a team 225 personalization attribute for 225 removing from a group 231 from a team 227 404 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide Index V viewing a dashboard 4 on an ipad 57 visualization (ipad) Graph Matrix 59 Network 60 visualization (quick dashboard) 98 changing display type 133 deleting 135 duplicating 134 example 11 exporting 8 filtering another visualization 153 Graph 106 Grid 123 Heat Map 124 maximizing its size 156 moving 134 Network 129 rearranging 155 sizing 156 types 99 W widget (detailed dashboard) 13 adding 185 Data Cloud 186 Heat Map 188 Microcharts 191 types 185 widget (ipad) Heat Map 62 Microcharts 64 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc. 405

Index MicroStrategy Analytics Express User Guide 406 2013 MicroStrategy, Inc.